Home

Core Entities Version-1.0 9NT1425

1. The Customer Instruction View screen will be launched with all the instructions maintained for the customer The following fields can be viewed in this screen e Customer Number e Customer Name e Instruction Id e Instruction Date e Instruction Expiry Date e Instruction Description For mashregq you can press the hotkey F6 to invoke the instruction screen from the following screens too e Customer Creation Screen e Customer Account Creation Screen e Letters of Credit contract Creation screen e Bills and Collections Contract Screen e Consumer Lending Account Creation Screen e Funds Transfer Contract Screen 6 1 25 2 Viewing the Instructions Summary You can view the summary of instructions in the Instructions Summary screen It displays the status of the records maintained whether it is authorized unauthorized or rejected 6 42 ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing CSSINSTR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Y Instructions Summary Webpage Dialog Authorization Status Customer No Records per page Lock Authorization Status Record Status Customer No To view the summary of instructions you can perform a search based on any of the following Authorisation Status Select the authorisation status of the instruction as e Authorised e Unauthorised Record Status Select the record status of the i
2. Balance Interest Closing Date 7 3 2000 Seq Mo 1 Close Mode Details Close Mode Linked Product Other Details Details 1 Details 2 Details 3 3 73 ORACLE In this screen you can select the Close Mode which is to be used to close the account The option list positioned next to this field contains a list of all the Close Modes maintained in the Customer Account Closing Modes screen The product linked to the close mode will be defaulted Some of the close out modes may require additional details to complete the transaction These additional details can pertain to either of the following e The Offset Account e The Instrument when the Close Out is through an Instrument with which you payoff the balance in the account Thus based on the mode selected the withdrawal entries are booked against the appropriate product The balance of the account will drop down to zero Subsequently the account is marked as closed For detailed information on the Customer Account Closing Mode Maintenance screen you can refer the Maintaining Customer Account Closing Modes sub heading in this manual 3 8 Recording Details of Lodqment Book Requests For a customer account you can record details of lodgment book requests provided the use of lodgment books is allowed for the account You can capture these details in the Lodgment Book Maintenance screen To invoke this screen from the Application Browser select Customer Maintenance a
3. SD User Reference The system displays the SD user reference for the TD accounts If an EEFC account is created the local currency is not taken as account currency during validation 3 1 2 Capturing Main Details Type You have to indicate whether the account is to be opened only by the account holder or whether it can be jointly operated 3 3 ORACLE Country Specify the country of the customer This adjoining option list displays all valid country codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one The country information is captured to enable Mantas to analyse the transactions for possible money laundering activities Account Open Date You have to capture the date on which the account was opened Alternate Account Number You have to define an alternate account number for the account you are defining The alternate account number that you specify should be unique for each customer You can capture the old account numbers used by your bank before installing the Oracle FLEXCUBE system The old account numbers would be mapped with the new account numbers This would facilitate quick tracking of the account and generating queries In the Data Entry Module you can input a transaction using the alternate account number instead of the actual account number Clearing Account Number The clearing account number for the customer account is generated automatically if you have opted for auto generation in t
4. 1 3 ORACLE 2 Maintaining Customer Information Files 2 1 Introduction In the Customer Maintenance screen you maintain various personal and business details of the customers of your bank The CIF details are maintained at the branch level by the sign on branch These details can be accessed by all branches and therefore a duplicate customer record for a customer in two different branches need not be maintained 2 2 Invoking Customer Information Screen You can invoke the Customer Maintenance screen by typing STDCIF in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The four parameters listed on top are the four lines along which you maintain customer details These details have been classified into the following broad heads You maintain the main attributes of all customers individuals and corporate houses Auxiliary This screen shows the other details pertaining to the customer You maintain the attributes for individual customers You maintain the attributes for all corporate customers Custom You maintain any other corporate customer related information which your bank would like to maintain in addition to the ones defined under Corporate 2 1 ORACLE 2 2 1 Maintaining Customer Basic Record To define the basic details of the customer click on the tab titled Main The details that you can specify for a customer depend on the type of cus
5. ALL in which case the tax waiver would be applicable to all products and account classes From Date and To Date You need to specify the date from which the particular waiver rule is applicable The To Date is the date up to which the waiver rule is effective The To Date should be greater than or equal to the From Date The To Date field can also be left blank which would indicate that the maintenance is open ended Waiver Specify the tax waiver in terms of percentage which should be made applicable for the period defined The value you enter should be gt 0 and lt 100 2 2 15 1 Pick up Order for Waiver Rule The following table gives the waiver rule pick up order Customer Customer Tax Currency Product Account Group No Category Class _ _ at ORACLE Customer Customer Tax Currency Product Account Group No Category Class Thus for a specific customer in the group the rule is relaxed for the product first and then for the currency If no rule is available for selection then the same process will be repeated where customer number is ALL for the customer group 2 2 16 Maintaining Tax Allowance Limit for Customers You can maintain tax free allowance limit at the Customer level Invoke this screen by typing STDCULMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button o ORACLE 3 Customer Tax Allowance Maintenance Web Page
6. During maintenance or online operations in the respective contract screens for the restricted transactions when you specify the customer account the system checks whether the account is restricted for the product that has been selected or the debit credit transaction type If so an override is sought when such contracts are saved lad ORACLE 3 1 13 Specifying Currency Limits Details You can specify restrictions for the account using the Limits screen To invoke this screen click the Currency Limits button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 2 Limits Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Currency Limits Details I coy cr Lt Amt Dr Lint Amt Account Number The system displays the customer account for which PC limits are being maintained Currency Specify the currency in which the auto exchange limits should be maintained The adjoining option list displays the currency codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Cr Lmt Amt Specify the credit limit amount in the chosen currency Dr Lmt Amt Specify the debit limit amount in the chosen currency 3 1 14 Specifying Statement Details You can specify restrictions for the account using the Statement Details screen To invoke this screen click the Statement button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 28 ORACLE Statement Details Web Page Dialog Primary A c Statement Generate
7. From Date 6262000 T fs r ToDste 7 2000 r gt Transaction Date Value Date The Balance amount displayed here is the incoming cash flow amount or credit balance for the FT product Double clicking a record in the Customer Position screen displays the corresponding FT Contract Summary screen Double clicking a record in the FT Contract Summary screen displays the corresponding FT Contract Detail screen comprising the transaction details 9 6 ORACLE 9 2 6 Viewing Collaterals Details You can view the collateral details for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen Click the Collateral button The Collateral Summary View screen appears for all collaterals linked to the customer liability Double clicking a record in the Collaterals Summary screen displays the details of the selected collateral 3 Collaterals Summary Web Page Dialog Avdhorizeation Status Record Stairs Liabiiy identification GO00002 a Collsteral Cocke Search Advanced Seach Hemet Records perpage 15 l k Goto Fage Authorization Status Record Status Liability identification Collateral Value Offset Margin Limit Contribution Stari Daie Expiry Date Colalere j6 PEE Authorization Status Recore Status Authorized C Gosed U Unauthorized Open 9 2 7 Viewing Assets Liabilities Details You can view the total asset and total liability for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen
8. Select the media to communicate account related details to the customer such as account maintenance related charges fees interest etc from the option list You can choose either of the following e Mail e Telex e SWIFT e Fax Type The type of account is defaulted based on the account class selected However you can select the type of deposit account that you are maintaining a simulation for you can select any one of the following options e Single e Joint Clearing Bank Code The code for the bank serving as clearing house for the simulated account is displayed here Clearing Account Number The account number for the clearing activity for the simulated account is displayed here Alternate Account Number Specify an alternate account for the simulated account 5 133 ORACLE 5 4 30 Generating and Viewing Term Deposit Account Certificate To generate the details of the deposit account in certificate format click on the Generate Certificate button on the Customer Accounts Simulation screen To view the details of the simulated deposit account click the View Certificate button on the Customer Accounts Simulation screen You can view all the related details of the certificate generated for the simulated deposit account A Generated Certificate Web Page Dialog DCN Branch CHO Reference Number Report Module Message You can only view the details of the certificate generated for the
9. 31 Jul AC0001 200000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 13333 33 6666 67 31 Jul AC0002 100000 1 Aug 08 10 Quarterly 09 6666 67 3333 33 5 88 ORACLE Projected Projected Interest Interest amount amount till 31 from 1 Mar Apr 09 to Booking Liquidation Maturity 09 180 maturity date Interest rate frequency date days date Total TDS to be Liquidation interest deducted cm amount earned 10 A0001 5000 7500 31 Oct 08 A0002 2500 31 Jan 73500 NIL NIL 00 50 3 31 2009 A0001 3333 33 333 33 Year end 5000 accrual details A0002 1666 67 166 67 2500 will be considered for tax 30 Apr 09 A0002 processing NIL NIL A0001 The following tax related entries are passed during liquidation and year end on cash basis On 31 Oct 2008 NIL On 31 Jan 2009 CUSTOMER dr 750 TAX PAY cr 750 On 31 Mar 2009 Year end INTEREST ACCRUED dr 500 TAX PAY cr 500 On 30 Apr 2009 Next liquidation schedule in next financial year 5 89 ORACLE CUSTOMER dr 900 INTEREST ACCRUED cr 500 The following SDE values are populated for the above example when ICTDS batch processes tax product associated with the above deposits Account no A0001 DATE TOT_INT FOR_YEAR INT FOR PERIOD YEAR _END YEAR _END TAX 08 31 Jan 15000 5000 10 10C 09 31 Mar 20000 3333 33 1 10 10C 09 TAX_RATE TD 30 Apr 2500 1666 67 333 33 0 10 09 Account No A0002 The total accrued interest in a financial year is c
10. An indicator of the kind of account statement required to be generated periodically this could be either a Summary statement or a detailed one Alternate Account Number A unique identifier for a customer account other than the main Account Number This provision is made to enable tracking of accounts existing in the bank before the installation of FLEXCUBE For such accounts you can capture the old account numbers as the Alternate Account Numbers Available The amount available in a customer s account which can be drawn Blocked The amount that is blocked for other transactions which the customer has entered into and not executed At any point of time the account balance cannot be less than the blocked amount Corporate Parameters Information captured under customized parameters for corporate customers Customer Category A group of customers with logically similar features or attributes Dormancy Days The period following which customer accounts under a class are made inactive Exposure Country This is the country of exposure of a customer This information is maintained for Central Liability tracking identifier Name The name of the identification document furnished by the customer to the bank as proof of identity identifier Value The serial number document number or any identification number by which the identifier name document can be uniquely identified Joint Holder Code The account identifier code
11. Auxiliary Under Auxiliary you can view other details like provisioning etc The Customer Accounts Maintenance Main screen is displayed by default when you invoke the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen The Branch Code of the sign on branch is on display Branch Code The system displays the branch code of the sign on branch Account You can indicate the account number of the customer One customer can have any number of accounis The structure of the account number is defined in the customer account mask maintained in the Account Parameters sub screen of the Branch wide parameters screen The account number can be a combination of the account class customer code CIF Number serial number or currency as defined in the customer account mask The last constituent of the account number is always a system generated check digit it could be alphabetical or numeric depending upon the mask defined 3 2 ORACLE You cannot alter the relative position of the constituents of customer account as defined in the mask while maintaining actual customer accounts Customer No If you have included the CIF Number of the customer as part of the Account Mask the system automatically defaults the CIF code of the customer in the respective field You will not be allowed to modify this code However while defining the Account Mask in the Account Parameters section of the Bank wide Parameters screen if you have specified tha
12. Customer Name Clearing Type Number Term Deposit Currency Cheque Instrument No Cheque Date Mnemonic Code SD User Reference Account Class Small Account Number Drawee Account Number Routing No Main Nominee Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Description Account Type Single Joint Country Code Mode Of Operation Account Open Date Alternate Account Number Clearing Bank Code Clearing Account Number Address Interest Charges Linked Entities Restrictions Mis Statement Joint Holders Fields Account Signatory TD Payout Details FX Linkage Change Log Maker Date Time Mod No WE authorized Checker Date Time WB open 5 3 ORACLE 5 3 Specifying Term Deposit Account The following details can be entered in this screen Branch Code The current logged in branch is defaulted here Term Deposit Account Number Specify the account number of the deposit account Term Deposit Currency Specify the currency to be associated with the TD account SD User Reference Specify the SD user reference for the TD accounts Customer No Specify the customer no for whom the TD account is to be opened Customer Name Specify the customer name for whom the TD account is to be opened Account Class Specify the account class Only the account class of TD account type is listed in this screen The TD accounts use account class of deposit type Pay In Option Pay in By Select the pay in option from the adj
13. Deferred reconciliation will be overridden by a stop payment instruction if any An error message or an override will be shown if a Cheque that comes in for clearing has a stop pay instruction against it but has no positive pay instruction 3 15 ORACLE 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 3 Capturing Provisioning Details An account inherits the provisioning parameters defined for the account class it uses You can change the defaulted parameters and make the following specifications as required in the Provision Details section of the Customer Account Maintenance screen Auto Provisioning Required You can indicate whether provisioning is applicable for the account If you indicate so the provisioning batch when executed picks up the account for provisioning Exposure Category If the logic for deriving the exposure category of the CIF or customer group to which the customer belongs based on the total exposure has been maintained in the Exposure Type Category Linkage maintenance then the exposure category of the account is identified If no logic has been maintained you can specify the exposure category in the Customer Account Maintenance screen Risk Free Exposure Amount You can indicate the risk free collateral amount that would be used in computing the provisioning amount for the account Provisioning Currency You can indicate the currency in which the provisioning amount must be calculated either account currency or local currency
14. Functions Operators Functions v Operators A Logical Operators Modification Number 2 I Open BB Authorized To define rules you can use the following operands for the account for which provision is being made e Outstanding Balance ACY This is the book dated debit balance in account currency in the account for which provision is being made e Outstanding Balance LCY This is the book dated debit balance in local currency in the account for which provision is being made e Receivable Interest This is the interest receivable on the account for which provision is being made e Accrued Interest This is the interest that has been accrued but not liquidated as yet in the account for which provision is being made typically the interest that has accrued during the current liquidation cycle e Receivable Interest LCY This is the interest receivable in local currency on the account for which provision is being made 8 8 ORACLE Accrued Interest LCY This is the interest that has been accrued but not liquidated as yet in local currency on the account for which provision is being made Account Status This is the user defined status for the account for which provision is being made Exposure Category This is the exposure category of the account for which provision is being made It is picked up from the account details if it has not been specified in the account details it is picked up from the
15. You can enable Mod 9 Validation for positive pay accounts only Only if positive pay enabled then Mod 9 Validation will be active In the case of inward clearing of Positive Pay files if Modulo 9 is enabled for the product the system performs a Modulo 9 Validation on any new cheque If the cheque fails modulo 9 validations the system will display an error message on save In case of check replacement the Modulo 9 Validation is done for the new check number while in case of alohanumeric checks the system throws an error message if modulo 9 validation is checked When uploading a positive pay cheque the system will perform a Modulo 9 Validation if Modulo 9 validation is enabled for the product If the validation fails this particular check will not be uploaded The same will be valid in case of Cheque Replacement while for alphanumeric checks system will skip the check and display an error Validation Digit Validation digit will be having values only 0 and 9 If validation digit is 9 then 9 mod 9 remainder for the check number Excluding the check digit should be equal to the check digit for the check to be passed else the check is rejected The check digit is the last digits of the check i e if check number is 1800 then check digit is 0 The mod 9 remainder of the check number should be equal to the check digit for the check to be passed if validation digit in customer accounts maintenance is 0 else the check is rejected Stale Days
16. applicable for both year end and normal liquidation 5 110 ORACLE Formula 1 During normal liquidation YEAR_END 0 AND INT _FOR PERIOD TAX_RATE 100 TAX_WAIVER 0 AND TOT_INT FOR YEAR gt TDS LIMIT YEAR_END 0 AND INT FOR PERIOD TAX_RATE 100 TAX_WAIVER 1 AND TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR gt TAX_WAIVER_LIMIT Formula 2 During normal liquidation FORMULA1 gt 0 AND FORMULA SURCHG_RATE 100 TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR gt SURCHG_LIMIT Ti TAX_RATE2 100 If tax is recovered on year end accruals of previous financial year then YEAR_END_ TAX value will be available during first liquidation cycle of the current financial year Formula 3 During year end liquidation YEAR_END 1 AND INT FOR PERIOD TAX_RATE 100 TAX_WAIVER 0 AND TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR gt TDS_LIMIT YEAR_END 1 AND INT_FOR PERIOD TAX_RATE 100 TAX_WAIVER 1 AND TOT_INT FOR YEAR gt TAX WAIVER LIMIT FORMULA7 gt 0 AND FORMULA7 SURCHG_ RATE 100 TOT_INT FOR YEAR gt SURCHG LIMIT 5 111 ORACLE FORMULA7 FORMULAS FORMULA gt 0 ADL_TAX_RATE2 100 The below mentioned check points are operationally controlled during IC rule maintenance for TAX 9 4 25 5 The following accounting entries are defined for tax product for ILIQ event Book flag for all the formulas should be selected as TAX Periodicity should be selected as Periodic Accrual required should not be ticked Tax payable
17. c cccccsscccssccssccescccsccusccusccessseusccesccecceusseusccueseesseuscseceeeeceusceencs 12 7 ORACLE 1 1 1 About this Manual Introduction This manual is designed to explain the Core Entities module of Oracle FLEXCUBE It provides an overview to the module and provides information on using the Core Entities module of Oracle FLEXCUBE Besides this User Manual you can find answers to specific features and procedures in the Online Help which can be invoked by choosing Help Contents from the Help Menu of the software You can further obtain information specific to a particular field by placing the cursor on the relevant field and striking lt F1 gt on the keyboard Audience This manual is intended for the following User User Roles Back office managers officers Authorization functions Product Managers Product definition and authorization End of day operators Processing during end of day beginning of day Financial Controller Product Generation of reports Managers Organization This manual is organized into the following chapters Chapter 1 About this Manual acquaints you quickly with the organization audience glossary of icons and related documents for this user manual Chapter 2 Maintaining Customer Information Files explains the maintenance of various personal and business details of the customers of your bank Chapter 3 Maintaining Customer Accounts explains how you can maintain accounts in you
18. e Providing a copy to your customer e Keeping an internal copy for you You can generate Form 5498 either as part of initial filing with the IRS or after you have filed tax returns for that particular year 11 5 1 Generating Form 5498 as Part of Initial Filing During normal generation of Form 5498 as part of your initial filing with the IRS the system will include all transactions entered in the previous year for the previous year For example during normal generation of Form 5498 on say January 20 2003 all transactions entered during 2002 and pertaining to the financial year 2002 will be reported 11 5 2 Generating Form 5498 after Tax Filing During corrected generation post the date of tax filing the system will include apart from all the transactions included in normal generation such transactions which are entered in the current year for the previous year The report shows the total contributions for the year 11 5 3 Details printed on Form 5498 Oracle FLEXCUBE generates Form 5498 customer wise and plan wise that is for each customer for each type of plan held by the customer The type of plan can be Traditional IRA Roth IRA SEP SIMPLE etc The form contains the following details e Your bank s name and address e The customer s name social security number and address e The plan product type for which the form is being generated e The year for which the report is being generated e Total rollover contrib
19. rejecting transactions in the referral queue In case a transaction is rejected from the referral queue after the cut off time then system displays the following override message Rejected after cut off time o Transactions are accepted into the Referral Queue even after cut off time if account goes into overdraft 7 1 1 3 Enabling Netting Required Option If linked accounts are marked for referral you can choose to consolidate the balances in all the linked accounts before performing the referral check To process linked accounts which are marked for referral you will need to enable the Netting Required option in the following screens 7 1 1 4 Enabling Limit Maintenance Screen Enabling this option indicates that the netting of balances is allowed for accounts linked to the credit line To pool balances across accounts you may need to link a common Credit Line across accounts where balances are to be pooled Therefore you will need to indicate whether balances for the credit line and the respective accounts should be netted As a result while performing the limits check for accounting the system will take into consideration the collective balance across all accounts linked to the line EXAMPLE Let us assume that Silas Marner holds three accounts with your bank 1 SA0000121 2 SA0000122 3 SA0000123 All three are linked to the credit line SA_Pool The credit utilization limit you have offered him is USD 10 000 The Available
20. This specification is defaulted from the preferences for the account class used by the account and you can alter it if necessary Specifying Other Options Consolidation for Inward Clearing You need to indicate whether consolidation for inward clearing is required at the Customer Account level This option gets defaulted from the Account Class Maintenance screen If this option is unchecked in the Account Class Maintenance screen then it cannot be enabled here Back Period Entry Allowed You can choose to allow the posting of back valued entries into the account by enabling the Back Period Entry Allowed option If you choose not to restrict back period entries you will be allowed to post journal entry transactions to past periods as long as the account is open This specification is defaulted from the account class linked to the account You can choose to change it for a specific account While posting back valued transactions the System verifies whether the Back Period Entry Allowed option has been enabled for the account If the option has not been enabled an error message is displayed This check is also performed while uploading journal entry transactions ii ORACLE 3 1 5 MT210 Required A Notice to Receive message MT210 is an advance notification to your account servicing institution that it will be receiving funds that are to be credited to your bank s account with that institution For a nostro account you can spec
21. Transaction Ref Number Customer Customer Name Status Description New Status F Contract Account No Module User Ref No Cey Outstanding Amount Current Status Actual Status Status Message WB open Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Ok z z Ok Exit Checker Date Time Here system displays the following details Branch The system displays the branch code of the customer Customer Specify the customer moving into NPA status The option list provides all valid customer numbers Transaction Reference Number The system generates a unique transaction reference number Customer Name The system displays the name of the customer selected Status Description The system displays the description of the status selected New Status Select the new status of the customer mapped in BC and CL product level 2 57 ORACLE On press of P button the system displays the active contracts or accounts linked to the chosen customer number with the following details e Module e Contract Reference Number or CL Account Number e Currency e Outstanding Amount e Current Status As per system calculation on that day e Actual Status User Defined status at the Contract level e Status Value will be null on populating it for the first time And displays F if status change gets failed for the contract account e Message displays the error message if the value of the status is F Sron You hav
22. Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday To specify for monthly statements enter a number between 1 and 31 corresponding to the system date If you set the statement date to 30 then account statements will be generated on The last working day for months with lt 30 days For months with 30 days on the 30th if 30th is a holiday on the next working day If you set the statement date to 31 then account statements will be generated on The 31 for month with 31 days if 31st is a holiday on the next working day 3 33 ORACLE The last working day for months lt 31 days For a fortnightly statement you could specify 1 and 15 For all other cycles account statement will be generated on the last day of that cycle Generate Stat Only On Movement You can indicate that an account statement should be generated for the customer s account only when there has been a movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred out of the account For instance let us assume that on the August 21 2001 you have set the account statement generation frequency as Daily for the account LI0O20804 On September 5 2001 there has been no movement of funds in the particular account If you have opted for the Generate Only on Movement option the system will not generate a statement message for September 5 2001 If you choose not to enable this option account statements will be generated regardless of whether there has been a move
23. Within a contract allocation of funds towards the various components like interest penalty interest 6 26 ORACLE etc will be determined by the Liquidation Order maintained for the loan product To sum up the schedule date of the loan contract takes precedence followed by the product sequence and finally the liquidation order If insufficient funds are detected in an account with a receivable tracking the system will trigger the event LBLK indicating that enough funds are not available and that subsequent credits made to the account will be blocked as a receivable 6 1 16 Maintaining Transaction Restrictions for Account Class You can place restrictions on transactions involving customer accounts at the account class level As discussed earlier for customer account these restrictions get defaulted to all accounts that are linked to the account class But you are allowed to change these restrictions for individual accounts as well To maintain the restrictions click the Restriction button in the Account Classes screen The Product and Transaction Codes Restriction screen is displayed E Products and Transaction Codes Restriction Web Page Dialog Account Class TIMDP6 Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Products and Transcation Codes a Product Code Debit Credit Product Description Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Products and Transcation Codes O Tra
24. You can select the appropriate one Pneumonic Code Specify the transaction pneumonic code for the instrument type The adjoining option list displays all the valid pneumonic codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one 5 4 8 4 Closing Deposit Deposit accounts can be closed automatically on the Maturity Date of the deposit You can specify this by choosing the Close on Maturity option A deposit acquires the specifications for the account class under which it is opened you can change this 5 42 ORACLE If you choose the Close on Maturity option during the Beginning of Day operations on the Maturity Date the account will be closed The principal will be moved if specified to the account your customer has directed If the deposit remains unclaimed you can opt to move the principal and interest to the respective Unclaimed GLs maintained at your bank If you choose the Auto Rollover and Close on Maturity options the Auto Rollover option takes precedence In other words choosing the Close on Maturity option and the Auto Rollover option is redundant 5 4 8 5 Defining Specifications for Unclaimed Deposits On the maturity date of a deposit you can opt to Liquidate the deposit Rollover the deposit Move it to an unclaimed GL Interest liquidated for a term deposit can be handled in two ways If a customer account for liquidation of interest is specified interest is moved to the accou
25. displayed as an override while saving the transaction involving the account e While closing an account closure the System verifies whether there is any outstanding debit interest or charges on the account You will need to liquidate these before Account Closure An error log is created to store the error details of accounts for which liquidation could not be performed due to the following reasons e The Verify Funds option is enabled and partial liquidation is performed e The Verify Funds option is enabled and the account has insufficient funds e Accounting entries do not get passed successfully irrespective of whether the Verify Funds option is set or not Refer the End of Day processing for Debiting Receivable GLs section in the Daily Processing of IC chapter of the IC User Manual for details on end of day processes on Auto and Manual liquidation Maintaining Details for Free Banking For account classes for which a free banking period is being provided you can indicate the free banking parameters These include e The number of days after the account opening date for which no charges would be levied on the account This is the free banking period Charging for the account would commence when the free banking period has elapsed e Whether an advice charge start advice is to be sent to the customer indicating the commencement of charging on the account e The number of days before the charge start date the charge start advice
26. e Any e Manual In case of a transaction the system will check for the parameter you have specified here and accordingly change the status of the account However the parameter maintained at the account level will super cede the parameter you have specified here Display IBAN in Advices For an account class you can indicate whether the IBAN number of the customers involving the accounts within the class should be printed on advices sent to the customer If you would like to print the IBAN number of the customers on advices sent to the customers involving the account class you can enable the Display IBAN in Advices option by checking it Your specification will be made applicable to all customers linked to the account class You will be allowed to change this option for a specific account o IBAN Account numbers for specific customers can be captured while defining a specific account through the IBAN Sub screen of the Customer Account Maintenance screen Dual Ccy Deposit Check this box to enable the account class for Dual Currency Deposit DCD type Dual Currency Deposit DCD is a short term currency linked deposit that allows you to earn a higher interest rate than regular time deposits o You will be allowed to check this field only for Deposit Account Type If this box is checked for other Account types system throws an error 6 6 ORACLE 6 1 3 EEFC Account Check this box to indicate that the accounts creat
27. you can indicate whether provisioning entries for an account must be rebooked when provisioning is done after an automatic status change for the account Rebooking essentially means that fresh provisioning is done after reversing the previous provisioning amount The provisioning batch process when executed not only computes the provisioning amount it also records the current status of the account and checks whether the current status is different from the status that was prevalent when the process was previously executed If so the old provisioning amount is written back into the write back GL of the old status if the Rebook Provision option has been set in the Status Details and the entries for the new provisioning amount are booked into the provisioning GLs maintained for the current status in the Status Details If the Rebook Provision has not been set there is no reversal of the old provisioning amount and the differential provisioning entries are be passed as usual into the GLs maintained for the current status When there is a status change between two provisioning cycles the Rebook Provision option is set for the status with the higher sequence number For instance while moving from status NORM Normal to PDO1 Past Due Obligation the Rebook Provision option is set for the status PDO1 and while moving from PDO1 to NORM the Rebook Provision option is set for the status PDO1 again o If manual provisioning has been done the e
28. 12 26 1999 12 08 26 Modification Number 1 iv Open Authorized By SCRIPT2 Date Time 12 28 1999 12 11 50 E authorized To link appropriate GLs in case the pay in option chosen is pay in by GL you need to maintain the following details e Branch Code In this field enter the branch ID for which you want to maintain the GL e Payin option The options available are Payin by cash Payin by check Payin by account transfer and Payin by GL By default the General Ledger Code will select the customer account e GL Code The GL code you chose here will be picked up the system for the pay in option 5 4 10 Maintaining Cluster Deposit Details Oracle FLEXCUBE provides a facility to define and maintain clusters through the Deposits Cluster Maintenance screen Clusters maintained will be linked to the deposit account class so that the system can validate the parameters based on the linked cluster ID account class and currency during auto deposit You can invoke the Deposits Cluster Maintenance screen by typing LDDCLUST in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 5 44 ORACLE a Deposits Cluster Maintenance Webpage Dialog Cluster Identification Description Custer Details Currency Min booking amount Booking unit Withdraw unit Input By Date Time Modification Number WE Authorized Authorized By Date Time WB open You can maintain th
29. 24 3 1 12 Specifying Restriction Details ccccccccccccccccssccccecccccceecceesseeeeceeeeeaessseeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeceeesauaaeeeeees 3 25 31 13 Specifying Currency Limits Detaily ccccccccccccsscssesstsvciecvastesasccnsstassessssesscenssesvestecactsasesnsstadeceessevsseensens 3 28 3dAd4 Specifying Statement Details siccin ii a EE EOE AEE AE 3 28 Sibel Speci ying Account LIMIS sciwssisasccusesde vobaastedpaatsdesstecoraciueets swisha tedonabedeacidoictaGais cola tedoualndedaketata tales 3 35 3 1 16 Specifying Joint Holder Details cccccccccccccsseccccccccceeeeeesseeeeeeenaeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeeseaaaeeeseeeeeeas 3 37 Dll RCC IES IETEN CLS resets iis apres sti asta A eget eR aT esd ned Hs tds eee 3 38 Dill CCV Charee Ddi lS sesira renane pe canlclea Se T doce casa utes deeds GLa aR eTeEREE 3 43 3 1 19 Specifying Consolidated Charge Details sisisisevasevasduisisiseradevaidienasisavecerissevsaveoevadeniabeuseseisasiaenasisanecs 3 45 3 1 20 Specifying Standing Instruction DICTA S vxcscincwsevaserasdncnh tise redevednewe cise ybieres dreaaeignsecrsiehd pease eoesiieenasesapens 3 46 Sdad APEE TCC T AU OS arsi eT Seas RNase SADA d ci a aR aussie SALON ates 3 47 Dol COIN MS TOI Sarai es cca Sinaia sn acted Salus T e ce ETO E Te 3 49 iW spo aP E OF BN ky O21 Oe Tne Cen eT EITC ee RT TTT CTO ATOMS AR CREPE aT nt oC n AT COT RTT Ren at oer 3 52 Idd Specie Depos iS TIP ULC ONS cranes gi ca tac arn EEN E oan aoe 3 52 3d23 OC CIV DNE AV AI
30. 5 11 ORACLE Percentage Specify the amount of payout in percentage Offset Branch Specify the offset branch code of the account for payout The adjoining option list displays all the valid branch codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Offset Account You have to specify the customer account to which the money is to be credited for the TD If you click on option list in the Offset Account field a list of all valid account numbers that is maintained in the branch specified in the previous field will be displayed Double click on the account that you want to specify as the offset account The offset account and branch detail fields are enabled only if the option to payin is selected as the savings account Narrative Enter a brief description for the transaction Applicable for Interest Payouts Check this box if the account is applicable for interest payouts Recurring Deposit Auto Payment Take Down Check this box to allow the recurring deposit account to debit the payment account for the payment amount as per the instalment frequency Move Maturities to Unclaimed Check this box to move all the funds on the maturity date to the unclaimed GL mapped to the accounting role in the IC product Payment Branch Specify the details for the branch to which the payment account belongs Payment Accounts Specify the Payment Account this can be either savings account or the current account from wh
31. Account Type Nostro Start Date Misc Dr End Date Misc Cr Dormancy Days Savings Account Statement Current Format Deposit Display IBAN in Advices Line account InterPay Dual Currency Deposit No Frills Account EEFC Account Primary Account Statement Parameters Natural GL Dormancy Parameters Debit Type None Credit Summary Any Detailed Manual Cycle Statement Day Secondary Account Statement Parameters Tertiary Account Statement Parameters Offline Limit Type None Type None Provisioning Details Summary Summary Auto provisioning required Preferences REG Deposit Auto Deposit GL Lines Status Rule Amt Block Restriction MIS Branches Currencies Customers Categories Fields Statement j Input By Date Time Modification Number a Authorized Authorized By Date Time W open Defining an Account Class includes the maintenance of the following parameters 1 Assigning a unique Code to the Account Class and associating an appropriate description with the class 2 Indicating the type of account for which account class Is being maintained 3 Specifying the period after which accounts in this class should become dormant if no customer transaction is posted into the account 4 Indicating the date from when new accounts can be created under the account class 5 Indicating the end date after which the new accounts cannot be created for the account class 6 Maintaining the different statuses applicable to th
32. Advice Check the box Generate UDE change advice at account level to indicate that interest rate change advice has to be generated for the account at EOD System generates interest rate change advices for Customer Accounts and Savings accounts when the interest rate changes as part of EOD For those accounts when interest rate changes the details are handed off for rate change advice generation and the same is generated in the pre determined swift format as per MT 935 The advice tag used for interest rate change is RTCHG_ADVICE The advice format for interest rate change as per MT935 is given below Field Name Content Options Transaction Reference Number Further Identification Effective Date of New Rate 6 New Interest Rate 1 a12d Sender to Receiver Information M Mandatory O Optional 6x 6x OX In sae taa i o fa C o a ronnen a C o e Eu A rule identifies the method in which interest or charge is to be calculated An interest rule consists of System Data Elements and User Data Elements When you apply a product on an account while defining special conditions for it interest for the account will be calculated according to the interest rule that you have linked to the product That is you merely define the following e how the principal should be picked up from the account ORACLE the period for which you want to apply interest the type of rate not the numeric value that should
33. Balance Transaction Amount for Account No is lesser than the Min balance Min Balance for the A c Class Sron The system displays the above override only if Verify_ Funds in CSTB_PARAM is set to Yes You are allowed to reverse a sweep in entries only when the main transaction gets reversed on the same day In Transactions on Sweep in Account utilization the system displays the below message Sweep in Account Balance is Utilized 3 77 ORACLE The sweep in transactions is only available for online operations and not for batch operations Example The table below shows the details of linked sweep in accounts and the balance available ACC_NO BR _COD Credit balances OD Limit Case 1 If you pass a debit entry for account 1001 for an amount of 10000 and account 1001 has 0 balance and OD of 1000 then the transaction will be as below Credit Balance of Account Amount Case 2 If you pass a debit entry for account 1001 for an amount of 20000 Credit Balance of Account Amount A1 1000 B1 5000 C1 3000 D1 2000 OD Limit of Account Amount 1001 1000 A1 5000 Case 3 If you pass a debit entry for account 1001 for an amount of 28000 _ ORACLE Credit Balance of Account A1 B1 C1 D1 OD Limit of Account 1001 A1 C1 mon mon 3 79 3 9 2 Capturing Sweep in Accounts Details You are allowed to capture the Sweep in Accounts and their branches that can be debite
34. Balance in each of the account is as follows a a0000121 A0000122 40000123 Available Balance USD 1000 USD 2500 EUR 3000 Debits due to transactions 9000 NA NA processed today Sum of debits for today 8000 2500 3200 in USD Total Debit across accounts USD 2500 8000 5700 After pooling Mr Marner still has a credit utilization limit of USD 7 700 10000 2300 If you have defined temporary overdraft limits for the accounts and the temporary OD limit forms a part of the netting the temporary OD limit will not be considered for netting Rules for Set off for principal in referrals When customer accounts are linked for principal set off the Available Balance summed for all accounts in the arrangement plus the Overdraft Limit for the main account and the Sub limit for the main account minus the Total transactions received on all accounts is less than zero All transactions received are referred even if a transaction is on an account which has sufficient credit balance to pay the transaction If an account is set for principal it means that it is automatically set for interest pooling too However if an account is marked only for interest set off the system does not perform the principal set off for referral Account Limits sub screen of the Customer Account Maintenance screen The Netting Allowed option is defaulted from the Credit Line associated with the customer account If you change the
35. Click the Asset Liab button The Assets Liabilities Summary screen appears All Assets and Liabilities transactions are displayed in Asset and Liabilities transaction blocks along with the local currency equivalent for each transaction The total for Assets and the total for Liabilities are also displayed at the end of each block Asset Sum of Current balance of All the account having ve balance Sum of all the Loans outstanding balance Linked to a given customer Sum of all MM placements of the customers Liability Sum of Current balance of all the account having ve balance Sum of all the Deposits Linked to a given customer Sum of all MM borrowings of the customer 9 7 ORACLE B Assets and Liability Web Page Dialog Customer Petaia Customer moma Descipion suresh Customer Assets FE Customer Listlty eaa ere ie se E ae TAa pO j Authorised Sisius Contract Stebus Branch Releet Nu i Dee ee ne Oo Auihorised Staus Contract Haus Branch Reterence hE O A CHO AAADM 9 2 8 Viewing Limits Details You can view details of limits maintained for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen Click the Limits button The Liability Summary screen appears Double clicking on a record displays the Limits Line Summary screen which provides a summary view of all the lines linked to the liability of the customer Double clicking on a record in the Limits Line Summary screen displays the uti
36. Customer Accounts Screen Invoke the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen by typing STDCUSAC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 1 ORACLE A Customer Accounts Maintenance Web Pape Dialog Branch Codes Customer Mo Account Customer Mame Currency SD User Reference Acccord Class Stal Account Number Men Funohery Momnee Statuses Description Mo Debts Account Type rg No Credits Stop Payments Country Code Doai Mode Of Operation ai Posting Allowed Account Omen Dal Salus Change Automatic Alamate Account Number 4 i Gearing Bank Code Onnar Draft Clearing Account Number Status Details BAN Account Mummies Drornangia Darnet Pet ode interest Charges Consolidated Charges BAC Deposits instructions Standing Instructions Linked Entities REG Account Status Restrictions Currency Lim s MES Statement Limits Joint Holders Foes Deposits heetruction Baling Parameters Account Signatory interim Transactions Report Notice Cards Change Log Sweep instructors aT Date Time E Authorized Date Time Details maintained in this screen are classified into two broad heads Here you maintain the main attributes of each customer account like the account number customer code the account class account currency type of account single or joint account status other statuses applicable Cheque Book preferences etc
37. Dialog Customer Tax Group TGROUP Description TGROUP Customer Number ALL Customer Name Tax Category SER VICE TA Description Service Tax To Date Limit Currency USD Limit Amount Remarks okffgf Input By BISHNU Date Time 7 3 2000 19 12 52 Modification Number 2 I Open Authorized By Date Time BB Authorized Specify the following Customer Group You need to specify the tax group of the customer for whom you wish to define tax free allowance limit Select from the option list provided Customer Number You need to specify the customer number for which you wish to define tax free allowance limit Only customers belonging to the selected tax group will be available for selection You may also select the All option This is indicative of all customers for the selected Tax Group Tax Category You need to specify the tax category for which you wish to define tax free allowance limit Select from the option list provided From and To Date You need to specify the date from which the tax free allowance limit is effective as well as the date up to which this limit is applicable The To Date should be greater than or equal to the From Date The To Date field can also be left blank which would indicate that the maintenance is open ended Limit Currency You need to specify the currency in which the free allowance limit is being defined 2 31 ORACLE Limit Amount You need to specify the maximum waiver for
38. FX liquidation e FX liquidation date is on or after the option date of the linked FX transactions If the FX is liquidated before the option date of the linked FX Contract swap charges will be collected for the same e FX liquidation date is on or before FX maturity date e Order of liquidation of FX transactions will be based on the sequence number The following accounting entries are posted during the event BOOK in the FX Dr Cr Indicator Accounting Role Amount Tag CONTINGENT BOT BOTAMT CONTINGENT SOLD SOLDAMT The following accounting entries are posted during the event LIQD in the FX Dr Cr Indicator Accounting Role Amount Tag CONTINGENT SOLD SOLDAMT CONTINGENT BOT BOTAMT The above accounting entries are posted during the event CANC event also in the FX ae ORACLE 9 4 5 Specifying Child TD Details The Child TD parameters are similar to the Parent TD except the child will not have the option to create a new TD as part of Pay out You can capture the details of child TD that is created by payout by clicking on the Interest button a ler De prei interesi Web Page Malog Ari oer hri Interest Dego Aen riere Stari Cele interest Booking Acoourd Change Shari Daie Cra ge Gers Aone nierest Basing Gan lri r Areg hege Dera a Pigh Deia ir L Ermec Coe Opsi LDE Vaikas L Le D LEE yma Ean Cie Papal iri You need to capture the following details here Account Details System displ
39. Ledger or Bank Cheque the linked currency captured at the TD account level is used An error is thrown on save if a different currency is selected e As part of TD redemption system triggers exercising of the linked option contract which in turn creates the FX Contract for the settlement e As part of FX contract liquidation the accounts mapped for the amount tags SETBOTAMT and SETSOLDAMT are changed with the Linked CCY s GL maintained at the TD account e If the rate fixing batch is not run for the TD account the same is triggered automatically alae ORACLE 5 4 7 Maintaining Time Deposit Accounts Any deposit with a fixed term or tenor is referred to as a time deposit In Oracle FLEXCUBE these kinds of deposits are also referred to as term deposits With the time deposits TD module of Oracle FLEXCUBE accounting collateral tracking rollover handling and accounting and tracking of unclaimed deposits are completely automated This means your staff with the treasury department can remain focused on customer service To handle a time deposit in Oracle FLEXCUBE you need to 1 Setup a suitable account class 2 Setup a suitable IC product 3 Maintain a time deposit account 4 Define Interest Conditions and other parameters for the deposit account For details about setting up account classes refer the head Account Classes for Time Deposits presented later in this chapter For details about set
40. ORACLE Account No A0002 TAX_RATE TD DATE TOT INT FOR YEAR INT FOR PERIOD YEAR_END YEAR END TAX 31 Oct 08 7500 2500 10 100 31 Jan 09 15000 2500 10 100 31 Mar 09 20000 1666 67 1 10 100 30 Apr 09 2500 833 33 166 67 0 100 System performs the following tasks during online liquidation e Interest will be liquidated normally based on the deposit product linked to the account class account e Check if the account class of the deposit account is linked with a tax product If tax product is linked then another liquidation event will be triggered to compute and deduct tax online 5 4 24 Processing Tax computation during pre closure involving surcharge limit Example Account details Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity Projected date rate frequency date Interest amount till 31 Mar 09 240 days A0001 600000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 31 Jul 09 40000 A0002 300000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 31 Jul 09 20000 Liquidation schedule Liquidation Total TDS to Surcharge Additional amount interest be to be TDS to be earned deducted deducted deducted 10 10 3 22500 31 Oct 08 5 97 ORACLE C Year og A0001 accrual details A0002 5000 22500 7500 will be considered for tax A0001 15000 5000 B 500 30 Apr 09 aoo aooi faso 2500 15 May A001 31 Jul 09 o o The following tax related entries is passed during liquidation and year end On 31 Oct 2008 TDS amount Surcharge
41. ORACLE Close on Maturity Check this box to close the term deposit account on maturity date and transfer the amount to the principal liquidation account If you select this option the principal liquidation account should be an account other than the term deposit account Move Interest to Unclaimed Check this box to move the interest amount to the unclaimed GL mapped at the IC product in the accounting roles on maturity date of the term deposit account If you select this option the principal liquidation account should be the term deposit account Move Principal to Unclaimed Check this box to move the principal amount to the unclaimed GL mapped at the IC product in the accounting roles and liquidate the interest amount to the interest booking account on maturity date of the term deposit account is moved and is liquidated If you select this option the principal liquidation account should be the term deposit account Rollover Type Select the rollover type as hereunder e lf rollover type is principal then principal is rolled over and interest is pay out as per the pay out maintenance e If rollover type is Principal Interest then both principal and interest rollover takes place If you select this option the principal liquidation account has to be the term deposit account e lf rollover type is special then special mount is rolled over and the remaining amount is pay out as per the pay out maintenance e If rollover type is
42. Principal Liquidation Branch Interest Start Date Maturity Date Term Deposit Pay In Option Offset Branch Recurring Deposit Payment Branch Payment Account Installment Amount Payment Date Payment Currency Auto Rollover T Close on Maturity Move Interest to Unclaimed T Move Principal to Unclaimed Yv T Auto Payment TakeDown T Move Maturities to Unclaimed fei Recurring Deposit Account Principal Liquidation Account Next Maturity Date Deposit Tenor Rollover Details Rollover Amount Offset Account Term Deposit Amount Installment Frequency Days Months Years In this screen you can specify the following details Principal Principal interest Special Amount Move funds on Overdraft e The minimum maximum and default tenor of the deposit This can be specified in terms of days months or years e The minimum and maximum amount for the deposit The system displays a configurable override if the deposit amount contravenes the specified amount range e Whether Auto Rollover is permissible for the recurring deposit e Whether the deposit should terminate at the end of the tenor e Whether the maturity proceeds should move to an Unclaimed account if it remains unclaimed at the end of the tenor e Whether partial liquidation is allowed This is required if the term deposit is linked partially resulting in an amount block being set up for the term deposit e Whether partial liquida
43. Product Details a Product Code Description Dr Cr Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Special Condition Applicable Not Applicable Transaction Details O Trn Code Description Dr Cr 3 1 12 1 Specifying Product Restriction Special Condition By default the restrictions maintained at the account class level will be displayed here When you define transaction code or product restriction attributes for an account itself rather than for the account class to which it belongs it is referred to as a Special Condition You can apply special conditions by selecting the option Special Condition Applicable at the account level If you opt to define special conditions for an account the restrictions defined for the Account Class to which the account belongs will NOT apply to this account If you wish to continue with the account class restrictions opt for Special Condition Not Applicable 3 25 ORACLE Restriction Type Specify the restriction type here The options available are e Allowed If you select this the products entered in the multi entry block will be allowed for that customer account e Disallowed If you select this option the products entered in the multi entry block will be disallowed Product Code You can select the products and specify the type of transaction Dr Cr or both that you would like to allow disallow for each product In contracts involving the selected products the accou
44. Required Option You will need to enable the Referral Required option in the following maintenance screens Customer Account Class Maintenance Enabling this option would indicate whether a referral check should be performed on accounts belonging to the account class Consequently the system checks the available balance not the current balance while performing the referral checks for all transactions involving the account Customer Accounts Maintenance The Referral Required option is defaulted from the account class linked to the account However you can change it for a specific account If an account is marked for referral the details of transactions resulting in the account moving into Overdraft will be referred to the Referral Queue Product Preferences screens of the Funds Transfer Standing Instructions Payment and Collections modules and the Product Definition screen of the Clearing module While maintaining the details of an FT SI PC or CG product you can indicate whether transactions involving the product need to be considered for referral checks Enabling this option indicates whether the product needs to be considered for referral If a product is marked for referral the details of transactions resulting in the account involved in the transaction moving into Overdraft will be sent to the Referral Queue 7 1 1 2 Specifying Referral Cut off Time In branch parameter you have to specify the referral cut off time for accepting
45. Reset Records per page 15 r TT rey ee Pr Goto Page Job Module Process Process Sequence Number Status Status N Stopped T Running H Halted Select the option Generate Balance Report from the Process option list All associated accounts of the particular branch that have been marked for generation of balance statements are procured by Oracle FLEXCUBE The debit and credit accounts considered since the previous issue of an MT941 MT942 are picked up for the current processing The previous messages are based on the parameters maintained for each account This processing produces details of the statement generation 3 1 27 4 Generation of Ad hoc Reports Balance reports for each account under an account class can be generated on an ad hoc basis The Ad Hoc report generation screen is used for capturing details of a balance report sent ad hoc You can invoke this screen by selecting Messages in the application browser Hereafter select Detailed under Account Balance and Interim Report Alternatively you can invoke this screen by typing ACDADCRP in the upper right corner of the application toolbar and clicking the arrow adjacent it 3 60 ORACLE Z Adhoc Report Generation Web Page Dialog Balance Branch Code CHO Swift Message Type 341 Account a Generate Statement Branch Code The branch to which the account marked for balance report generation belongs is di
46. Specify the count of interim statement generated for the account since start of the financial year The financial year will be as defined in the Accounting Period maintenance This counter would be set at the end of year Generate Balance Report To indicate that the customer account is considered for generation of its balance message check this box Of Select the mode of message for balance generation from the option list Report Transaction Since This section lists all the transactions the customer account has undergone in the interval of balance messages generated for the account You can choose the appropriate values applicable Previous MT940 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 940 in the current balance report Previous M1941 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 941 in the current balance report Previous MT950 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 950 in the current balance report You can synchronize the time instance by hours for generation of the balance message by clicking the Times button 3 58 ORACLE E Message Generation Time Web Page Dialog Message Generation Time a Message Generation Time This screen is employed to indicate the the time instance in hours for the generation of the balance report Message generation time Specify the timing fo
47. TDS Department TAX Department Y N 5 114 ORACLE Gross TDS amount Total TDS amount where PAN was found valid by Income Tax Department l son daughter of working in the capacity of designation do hereby certify that a sum of Rs Rupees in words has been deducted at source and paid to the credit of the Central Government I further certify that the information given above is true and correct based on the books of account documents and other available records Place Date Signature of person responsible for deduction of tax Designation Full Name TDS certificate number is an internal reference number to be given by the Deductor optional 5 115 ORACLE Details of the Payment TAX Deductions Account No Amount Paid Date of Payment TDS Amount Cheque DD No BSR Code Tax Deposit Date Transfer Voucher Challan No 5 4 27 Tax Recovery Account Maintenance You can choose a recovery account to deduct tax on a term deposit account of a customer using the Tax Recovery Account Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type ICDTXRCV in the field at the top right corner of the application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button You can automatically deduct tax for all the TD accounts for the interest payments for which tax has not been deducted Tax recovery account maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch Code Customer Mo Tax Recovery Account Waker Date Time Mod Ma B Authorized Checker Da
48. The Posting Date e The Contract Ref No DD Reference Number e A brief description about the Referral e The amount which is to be debited from the customer account e Pay e Un pay The default option is to approve Pay the check DD amount On occasion you may want to unpay or reject a check DD You will be allowed to levy charges both for approving as well as recalling rejecting checks There are no limits on the charges for recalling a check but you can levy approval charges for a maximum of three transactions only The charges for each accept reject are computed on the basis of the IC Charge Rule linked to the customer account You will not be allowed to recall or unpay future dated transactions typically future dated fund transfers or standing orders The transaction will be initiated and entries posted passed only if the referral decision is to pay 7 2 ORACLE Each time you choose to reject a transaction you will have to indicate the reason for rejecting the transaction A list of Reason Codes is available in the option list You can select the appropriate A transaction is considered for charging only if the Waive Charge option has not been enabled for a particular Reject Code You can enable the option if the charge is to be waived 7 1 1 Maintenance Required for Referral Processing For the successful processing of referrals in Oracle FLEXCUBE you will need to maintain the following details 7 1 1 1 Enabling Referral
49. The name and employment status of the customer s spouse e The educational status of a customer Under Graduate Graduate Post Graduate and Non student If the customer has received no formal education select Non student e The family members children and others who are dependent on the customer financially You can indicate any number between 0 and 99 e The type of accommodation this customer is availing of The types could be classified into own accommodation company provided and others Others include all types other than self owned and company provided You can select the appropriate option 2 18 ORACLE 2 2 8 Maintaining Professional Details of Individual Customers After having captured the Domestic details of the individual customer you can capture the professional details about the customer These details include the customer s employment status employer details or the annual expenses that the customer incurs and so on Click on Professional button The Customer Professional Details screen will be displayed S Customer Professional Details Web Page Dialog Employement Official Address Employerment Full time permanent k Line 4 Employement Details Tenure Retirement Age Previous Designation Previous Employer Current Designation Current Employer Income Salary Other Currency of amounts Line 2 Line 3 Country Contact Telephone Telex Fax E mail Expense Rent Insurance Loan Payments O
50. To recall you can define a Special Condition for an account only if the account class of the account has a General Condition defined for the product Thus the picklist from where you select the product for which you want to define a Special Condition will contain products that satisfy one of the following conditions e a General Condition has been defined for the product and account class combination e the product has been defined as a special conditions only product The interest rule that is linked to the product s will determine the interest that is applied on the account 3 40 ORACLE You may want to apply more than one interest product on an account For example you may want to pay credit interest on the credit balance maintained in a current account and levy a debit interest if the account lapses into a debit balance In order to achieve this you would have to apply two products one defined for credit interest and another defined for debit interest In this screen you can choose the interest products that you want to apply on an account The UDE currency defined for the product in the Interest Product Preferences screen that you apply on the account is displayed Note that the UDE values that you specify for the account subsequently will be taken to be in this currency You can opt to generate an advice for the benefit of the customer when the values of the UDEs defined for the interest rule change Generate Rate Change
51. Transaction Code Specify the transaction code DPN New deposit account for the book event to trigger at the time of creation of auto deposit account Currency Specify the currency in which the deposit account has to created Minimum Required Balance Specify the balance that is required to be maintained at the linked savings account If any balance exists beyond this balance in the account then the system creates an auto deposit account as part of batch process 6 19 ORACLE Cluster ID Specify a valid cluster ID you need to link to deposit account class You can link cluster ID only for term deposits Example You specified the multiple factor as 50 and the minimum required balance is 5000 The savings account balance is 5675 The system creates the deposit account as part of intraday batch DEDEPBAT in multiples of 50 which comes to 650 and it retains the balance amount of 25 in the savings account Def Rate Code Select the code of the differential rate whether Mid or Standard Def Rate Type Select the type of differential rate code whether Mid or Buy or Sell Sweep Mode Select the mode of sweep from the following options e Automatic For the deposit to be created as part of the batch e Manual For the deposit to be created manually Break Method Select the method in which the break of auto deposit should happen from the following options e MAXB The system
52. Web Page Dialog Bankers Cheque PC Cheque Details Bank Code Currency Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Name Beneficiary Address Passportic Number Narrative The following details are captured here 5 4 6 1 Specifying Bankers Cheque Details Specify the following Bank Code Specify the bank code of the Bankers cheque Cheque Date Specify the date of the cheque for the pay out Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the pay out Passport IC Number Specify the passport or IC number of the beneficiary for the pay out 5 30 ORACLE Beneficiary Address Specify the address of the beneficiary for the pay out Narrative Specify the description for the pay out 5 4 6 2 Specifying PC Details To capture the pay out details thought transfer to other bank account click on the PC tab Payout Paramaters Web Page Dialog Bankers Cheque PC Counterparty Counterparty Bank Code Counterparty Account Currency Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Name Beneficiary Address Passportic Number Narrative The following details are captured here Counterparty Bank Code Specify the bank code of the counter party for the pay out Counterparty Account Specify the account number of the counter party for the pay out Currency Specify the currency of the counter party for the pay out Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the pay out 5 31 ORACLE Passport IC Nu
53. Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Number 100002 Customer 1111118 Account Class SNSA Y List of Joint Holders C Joint Holder Code Description Joint Holder Branch The system displays the branch code of the current branch Account Number The system displays the account number here Joint Holder Code This field specifies the code numbers assigned to each of the joint holders of this account Description This is the description of the joint holder Here you can enter the name of the joint holder and also his relationship with this customer Joint Holder Specify the type of authority Select the appropriate one from the drop down menu The options are e Account Signatory e Customer Contact Person e Guardian e Custodian e Developer e Guarantor 3 37 ORACLE 3 1 17 Specifying Interest Details You can capture details of interest for the account using the IC Special Conditions Maintenance screen Click the Interest button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen to invoke this screen 1C Special Conditions Maintenance Account Details Branch Code 005 Account Calculation Account T 000000383 Interest Start Date 20 08 05 27 interest Booking Account 70 00 00 o0 363 Charge Start Date 20 08 06 27 Charge Booking Account roog 0000383 Interest Booking Branch 005 l Interest Statement Consolidated Charge Account Charge Booking Branch 005 Currency 2 Rate Chart Allowe
54. Y Commercial Loan Joe Green Current Y Builders Account 2 47 ORACLE 2 3 3 Maintaining Customer Groups You can maintain customer groups for any of the following reasons e Tracking Exposure for loans as well as outstanding overdrafts in accounts of customers involving the group in which case it would comprise of either Corporate or Retail customers e Defining Group specific rules in which case it would either be a Clearing or a Charge Group Clearing Groups are built in order to derive the Value Date of outward clearing check transactions Charge Groups are created in order to levy specific charges on customers belonging to the group You can set up such groups through the Group Code Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDGRMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Group Code Maintenance Web Page Dialog Group Code Description Exposure Category Group Status Since Fields Input By Date Time Modification Mumber Authorized By Date Time Specify the following Group Type You could use this section to indicate whether the customer group you are defining is e Corporate e Retail e Charge e Clearing e Tax e User Access You can select the appropriate option 2 48 Group Type Corporate Retail Charge Clearing Tax User Access B Authorized _ Open ORACLE Creating Custom
55. account class Specifying Nominees A Nominee can be either a local resident or a non resident First Nominee You can nominate two persons who would have the right to the balances in your account after the account holder s demise Subsequent to the account holder the first nominee is called to claim the balances in the account If the first nominee is no more or is missing then the second nominee is called upon to claim the balances in the account Second Nominee You can nominate two persons who would have the right to the balances in your account after the account holder s demise 3 9 ORACLE Subsequent to the account holder the first nominee is called to claim the balances in the account If the first nominee is no more or is missing then the second nominee is called upon to claim the balances in the account Note the following e NRE NRO FCNR account is created by the respective account class e Resident status of the Customer individual corporate customer type is Non Resident for NRE NRO FCNR deposit account e The joint holder if any for the account should also be a Non Resident by status 3 1 2 6 Specifying Initial Funding Account Opening Amount Specify the amount being deposited to open a customer account While saving the record the system checks whether this amount is equal to or greater than the minimum limit maintained for the linked account class If the amount is less than the applicable limit the syste
56. amount Additional TDS amount 5 98 ORACLE On 31 Jan 09 TDS_amount TAX_PAY 2250 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount On 31 Mar 09 Year End TAX_PAY 1500 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount TDS amount on j On 31 Apr 09 First liquidation in next financial year Adjustment entry TDS_amount 9 99 ORACLE TAX_PAY 1500 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount Liquidation entry TDS_amount CUSTOMER or Additional TDS amount On 15 May 2009 pre closure of A0001 TDS _ amount CUSTOMER ao Additional TDS amount CUSTOMER ca On 31 Jul 2009 TDS_amount 5 100 ORACLE Additional TDS amount CUSTOMER TAX_PAY The following SDE values will be populated for the above example Account no AC0001 TAX TDS_ SURC SURC ADL_T _RA LIMIT HG_LI HG_R AX_RA TE MIT ATE TE2 31 Oct 60000 15000 10000 50000 10 3 08 31 Jan 60000 15000 10 10000 50000 10 3 09 10000 50000 10 3 10000 50000 10 3 10000 50000 10 3 INT _F TAX TDS _ OR_PE _RA LIMIT RIOD TE 31 Oct 08 60000 7500 10 10000 50000 31 Jan 09 60000 7500 10 10000 50000 Be on 31 Mar 09 000 5000 1 10 10000 50000 0 30 Apr 09 30000 2500 16 1 10000 50000 31 Jul 09 30000 7500 10 10 10000 50000 5 101 ORACLE 5 4 25 Projection basis method In projection basis method the total intere
57. and click the adjoining arrow button ie ORACLE T IC Rule TDS Formula Mapping Webpage Dialog lc Rule Ka Rule Type Formula number Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Wade xi Checker Date Time E Open Specify the following details as apart of the IC Rule for TDS Formula Mapping IC Rule This indicates the interest and charges rule Rule Type This rule type indicated to which the formula number it is mapped The rule types available are TDS and CESS Formula Number This indicates the formula numbers maintained in the IC rule The IC rules with Formula book flag maintained as TAX are allowed In TDS certificate the TDS amount and Cess amount are computed and displayed based on this maintenance Operations like New Save and Auth Unlock Delete Close Reopen and Query can be carried out The formula number sequence of IC Rule maintained for tax formulas cannot be changed after maintaining the IC rule TDS formula mapping This is operationally controlled 5 79 ORACLE 5 4 22 SB TDS Report Generation You can view report for single customer in a branch through the screen below To invoke this screen type ICDSBTRP in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Z SB TDS Report Webpage Dialog Branch Financial wear Customer Reports Specify the following details w
58. application browser You can also invoke this screen by typing ICDPMREV in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Recurring Deposit Payments Reversal Web Page Dialog Branch Code RO Account Number Transaction Date Auth statue Contract Status Here you can capture the following details Branch Code Specify the code assigned to the branch in which the payment is to be made You can also choose the branch code from the adjoining option list RD Account Number Specify the recurring account number for which the installments are to be collected The system displays the recurring deposit accounts that are in open and authorized status in the adjoining option list You can choose the appropriate one from this list Transaction Date The system displays the transaction date for which reversal is supposed to be initiated Authorization Status The system displays the authorization status Contract Status The system displays the contract status Reversal of a payment transaction can be done from this screen When a transaction is reversed the system updates the contract status as V Reversed 5 141 ORACLE 6 1 6 Maintaining Mandatory Information Introduction As part of capturing customer related information in Oracle FLEXCUBE you need to maintain Customer Information Files CIF records for each entity who is a customer of your b
59. calculate the interest for the penalty period e Penalty component is linked with tiered interest rate to calculate the interest on tier basis for the penalty period Example Assume the following are the details of a discounted loan Value date 05 JAN 2001 Maturity Date 05 APR 2001 Loan Amount USD 1 000 000 00 A penalty interest component PENALPRIN linked with tiered interest rate as given below is defined The penal basis component for the above penalty component is principal and the basis element is PRINCIPAL_SCHODUE Accrual is not set for the penalty component Case 1 Liquidation of the loan is done after the maturity date say on 5 MAY 2001 Penalty overdue interest calculation will be as given below 05 APR 01 1 000 000 5 05 APR 01 10 APR 01 10 APR 01 1 000 000 100 10 APR 01 20 APR 01 ORACLE 20 APR 01 1 000 000 20 APR 01 25 APR 01 25 APR 01 1 000 000 25 APR 01 05 MAY 01 The penal interest amount calculated as given in the above table are debited from the customer as per the below accounting entries Case 2 Partial Liquidation for the amount USD 500 000 00 is done after the maturity date Let us assume the maturity date as 20 APR 2001 Penalty overdue interest calculation will be as given below 05 APR 01 1 000 000 5 05 APR 01 10 APR 01 Eoo 10 APR 01 1 000 000 10 APR 01 20 APR 01 On 05 MAY 2001 the remaining amount is liquidated The basis amount i
60. currency should be selected as local currency Accounting entries set up DR CR Accounting Role Amount Tag Indicator 5 112 ORACLE Event DR CR Accounting Role Amount Tag Indicator ILIQ RULE TPBL 7 TAX ILIQ ORO RULE TPIA 8 TAX ILIQ RULE TPBL 8 TAX ILIQ DRO RULE TPIA 9 TAX ILIQ RULE TPBL 9 TAX When defining the rule a new accounting role will be created for the purpose of tracking tax paid In advance during year end accrual This accounting role will be used during year end to pay the tax from internal GL instead of collecting from the customer During the first liquidation cycle of the financial year the tax paid in advance will also be collected from the customer 5 4 26 Generating TDS certificate TDS is generated after tax remittance is done for a financial year by the bank ICTDSCRT batch generates TDS certificate This batch run manually after year end remittance is done to income tax dept Following is the format for Form 16A FORM NO 16A See rule 31 1 b Certificate under section 203 of the Income _ tax Act 1961 for Tax deducted at source Financial year TDS Certificate oe ORACLE Number Whether Original Duplicate Amended TAN of Deductor PAN of Deductee TDS Unique Transaction Whether PAN Number UTN as uploaded was provided by Income Taxvalidated by Income If Amended give Previous TDS Certificate number Name of Deductor Name of Deductee Gross Amount Paid
61. default option the system displays an override message A ORACLE Liability Maintenance sub screen of the Customer Information screen The netting option is defaulted to the Liability Maintenance sub screen of the Customer Maintenance screen This option is defaulted from the Liability Code which is linked to the Credit Line that you associate with the CIF ID If you change the default the system displays an override message 7 1 1 5 Future dated Funds Transfers FT Entries are not passed for future dated FTs and Sls in case of insufficient funds Such transactions are moved to the Referral Queue for Approval pay Rejection un pay The pool balance defined in the LM Structure Maintenance is the balance which is considered for OD Status If accounting entries have not been passed Resulting Action Accept the accounting entries are passed and the IC Charge counter is updated Reject No resulting action If you have not performed any action on the contract the transaction is resubmitted for processing the next day 7 1 1 6 Standing Instructions Sl Standing instructions are sent to Queue when sufficient funds are not available in the customer s account Status If accounting entries have not been passed Resulting Action Accept the accounting entries are passed and the IC Charge counter is updated Reject No resulting action 7 1 1 7 Payments and Collections PC If you have enabled the Override Over
62. e Bankers Cheque BC e Transfer to Other Bank PC e Transfer to GL GL e Transfer to Savings Account AC e Cash e Creation of new Term Deposit TD e Demand Draft DD e Loan Percentage Specify the amount of redemption in percentage Redemption Amount Specify the amount of redemption Offset Branch Specify the branch code of the account for redemption The adjoining option list displays all the valid branch codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Offset Account Specify the account number for redemption The adjoining option list displays all the account numbers maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Narrative Specify a description of redemption 5 48 ORACLE In case redemption is to be done through existing Savings account you need to capture the following details for the savings account Savings Account Number choose the account number from the option list Savings Account Currency the currency of the account is displayed Exchange Rate the exchange rate for the account currency is displayed Savings Amount the savings amount is displayed and cannot be changed Narrative Enter a brief description for the transaction In case redemption is to be done through Cheque you need to capture the following cheque details Bank Code Indicate the bank code for the cheque Cheque Date Specify the date on the cheque Cheque Currency Indica
63. field top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button A TDS for deposit Web Page Dialog TAX CIF ID Branch Code Financial Year Guery d Customer Mo Account Mo TES AMOUNT TRS Amount in LEY a Payment Date Payment Mode Interest Amt TOS AMT TDS Amtin LOY TDS amt exclSurchg Surcharge Addini Tax amt TOS amt LEYtexcl Surchg Surcharge LEY Adetnl Tax amt LEY 5 58 ORACLE TDS details can be queried based on TAX CF ID financial year and branch code You can view the following details e Customer No e Account No e TDS Amount e TDS Amount in LCY On click of TDS details the following details are populated in the payment details section e Payment Date e Payment Mode e Interest Amount e TDS Amount e TDS Amount in LCY e TDS amount excluding Surcharge e Surcharge amount e Additional Tax amount e TDS amount LCY excluding Surcharge e Surcharge amount LCY e Additional Tax amount LCY 5 4 17 TDS Inquiry You can enquire the projected TDS of a customer in the Projected TDS Inquiry screen To invoke this screen type ICDTDSQY in the field top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button 5 59 ORACLE T Projected TDS Inquiry Webpage Dialog Branch TAX CIF ID Financial Year CI customer No TD Account Interest Amt TDS Amt Excl Surchg Surcharge Adetnl Tax Amt Total TDS Amt Total TDS Amt LOY P
64. following details Product The system defaults a product when you click the Default button at the time of account creation You must modify it to identify the Charge product using which the applicable charges would be collected Currency The charges would be collected in the currency defined for the selected charge product and this currency is displayed on the screen 3 44 ORACLE Minimum and Maximum You must indicate the charge amount range representing the minimum and maximum charge that can be applied for the account Free Items You must indicate the number of free items for which the customer will not be charged Open By default each charge consolidation charge setup that you set up is enabled and active You can also disable the setup by checking the Open box Waive Charges You can choose to waive charges for an account 3 1 19 Specifying Consolidated Charge Details You can capture details of consolidated charges for the account using the Account Level Consolidated Charges Conditions screen To invoke this screen click the Consolidated Charge button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen E Account Level Consolidated Charges Conditions Web Page Dialog Account Details Branch CHG Account 100002 Product Details Product Code D Waive Charges Currency Open Minimum Maximam Discount Discount Percentage Discount Amount Branch The Branch Code t
65. for Dual Currency Deposit Click Dual CCy Deposit tab to capture IC special conditions for Dual Currency Deposits F IC Special Conditions Maintenance Web Page Dialog Account Details Branch Code CHO Account Mumber Interest Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Linked Currency Currency Option Product Option Contract Ref Mo Exchange Rate Linked Currency Settlement A c Linked Currency GL Fixing Days Yield Enhancement Inception Fair yale TD Payout Details Change Log You will be allowed to capture the following details in this screen only if the account belongs to an account class of type Dual Currency Deposit Linked Currency Specify the currency for a dual currency deposits This option is defaulted from the linked currency maintained at the Account Class Level and can be modified The following fields are mandatory if Linked Currency is specified CCY Option product Exchange Rate Linked CCY s Settlement Account Linked CCY s GL Account Fixing days Yield Enhancement Inception Fair value 5 34 ORACLE CCY Option product Specify the Option Product under which the Options Contract has to be created in case of Dual Currency Deposit This option is defaulted from the Account Class level Option Contract Ref No This is a system generated reference number of the Option Contract that is being created while saving the TD account This reference numb
66. funds Assume that you have maintained the following product sequence for funds allocation Sequence No The liquidation schedule dates for the various loan contracts are as follows Contract Liqd Amt in USD LDBDOO1 1000 LDBDOO2 500 ABCDO01 500 Further all contracts are marked for auto liquidation and the settlement account for all contracts is A1 The balance in account A1 as on 1 January 2002 is 500 USD Batch liquidation Liquidation does not occur as the system detects run as part of insufficient funds in A1 only 400 USD The BOD EOD on 1 account is marked for receivable tracking and a Jan block is placed on 400 USD A credit of 500 The total amount blocked gets updated to 1000 USD to A1 on 2 USD Since we have two contracts involving the Jan same product LDBD maturing on the same date funds will be allocated to the first contract LDBDOO1 based on the Contract Reference Number Subsequent credits to the account will be used towards loan LDBDO02 Since contracts with LDBD have earlier schedule dates funds will be allocated to them though as per the product sequence contracts with ADBN should receive the funds first The liquidation schedule date takes precedence in this case Further credits to account A1 will be allocated against the contract ADBNO01 followed by the contract ABCDO01 This will be based on the product sequence number since both contracts have the same schedule dates
67. linking each customer account to an account class a customer category is linked to the class For an account class you should specify the category that should be linked to it and also specify if all customers under each of the categories are to be linked to the account class In the Account Class Customer List screen you have the option of specifying the categories that should be linked to this account class and within a category you can also restrict individual customers to be linked to the class To indicate allowed customer categories click the Customer Categories button The Account Class Customer List screen will be invoked 3 Account Class Customer List Web Page Dialog Account Class TIMDP6 Description Term Deposits A c Selection Indicator Allowed Disallowed Customer Categories T available Categories Customers T customer No Allowed In this screen you define the following e A list of allowed or disallowed customer categories e A list of disallowed customers if any under the allowed category For an account class you need to specify the customer categories that should be linked to it and also customers within a category who should not be allowed to be linked to this account class 6 36 ORACLE Example Requirement You are capturing the features of a Nostro account class called NostroLCY you would like to e Associate the customer category called Banks with NostroL
68. loans and accounts belonging to the group This chapter explains how you can use the system to perform the processes related to provisioning for customer accounts In order to maintain provisioning guidelines you must e Specify whether you wish to track the status of customer accounts and loan contracts at a customer group CIF level or at the level of individual contracts or accounts for your branch e Setup the categories under which you wish track exposure and specify the provisioning percentages for each exposure category type e Maintain the logic according to which the exposure category would be arrived at based on the customer type and the amount limits applicable for each customer type e Setup classifications for considering the financial standing of customers for the purpose of status processing e Setup the customer groups for which you wish to track exposure as a whole e Set up rules for deriving the status of accounts for a group or CIF e Setup rules for deriving the provisioning amount for accounts using an account class e Setup the frequency at which the provisioning batch would be executed if the status processing is done at group CIF level 8 1 1 Specifying Basis for Status Processing In the Branch Parameters you can indicate the basis upon which status processing must be done at the branch for customer accounts as well as loan contracts Status processing can be done either at the level of individual contrac
69. maintain the domestic and professional details of the individual type customer You can do this by invoking the relevant screens by clicking on the respective buttons The information that you capture in these screens forms more a part of a credit line questionnaire Whenever you are deciding on a credit limit for an individual customer you can use these details for verification You have to maintain the following parameters for every individual type of customer Prefix 1 2 and 3 Specify the title prefixed to the name of the customer whose code is input against Customer Code in the Main section The title could be Mr Mrs Ms Dr Prof etc The academic titles like Prof Dr etc of the customer along with the salutations like Consulate Senator Chancellor etc You can either select the prefixes from the option list key in a prefix of your choice First Name Specify the First of the customer Middle Name Specify the Middle name of the customer Last Name Specify the Last name of the customer Sex Indicate the gender of the customer You have the following options e Male e Female It is mandatory to specify this option for individual customers for computing tax waiver based on gender Minor Check this option to indicate that the customer is a minor Legal Guardian Specify the name of the legal guardian of the customer if the customer is a minor You can capture the name of the legal guardian not
70. no AC0002 DATE INT _F YEA TAX TDS SURC SURC ADL T OR_PE _RA LIMIT HG_LI HG_R AX_RA RIOD TE MIT ATE TE2 31 Oct 08 60000 7500 10 10000 50000 31 Jan 09 60000 7500 10 10000 50000 30 Apr 09 30000 2500 10000 50000 31 Jul 09 30000 7500 10000 50000 5 4 23 5 TDS computation during pre closure in cash basis 31 Mar 09 60000 5000 1 10 10000 50000 10 TDS is computed and deducted online during pre closure Example A customer has opened the following deposits in the financial year 08 On 15 May 2009 the deposit account A0001 is closed before maturity Interest earned from 1 Interest earned till maturity Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity 31 Mar 09 date 120 date rate frequency date 240 days days 31 Jul A0001 200000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 13333 33 6666 67 31 Jul CHO A0002 100000 1 Aug 08 10 Quarterly 09 6666 67 3333 33 TDS to be Liquidation Total interest deducted Date Account no amount earned 10 5 95 ORACLE A0002 2500 7500 A0002 2500 250 Accrual SVY details A0002 1666 67 A0001 5000 7500 30 Apr 2500 will be considered for tax 0 A0002 2500 processing N 0 9 IL ier Preclosure 833 33 833 33 NIL a ee a 31 Jul The following SDE values are populated for the above example when ICTDS batch processes tax product associated with the above deposits Account No A0001 mow o w arma p o awo am a C 5 96
71. of the Payout and Transfer to Saving Account with remaining payout is not allowed Either Transfer to GL or Transfer to Savings account has to be selected with 100 payout Within the respective payout options i e Transfer to GL or Transfer to Savings account multi accounts or GLs is not allowed Only a Single Account in case of Transfer to Saving Account and Single GL in case of Transfer to GL is allowed For more details on Dual Currency Deposit refer section Specifying Dual Currency Deposits in chapter Maintaining Mandatory Information in this User Manual In case of Dual Currency Deposits the Interest Liquidation should happen only on the Maturity of the TD Since the settlement can happen in either the Deposit Currency Account or the Linked Currency Account which is decided during the maturity the liquidation of Interest has to happen only on maturity Hence IC product linked to the TD account will not have Liquidation Frequency Parameters On Authorising the Dual Currency Deposit Account system automatically creates a Currency Option Contract 5 36 ORACLE For more details on capturing the details of a Currency Options Contract refer section Specifying Details Specific to Currency Option in the chapter titled Processing OTC Option Instruments in OTC User Manual 5 4 6 5 Rate Fixing Batch for Dual Currency Deposits As part of IC BOD batch the rate is fixed X days prior to the matur
72. or otherwise change in any manner the content hereof without obligation of Oracle Financial Services Software Limited to notify any person of such revision or changes All company and product names are trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated
73. right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button The screen is shown below ae ORACLE A Customer Category Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer Category CAT1 Description cat I Maintain Customer Log Input By SUDHAS Date Time 7 3 2000 11 43 36 Modification Number 1 Iv Open Authorized By SUDHAS Date Time 7 3 2000 11 43 37 E Authorized In this screen you maintain the following e Name of the customer category e Description of the category e Customer log 2 2 21 Creating Customer Categories To create customer categories the following parameters need to be maintained Customer Category In this category you can classify customers of your bank When you are creating a product be it in a loan a deposit a placement a swap foreign exchange deal or a funds transfer you may want to restrict access to the product to a set of customers For this the customers are classified into broad categories the code of which is input against this field A category consists of a group of like customers For instance if you create a category called Financial Institutions all financial institutions who are customers of your bank will come under this category Likewise all customers of your bank belong to some category 2 37 ORACLE It should be noted that at the product level specifications made for a customer overrides the specifications made for the category For example if all financial in
74. so that total penalty days is 90 Penalty Interest Amount 1 53 EUR 1 94 EUR 1 04 EUR 0 08 EUR Calculation of Penalty interest with notices full utilization In this illustration the withdrawal amount is fully exhausted through free amounts and notices Credit interest rate Penalty Interest rate Notice period Free amount per month Available notices 2 00 0 50 90 days 2000 EUR 3 68 ORACLE Notice Initiation date Notice Activation Date 26 04 2005 25 07 2005 3000 07 05 2005 05 08 2005 3000 22 05 2005 20 08 2005 3500 Let us assume that the free amount for July is not utilized yet l e Free amount available for July is 2000 EUR Customer withdraws EUR 8 500 00 on 17 07 2005 The following table describes the calculation of Penalty Interest in this case Type Notice Amount Basis Penalty Penalty Free Free Passed Amount for Days Interest Amount Amount Penalty Amount Available Calculation Notice 17 07 2005 Free 2000 00 8500 00 6500 00 8 0 72 Amount 17 07 05 EUR until 24 07 05 25 07 2005 Notice 3000 00 6500 00 3500 00 7 0 34 Amount 25 07 05 EUR until 31 07 05 01 08 2005 Free 2000 00 3500 00 1500 00 4 0 08 Amount 01 08 05 EUR until 04 08 05 05 08 2005 Notice 3000 00 1500 00 Amount TOTAL 1 15 EUR 3 3 Maintaining Notice Period for Withdrawal You can specify the notice for withdrawal of amount from the accounts using Notice Peri
75. statement for this account at all Cycle You can specify the frequency for generating the account statements To specify the frequency of the statements click on the adjoining drop down list The following list is displayed Annual Semi annual Quarterly Monthly Fortnightly Weekly Daily 3 31 ORACLE On For a weekly statement you specify the day of the week on which account statements should be generated and for fortnightly and monthly statements the dates of the month To specify for weekly statements click on the adjoining drop down list The following list of days will be displayed Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday To specify for monthly statements enter a number between 1 and 31 corresponding to the system date If you set the statement date to 30 then account statements will be generated on The last working day for months with lt 30 days For months with 30 days on the 30th if 30th is a holiday on the next working day If you set the statement date to 31 then account statements will be generated on The 31 for month with 31 days if 31st is a holiday on the next working day The last working day for months lt 31 days For a fortnightly statement you could specify 1 and 15 For all other cycles account statement will be generated on the last day of that cycle Generate Stat Only On Movement You can indicate that an account statement should be generated for the customer s ac
76. tame eaten 9 1 92 INVOKING CUSTOMER POSITION SCREEN lt scccscassncecqaeassessandneasqasjnenneannngnconamntetaaabiGaipeameeieanentanteanietannenongaies 9 1 9 2 1 Viewing ACCOUNTING Details cccccccccccccsseeeccccceeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseeeeeeeeeeaaaasseseeseaaanees 9 9 2 2 Viewing Loans Detalls ssccsccsizsecesacccesansaaaanscassdesastaiaesesarsesseonee TE E E ARA eae Rae 9 2 9 2 3 Viewing Deposit Details cccccccccssccccccccccccnessseccceeeeaesseseeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeaeeseseeeeeeeaaaessseeeeeesauaaaseeeseesaaagaess 9 4 9 2 4 Viewing FX Details ccccccccccccccccsssesccccceeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeesesaaaeseeeeesaaaeess 9 5 9 2 5 Viewing FT Details cccccccccccccssesecccecceeeenaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaesseeeeeeeeesaaaseeeeeeegaaaess 9 6 9 2 6 Viewing Collaterals Details ccccccccccccccssseesccccceceeeeeseseeeeeeeeaaseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaseeeeeeeeeaaaasseeeessaaaaees 9 7 9 2 7 Viewing Assets Liabilities Details cccccccscccccccccccsneeeeseceeeeecnaeeeseeceeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeesaaaeseeeeesaaanees 9 7 9 2 8 Viewing Limits Details cccccccccsseeccccccccccnseesseecceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseeeeeeeesaaaaeseeeeeeeaaaaaees 9 9 2 9 Viewing MIS Detalls ciivitaccis wistisdennstiua ier nie teats E ENEE EEA E EEA A EA 9 9 ocd VIC POC CHONG rrain A i RE E E ET A AEAN 9 10 JdL VEOWNME ACCOUM
77. that the account uses Typically the computation could be done according to the following guidelines Status of the Accounts For instance let us suppose the statuses for accounts belonging to a CIF are derived according to the A guidelines Delay Period Debtor Up to 30 Between 31 Between 61 Between Financial days and 60 days and 90 days 91 and Standing 180 days Unstable Substandard Doubtful 8 11 ORACLE Delay Period Not Good Substandard Doubtful Provision for General Credit Risk General Credit Risk includes all contracts and accounts in Regular status The provision amount computation could be done as follows according to the following categories Exposure to Corporate Customers The expression used for this category could be PA OD RFC x PP where PA Provisioning Amount OD Outstanding Overdraft Amount Principal Overdue Interest RFC Risk free Collateral PP Provisioning Percentage The provisioning percentage could be computed as shown Loan Type Categorization Provision Corporate Small CS Exposure lt BGN 50 000 1 5 Corporate Intermediate Exposure gt BGN 50 000 and lt BGN 2 0 Cl 500 000 Corporate Large CL Exposure gt BGN 500 000 and lt L Sig 3 0 Corporate Big CB Exposure gt L Sig 0 0 Here L Sig could correspond to one percent of bank s capital base rounded to nearest lower amount divisible by 50 000 Typ
78. the GLs are INT UNCLAIMED and PRN_UNCLAIMED respectively When maintaining an IC Deposit type product you have to map these Accounting Roles to the appropriate GLs maintained at your bank 6 1 29 2 Specifying Default Tenor You can define a tenor for the deposits that are opened under an account class Deposits opened under the account class will automatically acquire this tenor However you can change the tenor to suit the requirements of a specific deposit 6 1 30 Specifying Dual Currency Deposits Details Dual Currency Deposit DCD is a short term currency linked deposit through which you earn a higher interest rate than regular time deposits The Bank converts the deposit currency into the linked currency at the pre determined conversion rate on the fixing date two working days prior to deposit maturity At maturity you receive the principal and interest in either the deposit currency or the linked currency whichever is weaker The following details are captured here Linked Currency Specify the linked currency if the account class is to be used for creating TD with Dual Currency option Alternatively you can also choose the currency from the adjoining option list Sron You will be allowed to capture this value here only if the option Dual CCY Deposit is checked at the Account Class Maintenance screen You will be allowed to modify this value even after authorization CCY Option Product Specify the cu
79. the customer is exclusive to the particular customer Conversely if the liability number of a customer is different from the customer code it implies that the liability of the specific customer is tracked against a parent customer This parameter helps you to assign the same liability structure for a group of customers This feature is useful when you have several subsidiary companies divisions reporting to the same parent company Example While assigning a liability number to Opel Motors Germany a subsidiary of General Motors US you can track the liability of Opel Motors against General Motors Full Name You can specify the full name of the customer in this field Type You have to indicate the Type to which the customer whose details you are capturing belongs The options available are e Individual e Corporate e Bank 2 3 ORACLE 2 2 2 To recall if a customer record is created from an external Siebel CRM application after a successful upload into Oracle FLEXCUBE the CRM Customer flag gets checked after the upload You can however uncheck the same when you unlock such a record and make changes When you unlock such a record system throws up an override stating that the customer is a CRM customer and asks whether you want to continue modifying the record If you confirm the same Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to make changes If you choose to ignore the original record is saved Indicating Main Details Specify the
80. the recurring deposit account Payment Details RD Account Number Specify the recurring account number for which the installments are to be collected Branch Code Specify the code assigned to the branch in which the payment is to be made The transaction which are authorized and active are available in the option list Payment account number Specify the payment account number used for manual payment for the RD account The system fetches only savings account and current accounts Product code Specify the retail teller products with combination of arc maintenance You have to ensure that the retail teller product is enabled for RD payments by checking the field RD Payments allowed at the teller product level maintenance preferences screen Exchange rate Specify the exchange rate if the account currency is different from the currency in which the payment amount is expressed Payment Currency Specify the currency in which the payment account is held Payment Amount Specify the amount which is deposited as payment Paid Amount Specify the amount that is already paid by the customer After entering the RD accounts payment details Click P button to indicate the system to calculate the due days and paid amount ole ORACLE You can reverse the payments made to the RD account rather the installment amounts to the recurring deposit account Invoke the Recurring Deposit Payments Reversal screen from the
81. to another branch also You can select the Interest Charge Booking Branch from the option list available The accounts maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the option list provided for Interest Charge Booking Account You can select the account from this list Interest Charge will be liquidated into the selected account Charge Booking Branch By default the customer s account in the current branch will be displayed in this screen in the Interest Charge Booking Account and Interest Charge Booking Branch fields However you have the option of booking interest charge to a different account belonging to another branch also You can select the Interest Charge Booking Branch from the option list available The accounts maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the option list provided for Interest Charge Booking Account You can select the account from this list Interest Charge will be liquidated into the selected account Product To calculate interest for an account you must apply an interest product on the account To recall every interest product that you create is linked to an interest rule The logic to calculate interest is built into an interest rule When you apply an interest product on the account interest for the account will be calculated according to the interest rule definition For the account for which you are defining special conditions choose the product s that you wish to apply
82. wish to maintain turnover limits 6 48 ORACLE Start Date Specify the start date of the financial period using the adjoining calendar End Date Specify the end date of the financial period using the adjoining calendar You can maintain multiple period codes However the periods cannot overlap Limit Amount Details You can specify the following details pertaining limits applicable on the period code Limit Currency Specify the currency of the limit amount This adjoining option list displays all valid currency codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Limit Amount Specify the limit amount applicable of the financial period Sron Note the following e You can increase or decrease the maximum turnover limit as part of record modification The modified limits will be applicable only for subsequent transactions e Unutilized limit amount does not get carried forward to the next period 6 1 29 Account Classes for Time Deposit Accounts To handle time deposits in Oracle FLEXCUBE you have to set up an account class of type Deposit in the Account Class Maintenance screen Identify the account class you are setting up with a unique code and a brief description To handle time deposits choose the Deposit option under Account Type Typically for every deposit scheme you offer at your bank you would set up a Deposit Type Account Class 6 49 ORACLE Click the Deposits bu
83. 0 is A0002 9 6 000 considered for tax processing 5 63 ORACLE O O In the above example on 31 March 09 year end tax was computed and debited from Tax Paid in Advance GL During pre closure on 30 April 09 the revised interest computed is 18 000 However the revised interest earned in the financial year 09 10 is Rs 9 000 which is lower than TDS limit Hence no TDS is eligible during pre closure But the year end TDS is adjusted during pre closure The accounting entries are passed as below On 30 Nov 2008 amp 28 Feb 2009 TDS amount TAX_PAY 3000 Surcharge Additional TDS amount m amo e lem w On 31 Mar 2009 Year End TDS amount Surcharge Additional TDS amount On 30 Apr 2009 Pre closure 5 64 ORACLE Adjustment entry TDS_amount TAX_PAY 1000 Surcharge Additional TDS amount Liquidation entry None Example case 2 Tax computation during breakage Partial redemption interest greater than the yearend tax In the above example on 30 April 09 partial redemption is done as below Account AC0001 Partial redemption amount 2 00 000 Account AC0002 Partial redemption amount 1 00 000 Liquidation schedule Interest Liquidation Total interest rate amount earned applicable 30 Nov 08 A0001 20 000 30 000 28 Feb 09 A0001 20 000 30 000 5 65 ORACLE Partial 31 May 09 A0001 15 000 22 500 1 800 62 39 24 31 Aug 09 A0
84. 0001 20000 30000 31 Jan 09 A0001 20000 30000 A0002 10000 The projected interest for all the deposits during the financial year is 90000 Since the projected interest is greater than the taxable limit and surcharge limit both tax and surcharge is deducted The following tax related entries are passed during subsequent liquidation cycles On 31 Jul 08 TDS amount TAX PAY 3000 Surcharge amount 5 86 ORACLE Additional TDS amount On 31 Oct 08 TDS amount oR CUSTOMER 3000 TAX_PAY 3000 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount On 31 Jan 09 TDS_amount on CUSTOMER 3000 TAX_PAY 3000 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount 5 87 ORACLE The following SDE values is populated for the above Account no AC0001 _I INT_F YEA YEA TAX TDS_ SURC OR_PE RE RE _RA LIMIT HG_LI OR_Y RIOD ND ND_ TE MIT TAX 31 Jul 08 90000 20000 o jo lo jo i 10000 100000 1 31 Oct 90000 20000 10 10000 100000 1 08 31 Jan 90000 20000 10 10000 100000 1 09 Account no AC0002 DATE INT F YEA YEA TAX TDS SURC SURC ADL T OR PE RE RE RA LIMIT HG LI HGR AX RA RIOD ND ND_ TE MIT ATE TE2 TAX 31 Jul 08 90000 10000 10000 100000 epe be je 0 8 90000 10000 10000 100000 09 5 4 23 3 Processing Year end TDS Computation by Cash Basis Method A customer has opened the following deposits in the financial year 08
85. 0002 2500 processing A0001 833 33 15 May a a 31 Jul 09 A0002 2500 The following tasks are handled during online liquidation e Interest is liquidated normally based on the deposit product linked to the account class account e The projected interest amount will be re computed when there is partial redemption pre closure of deposit Check if the account class of the deposit account is linked with a tax product If tax product is linked then another liquidation event will be triggered to compute and deduct tax online The following SDE values are populated for the above example when ICTDS batch processes tax product associated with the above deposits oes ORACLE Account No A0001 DATE TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR INT_FOR_PERIOD YEAR_END YEAR_END_TAX TAX_RATE 1 31 Oct 08 20000 5000 31 Jan 09 20000 5000 333 33 C E 30 Apr 09 10000 1666 67 15 May 09 10000 833 33 Account No A0002 DATE TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR INT FOR PERIOD YEAR END YEAR END TAX TAX RATE es E Cs Cs Cea 10 31 Mar 09 20000 3333 33 one fom fame e E C Er a wo pom fw o wwe feos fame 5 4 25 3 Maintaining SDEs for computing TDS 10 10 10 10 10 The following SDEs are given as factory shipped data Element Description Type Operation Periodicity Name Total interest Others N Booking No Daily earned accrued dated operation during financial year Will be populated with either projected et Comp
86. 001 15 000 22 500 1 800 39 24 In the above case on 31 March 09 year end tax was computed and debited from Tax Paid in Advance GL for the TD amount During partial redemption on 30 April 09 interest of Rs 4 500 is computed for the redemption amount for the period 01 March to 30 April TDS of Rs 600 is deducted for this partial redemption adjusting the yearend tax deduction The accounting entries are passed as below On 30 Nov 2008 amp 28 Feb 2009 TDS _ amount TAX PAY 3000 Surcharge Additional TDS amount On 31 Mar 2009 Year End TDS amount Surcharge 5 66 ORACLE Additional TDS amount On 30 Apr 2009 Partial redemption Adjustment entry TDS_amount TAX_PAY 1000 Surcharge Additional TDS amount Liquidation entry TDS_amount Surcharge Additional TDS amount 5 67 ORACLE On 31 May amp 31 Aug 2009 TDS_amount Surcharge Additional TDS amount TAX_PAY 58 86 Example case 3 Tax computation during breakage Partial redemption redemption less than the yearend tax In the above example on 30 April 09 partial redemption is done as below Account AC0001 Partial redemption amount 300 Account AC0002 Partial redemption amount 200 Liquidation schedule Interest Liquidation Total interest TDS Additional rate TDS applicable e e 5 68 ORACLE Year end Interest Liquidation Total interest rate a
87. 02 Account Description Savings MAMA Customer Number 1111118 Minimum Number of Signatories Customer Name UPLOADCUSTFIRSTNAME101 UPLOADCL Account Message Signatory Details a Signatory Number Signatory Name Signatory Type Solo Sufficient Approval Limit Signatory Message Here you can capture the following details Branch The system defaults the current branch here Account Number This is the account number to which signatories are to being linked Account Description The system displays the description for the account you have selected Customer Number Enter the customer signatory you want to link to the account You can link a customer signatory to an account either by e Click on the option list next to the Signatory Number A list of customer signatory numbers whose details have been captured will be displayed along with their names Pick up the signatory whom you want to make an account signatory for the account e Keying in the customer Signatory Number and Name directly if the signatory number has not been maintained through the Customer Signatory details screen 3 55 ORACLE o If the signatory ID that you specify has not been maintained the System displays an override On confirming the override you will be allowed to save the signatory details An error message is displayed if you enter a duplicate Signatory ID Each time you capture a new Signatory ID at the account level you must identify the re
88. 2000 19 57 17 Modification Number 1 IY Open Authorized By PRANAY Date Time 7 3 2000 19 59 26 iv Authorized In this screen you should specify the following details e The Name of the Algorithm This will uniquely identify the algorithm in Oracle FLEXCUBE e A brief description of the algorithm Sron After you capture the details of a new algorithm you must write the algorithm through the Algorithm Procedure Generation screen 6 1 27 1 Generating Procedure for Algorithm For every algorithm that you define through the Algorithm Maintenance screen must write the algorithm generation rule through the Algorithm Generation Input screen 6 45 ORACLE Invoke this screen by typing CSDALGGN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Algorithm Generation Input Web Page Dialog Algorithm Name TEST12 TEST12 Function Type Check Digit Generation Algorithm Rule asdasabcd Errors Input By GOOGLES Date Time 7 3 2000 16 16 23 Modification Number 2 iv Open Authorized By GOOGLES Date Time 7 3 2000 16 16 24 Iv Authorized Since the access to this screen is restricted to only a few authorized users at your branch level you will be allowed to invoke the screen only if you have the requisite rights In this screen you can specify e The name of the algorithm for which you are writing the algorithm generation rule A list of all the a
89. 4 11 Redeeming Term Deposits cccccccccccssseccccccccccccssesseecceeeeassseeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeeeeeaaaaaseeeceeesuaaaeeeeees 5 46 5 4 12 Processing TDS on Term Deposits ccccccccccccsessseccccccccccnneseccccceeeeaessseeeeeeeeaaeeeseceeeessuaaaseseeeeeeeesaaaeseeees 5 50 5 4 13 Maintaining Tax Code for D POSIts ccccccccccscccccccccccscecaeeseeeceeeeenaeeeseeeeeeeeaaaesseceeeeesaaaesseeeeeesaaaassseeeees 5 53 SAd Mainiaimine Wawer TYPES ririieiniri sarn aAA NOAA EAEAN OEA 5 55 DLS Manian Lax Waneer srasni ra NIA EANA AEA AA 5 56 i Pe eM Viewine TDS DEUS aore o ee en eee one ee RAN E EA AEO 5 58 IAL T A e E A E A E A A A A EAE E da eedee 5 59 IA TOSCO O a E A TTT E T TE T E T EE 5 62 S419 Mannaimint 1ax TEMUNE ai ETE A E T EEE 5 72 A TS 1 1601 a A E T TE E E E T E ET NER 5 73 5421 1C Rule for TDS Form l Mapping csisiasisivssssisessasieeias discs T E T T EEE T T 5 78 SA Sb IDSL epor Ganera ON sicer TaT T E a ESEE 5 80 Oy eee NCL EU ae TOS KEPO see Oe MTT ee CRT RTO RROD TTR CRN TT eRM ToT TCT ee TTPO mC enT CT Te Themen Crane tT see rte 5 81 5 4 24 Processing Tax computation during pre closure involving surcharge LiMIt ccccccccceeeeeeeeeseeees 5 97 DA TOPCU LOSS MENOU ae tava sit osegg sacs aie caus oues E Gees ids Gade aU 5 102 3420 AGC CTI TDS Ceri CUE assen EE onus sus Gaiann O a E 5 113 5 4 27 Tax Recovery Account Maintenant sessie srrsiicisissinddoccirevnsiis ioed enesi ed Cor R Noera ENE EESE ECN IN iee 5 116 DS E aaa E E
90. 9 Year end on nrenesrnccmuen fs On 30th Apr 2009 Next liquidation schedule in next financial year The following SDE values will be populated for the above example when ICTDS batch processes tax product associated with the above deposits Account No A0001 DATE TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR INT_FOR_PERIOD YEAR_END YEAR_END_TAX TAX_RATE TDS _LII 5 105 ORACLE Account No A0002 DATE TOT_INT FOR YEAR INT FOR PERIOD YEAR _END YEAR END TAX TAX RATE TDS 31 20000 10000 Oct 08 31 10000 Jan 09 31 20000 1666 67 10000 Mar 09 30 10000 Apr 09 31 10000 2500 10 10000 Jul 09 TDS computation during pre closure in projection basis A customer has opened the following deposits in the financial year 08 On 15 May 2009 the deposit account A0001 is closed before maturity Projected Projected Interest Interest amount amount from 1 till 31 Apr 09 to Mar 09 maturity Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity 240 date 120 date rate frequency date days days 31 Jul CHO A0001 200000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 13333 33 6666 67 31 Jul CHO A0002 100000 1 Aug 08 10 Quarterly 09 6666 67 3333 33 5 106 ORACLE TDS to be Liquidation Total interest deducted amount earned A0001 5000 31 Oct 08 A0002 2500 A0001 5000 31 Jan 09 A0002 2500 3 31 2009 A0001 3333 33 Accrual details A0002 1666 67 A0001 5000 7500 2500 will be 30 Apr considered for tax 0 Apr 09 A
91. A submitted by the customer If the total interest income from fixed deposits doesn t fall within the taxable limits then a waiver request is submitted by fixed deposit holder as per income tax regulations Individuals claiming such exemption have to submit Form 15G 15H companies form 15AA association of companies form 15AA and trusts must provide details in form 15AA In the Waiver type maintenance screen you can capture Tax waiver type to maintain different types of waiver instruments specified by income tax dept To invoke this screen type STDTWTYP in the top right corner of the application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button e Waiver type maintenance Web Page Dialog Tax Waiver Type Tax Waiver Type Description Individual Tax exemption limit for male Tax exemption limit for female Corporate Tax Excemption Limit for Corporate Others Maker Date Time Mod Ma Authorized Checker Date Time E Open LCE Specify the following details Tax Waiver Type Specify the tax waiver type It can be either of the following e 15G e 15H e 15AA Tax Waiver Description Specify description of the tax waiver 5 55 ORACLE Individual Specify the following details Tax Exemption limit for male Specify the total interest limit up to which the waiver is applicable for male Tax Exemption limit for female Specify the total interest limit up to which the waiver is applicable for female Corporate Speci
92. CI TS erosin anaren EAE EOE IN 3 54 3 1 26 Specifying Account Signatory Details ss isccccccccssvissssiccsicesssessccsiocsastossetacdscosseiseseassvasdessesseeasdesouseeessesss 3 54 3 1 27 Specifying Details for Balance Report Statement ccccccccccccssesecccccceecasssseeceeeecaaeesseeeeeseaaaeesseeeeens 3 56 3 1 28 Maintaining Notice Preferences for Withdrawal cccccccccccssveesececeeeecneneseesecceeeeeaaeseseesessuaaaeseseeeees 3 62 ek VNC Taras DELIS accesses canescens eis caus onas Ga onsite ants sates tan oaaore aca oa tno ea nana wie T 3 64 3da MOGIMIGINING sweep Mwe ONS serivisi rsin en A eE T ANEA EE EE A 3 65 3 2 LEVYING PENALTY INTEREST ON NOTICE ACCOUNTS cseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 67 3 3 MAINTAINING NOTICE PERIOD FOR WITHDRAWAL ssssseeeeeeeseseseeeseetsnesnessnsnenssnsssssseseaaaaaaaaaaaaaeaaaaaaas 3 69 3 4 VIEWING UTILIZATION OF FREE AMOUNTS sssecceccceceeeeeeeeesseesesssnnaaaneeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesseaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 71 3 5 VIEWING DUMMY NUMBERS ASSOCIATED WITH CIF NUMBER sssseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnnaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 72 3 6 WITHDRAWAL OF FUNDS WITHOUT PENALTY ccccccccccceeeessssessssssscceeseacccceeeseeeeseessstssceeasasaceeeeeeseeees 3 73 T EOS TING AC OUN T a E AA A TEE AE I T A E TES 3 73 3 8 RECORDING DETAILS OF LODGMENT BOOK REQUESTS ccsccscsscsscsccsccscscscessescesccensescesceceesessesseseeces 3 74 3 9 QUE
93. CY e Disallow a customer called Midas Bank associated with the customer category called Banks from using the features of this class e Grant your customer Morgan Stanley linked to the customer category called Financial Institutions all rights associated with NostroLCY Procedure In the Selection Indicator field click on Allowed since your allowed list is smaller and therefore easier to indicate 1 Highlight and select the Customer Categories called Banks and Financial Institutions in the Available Categories list and click the adjoining arrow 2 Next highlight Financial Institutions and click adjoining arrow against Customers It will display the entire list of customer accounts maintained under the customer category Financial Institutions 3 Select Morgan Stanley It will be listed in the first row To allow this customer the parameters assigned to this account class check the small square box alongside 4 To add a row click the Add icon To delete an extra row click the Delete icon 5 To disallow Midas Bank click on Banks under available categories Click the adjoining arrow against Customers to display a list of all the customers under this category Select Midas Bank Since you would like to disallow this customer do not check the square box against it o Check the square box to allow a customer the parameters assigned to this account class Leave the box unchecked to disallow a customer from being assigned to this account clas
94. Core Entities Version 1 0 INT1425 ORACLE FCUBSV UM 11 0 1N 1 0 0 0 November 2010 Oracle Part Number E51713 01 ORACLE FINANCIAL SERVICES ORACLE Document Control Author Documentation Team Group UBPG re Created on October 01 2008 Revision No Final a Updated by Documentation Team Reviewed by Approved by Software Quality Development Testing teams Assurance Team Updated on November 12 2010 Reviewed on November 12 Approved on November 12 2010 2010 Core Entities Table of Contents L OU AT Nae 1 1 1 1 Paro TION ree eset errata bse EE E EE E E EE E E EE OE E l 1 111 PUN CNC A l 1 1 1 2 OI iO EEE E EE NE E E O EE E E l 1 1 1 3 Related Documents nnnnnneeeeessssssssssseeeeerrrsssssssssssssererrreressssssssssssssetereereessssssssssseeesererreresesssssseees 1 2 1 1 4 Glossary of Icons ee 1 2 2 MAINTAINING CUSTOMER INFORMATION FILES cssssssssssssssssccccccsssssssssssssssssssscssssesssssees 2 1 2 1 WODO TO dec ee r A A T E A AT E T AAEE AE OE O OE 2 1 2 2 INVOKING CUSTOMER INFORMATION SCREEN ccccccccccececeecececcecececccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 2 1 Del Maintaining Customer Basic R COId cccscccsseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeee cece eee ne eee eeeeseeeee cece cece cana aaa aaa aaa a aaa aaaeEEEEEES 2 2 LLL naca nE VG CG satire aE E E O TREE EE OE ane eeceess 2 4 22d Specifying Exposure Category and Provisioning Details for Customers ccccccsseecccccc
95. Customer Information Query Introduction You can access the following information through the Customer Information Query screen e Customer Limits specifically relating to Overdraft Limits on Current Accounts and Foreign Exchange Exposure Limits e Details relating to a Customer Account e Facility to query for Account statement e Facility to view future settlement balance contracts e Facility to view Asset and Liability Balances of the customer e Facility to view summary of Collaterals and Account Details Invoking Customer Position Screen Invoke the Customer Information Query screen by typing ACDSCPQR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Wore iWleriie Query Bop De Viewing Accounting Details The screen displays all the accounts linked to the selected customer for the specified date range and grouped by Branch Customer Account and Currency You can use the Balance Enquiry screen to view the account balance details of any particular account of the selected customer Here you can view Account Balance details of the selected customer account like Account Number Current Balance Available Balance Utilized Amount and so on 9 1 ORACLE Invoke the Customer Account Balance Query screen by typing ACDCBIRD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Customer Account Balance
96. Deposits A c Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Available Branches Available Branches Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Available Currencies T Available Currencies Currency Preference In this screen you can specify the following for an account class e Those branches to which all parameters defined for this account class should be available e Those currencies in which all customer accounts linked to this account class can operate 6 1 20 Maintaining Branch Preferences Customer accounts maintained in any branch can be linked to any account class However you have the option of restricting the linkage of customer accounts in a particular branch or branches to an account class 6 34 ORACLE 6 1 21 Example Your bank has a total of 25 branches Branch 001 and 004 handles only Corporate Customers For an account class say SAV IND savings accounts of individuals you would like to disallow linkage of all customer accounts of branch 001 and 004 To specify this click on disallowed since the disallowed branch list is smaller than the allowed branch list From the list of Available Branches select 001 and click the adjoining arrow Repeat the procedure for 004 001 and 004 will be listed under disallowed branches For specifying the allowed list of branches first click on allowed You will notice that the list title changes accordingly to allowed and vice versa You sh
97. Dialog Ble Maintenance Bic Code Account Here you can enter the following details BIC Code Enter or select valid BIC from the option list This BIC Code information provided by you is crucial 2 35 ORACLE Account Number Once you specify the BIC code you can enter the relevant Account Number adjacent to it Click Ok to save the details entered here 2 2 19 Defining Customer Category You may wish to classify the customers of your bank into certain broad categories groups For instance all financial institutions who are your bank s customer can be classified into a single common group head called Financial Institutions Similarly you can have a category called banks individuals etc The classification of customers into categories can be used for retrieving financial information by customer category for generating reports on queries and restricting access of a customer to a product in the front end modules for instance Funds Transfer Data Entry etc You may also retrieve financial information by customer category The categories are maintained in the Customer Categories screen and are maintained at the bank level by your Head Office The customers are allocated different categories maintained in this screen in the Customer Information Maintenance screen 2 2 20 Invoking Customer Category Screen To invoke the Customer Categories Details screen type STDCSCAT in the field at the top
98. Dialog Term Deposit Bankers Cheque PC Cheque Details Bank Code Cheque Date Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Mame Address Line 1 Passport IC Number Address Line 2 Narrative Address Line 3 Country Code Interest The following details are captured here Bank Code Specify the bank code of the Bankers cheque Cheque Amount Specify the cheque amount for the pay out Cheque Date Specify the cheque date for the pay out Cheque Currency Specify the currency of the cheque for the pay out Cheque Percentage Specify the percentage of the cheque for the pay out 5 128 ORACLE Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the pay out Passport IC Number Specify the passport number of the beneficiary for the pay out Beneficiary Address Specify the address of the beneficiary for the pay out Narrative Specify the description for the pay out Country Code Specify the country code for the pay out 5 4 29 3 Specifying PC Details To capture the pay out details thought transfer to other bank account click on the PC tab A Term Deposit Web Page Dialog Term Deposit Bankers Cheque PC Counter Party Details Counter Party Bank Code Counter Party Account Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Mame Address Line 1 Address Line 2 Passport IC Number Marrative Interest The following details are captured here 5 129 ORACLE Counter Party Account Specify the acc
99. E BOOK 3 TAX ILIQ RULE TPBL 3 TAX ae ORACLE ILIQ oR RULE BOOK 2 TAX 5 4 20 4 TDS computation during interest payout TDS is computed and deducted from SB NRO accounts when the actual interest is paid to the customer Example Examples for TDS computation is given below TDS rate 10 CESS 3 Currency INR Available Interest Liquidation Balance rate frequency Account details AC0001 400000 Quarterly Liquidation schedule Liquidation 31 Mar 3500 30 Jun 10 3500 30 Sep 10 3500 31 Dec 10 3500 The following tax related entries will be passed during liquidation On 31 Mar 10 Interest _ amount ACCRUED_INT 3500 CUSTOMER 3500 TDS amount a ORACLE CUSTOMER TAX_PAY CUSTOMER TAX_PAY Interest_amount ACCRUED_INT 3500 CUSTOMER 3500 CUSTOMER TAX_PAY CUSTOMER TAX_PAY Interest_amount ACCRUED_INT 3500 On 30 Jun 10 On 30 Sep 10 CUSTOMER 3500 on eve OM 350 TDS amount ORACLE Cess amount CUSTOMER oR On 31 Dec 10 Interest_amount on ACCRUED_INT 3500 TDS amount CUSTOMER 350 Cess amount For further details on TDS certificate refer the Term Deposit Account chapter of Core Entry module 5 4 21 IC Rule for TDS Formula Mapping You can map the tax formulas with rule type through the screen given below To invoke this screen type ICDRLMAP in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar
100. EAR_END YEAR END TAX TAX RATE Account no AC0002 DATE TOT_INT FOR_YEAR INT _FOR_PERIOD YEAR_END YEAR END _TAX TAX RATE 31 Jul 08 7500 2500 e Pe System does not carry out Tax refund In some case tax paid is more than the actual tax payable due to pre closure or change in interest rate In such cases the deposit holder has to claim the excess tax amount directly from income tax dept 5 4 23 1 Processing Tax computation during Liquidation projected interest less than surcharge limit Example Account details Interest Booking Interest Liquidation amount for date rate frequency Maturity date financial year AC0001 800000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 60000 AC0002 400000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 30000 Liquidation schedule Liquidation Total Surcharge Additional amount interest to be TDS to be earned deducted deducted deducted 10 10 3 5 83 ORACLE Liquidation Total amount interest earned 31 Jul 08 A0001 20000 30000 A0002 10000 deducted 10 w w 1000 Surcharge to be deducted 10 Additional TDS to be deducted 3 The projected interest for all the deposits during the financial year is 90000 Since the projected interest is greater than the taxable limit tax will be deducted The projected interest above is less than the surcharge limit so surcharge is not deducted The following tax related entries are passed during subsequent liqui
101. Function Id STDCIF 3 Specify the value of the user defined field at the time of creating a customer The special status is also displayed in the information retrieval screen when you do a query for such a customer You can do the query using the Customer Summary Query screen You can invoke this screen by typing ACDCBIR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Lae Wal pagn ia brp o After having captured all the required details save the CIF record It becomes valid only after a user other than you authorizes it 2 24 ORACLE 2 2 13 Other Basic Customer Information You will notice the following buttons in the Customer Maintenance screen Standing Instructions Linked Entities Through this screen you can associate the customer code with a group Through this you can define the MIS details of a customer for future use Through this you can capture details of joint customers Through this screen you can view the details of all standing instructions associated with respective the customer code Through this screen you can link different customers to the specific customer whose details you are capturing and specify the relation shared by the two customers For details about linked entities refer to the section Maintaining Customer Accounts under the heading Relationships for Customer in this user manual Through this screen you
102. ING LAICS ssori ia A E T E AEAEE E 9 10 10 GEOSAN oean sacseccctsszsetesasnuetoceszsogussenuen sevens etesssniesesaasusdessasucudesasucteseaaieseeeazss 10 1 WEL IMPORTANT TERME aise erinen Atewtaqene te a ve atsse incu aqeta tentinen Asearageus eaenes a a a seencedueats 10 1 11 REPORTS eco cccs cece ccnet ce uececesacecccatecacacesececnecueuacecesacecees soncessccuaseacueceeeteeecnecs cnscceeceanseacsocseccececseceeeucsccaecoenese 11 1 W IN TODUC TION crereeri epee cerca tem ed ET E ITEE dente ecceneeeasensearasieas 11 1 12 IRA STATEMENT IREPORTS acsceasagcewer ecncmasseu aTa TEE TEN ETEEN eimai eneihes 11 1 D MMM LENE O O a a E E E T E E E TA O E nT ee ee oe 11 1 Liz Lonen Oe IC OIE osais en EA A O AE N R 11 1 11 3 MINIMUM WITHDRAWAL ADVICE REPORTS ccccccccccececeeceeccececcccececceeccceccecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 2 Teo LO Of IC T O aa E E A I E ET A OTEA E E ETE 11 3 UA CAROLA DYICEREPORT S apoien EE E TEE EE E EE E see coe 11 3 Iad Lonen of IC IRC OI roaster cota caceieaeacaee ETA A T AT EA 11 3 TES POM A E E E E EE E E E E nT re 11 4 11 5 1 Generating Form 5498 as Part of Initial Filing 00000nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsssoennnnnsssseenonnsssssseereessssseeereso 11 4 HD Generaine Form 34985 after Lax FINE ci csivseecteseasisvassnasea tania oi E NEEE ee A 11 4 TID Deras DINIECD ON FOV IIIS rierien nE T E EEEN A E 11 4 ORACLE VEO IRSPORM MOO se cag ane des ccenceanae aceusaeancatecnoandeneseeecsatiaaaaasmaa
103. If you have specified a positive pay facility for the account you are maintaining then you have to indicate the number of stale days for the transaction If the date of processing happens after the specified stale date then the transaction gives an exception error You have to do an override for this exception Branch Click on the adjoining option list to choose from the list of branches maintained The positive pay parking account will be picked from this branch 3 14 ORACLE Into Click on the adjoining option list to choose the account into which funds have to be transferred on receipt of a positive pay instruction The accounts that satisfy the following conditions will be available in the list of Positive Pay Parking Account e Both accounts belong to the same customer e The currency of both the accounts is the same Deferred Reconciliation Enabling this check box indicates whether or not the Positive Pay account has the Deferred Reconciliation facility Deferred Reconciliation is the facility wherein a Positive pay cheque which is free of any disparity is cleared by the bank even in the absence of any instruction from the drawer of the cheque The instruction can be deferred Deferred Reconciliation function goes hand in hand with the Positive Pay described above and Deferred Reconciliation is applicable only for Positive Pay Accounts e f Positive Pay No and Deferred Reconciliation No the cheque is subjected to the us
104. Interest Charges if checked indicates that for interest and charges computation the Interest and Charges module will process accounts linked to this class e Track Accrued IC if checked indicates whether accrued interest in the Interest and Charges module on an account linked to this class would be considered while computing credit utilization for the account e Passbook Facility if checked indicates that accounts linked to the account class are issued passbooks e ATM Facility if checked indicates that accounts linked to the class will avail the ATM facility e Daylight Limit if checked indicates that you can specify daylight overdraft limit for all the accounts belonging to this account class While modifying the maintenance if you uncheck this box the daylight overdraft limit will be made zero for all the accounts belonging to this account class e Debit Credit Advices If checked indicates that for all accounts belonging to this class the system will generate a debit credit advices on interest liquidation The advices are generated during end of day processing in SWIFT or and MAIL format You can also specify this preference through the Special Conditions screen e Track Receivable if checked you can choose to block the subsequent credit that happens to the settlement account linked to this account class of a loan contract or retail teller contract if the system detects insufficient funds in the ac
105. L s for the accounts should be contingent GLs There will not be any accounting entries passed into the accounts of line account type This will only be used as the calculation account for calculating the limit fees Hence the account balance of this account will always remain as 0 To ensure the line account functionality you will have to maintain the following In the Customer Account Maintenance screen you will have to create new customer accounts with Account Class type as Line Account and ensure the following parameters for every new line associated with a liability e The CIF of the account in the Customer Account Maintenance screen will have to be the same as the liability to which the line will be linked in the Limits screen 6 4 ORACLE e The currency of the account in the Customer Account Maintenance screen will have to be the same as the currency of the line that will be attached in the Limits screen e The interest calculation account maintained in the Interest and Special Conditions Maintenance screen will have to be the same as in the Limits screen However the Interest Booking Account maintained in the Interest and Special Conditions Maintenance screen can be some other account belonging to other account class types Since accounts can be of different types you need to indicate the type of account for which you are defining an account class It could belong to any one of the ty
106. Liquidation Tax Scheme Value Date 7 3 2000 Auto Remarks Original Start Date Manual Payment Method BEARING Cluster Id Rollover Schedule Type NORMAL Yes No Size Events ICCF Effective Rate Settlement Tax MIS Change Log Fields Charges Advices Date Time Authorized By Contract Status E Authorized Active For more details on the LD Contract Online screen please refer the Loans User Manual 9 3 ORACLE 9 2 3 Viewing Deposit Details You can view details of all Deposit contracts for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen Click the Deposits tab The deposit amount that appears is the consolidated amount grouped by Branch Product and Currency The screen appears as shown below E Customer Information Query Web Page Dialog Customer Information Customer EH 7 Current Branch Only T Relationship Address Query Accounts Loans Deposits FX FT Deposits Details E Branch Product Description Currency Balance Debit Credit Indicator From Date To Date Transaction Date Value Date Double clicking a record displays the Deposits Contracts Summary screen comprising a Summary of transactions contributing to the balance displayed in the Customer Position screen MM borrowings Deposits The Balance is the principal balance for the selected Deposit product Double clicking a record in the Loans and Deposits Contract Summary screen displays the correspondi
107. Local Holiday Calendar e Liquidation Mode debit interest or charges can be liquidated either Manually or Automatically If you choose the automatic mode of liquidation debit interest or charges are liquidated automatically as part of the BOD process on the liquidation date However after having specified Auto as the mode of liquidation if you wish to liquidate them manually for a specific account the System intimates you with an override message Manual interest liquidation can be triggered through the Debit Interest Liquidation screen Manual liquidation is recommended during Account Closure e Verify Funds enabling this option indicates that an available balance check should be performed for receivable tracking As a result the System performs the available balance check before debiting the account The available balance also includes the limit amount Verification of funds is applicable only in the case of Auto Liquidation If you leave this option unchecked the System performs a force liquidation regardless of whether the account has sufficient funds or not Note the following e You will not be allowed to change these preferences at the account level However in the Amounts and Dates section of the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen both the total debit interest due as well as the charges due are displayed 6 1 9 e fthere is any outstanding interest or charges on the account the outstanding amount is
108. Maturity Date if it remains unclaimed 5 39 ORACLE 5 4 8 Maintaining Interest Conditions and Other Parameters for Account For additional information relating to the handling of the deposit click on the Deposit button The Details for Deposit Types of Account screen is displayed 4 Details for Deposit types of Account Web Page Dialog Principal Liquidation Branch Principal Liquidation Account Interest Start Date Next Maturity Date Maturity Date Deposit Tenor T Auto Rollover Rollover Details Principal T Close on Maturity Principal interest Move Interest to Unclaimed Special Amount Move Principal to Unclaimed Rollover Amount Term Deposit Pay In Option e a lg Offset Account Offset Branch Term Deposit Amount Recurring Deposit Installment Frequency T Auto Payment TakeDown Move funds on Overdraft T Move Maturities to Unclaimed Days Payment Branch Months Payment Account Years Installment Amount T Recurring Deposit Account Payment Date Payment Currency Principal Liquidation Account Details On maturity the principal of a time deposit can be liquidated into an account you specify This would typically be the customer s account When maintaining a deposit indicate the account into which the principal should be liquidated You should also specify the branch in which the liquidation account is maintained 5 4 8 1 Specifying Tenor Details for Deposit A deposit account acquires the default t
109. No Main Nominee Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Description Account Type Single Joint Country Code Mode Of Operation Account Open Date Alternate Account Number Clearing Bank Code Clearing Account Number Address Interest Charges Linked Entities Restrictions Mis Statement Joint Holders Fields Account Signatory TD Payout Details FX Linkage Change Log Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Checker Date Time a Oe 5 5 ORACLE You need to capture the following details here Description Specify an appropriate account description for the term deposit account Account Type Select the account type Account type can either be Single or Joint Country Code Specify the country code for the TD account Mode of Operation Select the mode of operation Operation can be either in part or in full Account Open Date The system displays the value date of opening the deposit account This will be the term deposit interest start date Alternate Account Number Specify the alternate account number other than the main account number The current TD account number will be displayed by default Clearing Bank Code Specify the code by which your bank is identified in the Clearing Network you participate in This has to be the same as that specified for your bank in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen Address Specify the address of the customer opening the TD account Location Specify
110. Of Birth Country of Origin Remarks Alias Mames r Sequence Number Alias Mame Address p Sequence Number Address Line 1 Address Line 2 Address Line3 Address Line 4 Fields Input By Date Time Modification Number I Open Authorized By Date Time I Authorized The following details have to be captured e Name of the Specially Designated National e Date of Birth of the SDN Specify the Date of Birth of the SDN in YYYYMMDD format e Country of Origin You can specify the SDN s country of origin by selecting the same from the option list provided e Remarks Any additional remarks if required can be specified e Alias Names of the SDN You can specify a maximum of fifteen alias names 6 10 ORACLE e Addresses of the SDN You can specify a maximum of fifteen addresses of address line 1 to address line 4 for a SDN 6 1 6 Specifying your Preferences for Account Class Preferences are the options or attributes that uniquely distinguish an account class The following are the preferences that you can specify for an account class e Limit Check you can check this box to indicate that a limit check for sufficient availability of funds in the account will be made for all accounts belonging to the account class e Overdraft Facility if checked indicates that all accounts belonging to this class would be allowed an overdraft facility facility to draw a specified amount over and above the balance in the account e
111. Open Authorized By PRAGNYA Date Time 7 3 2000 15 01 31 T Authorized Location Code You can capture a unique three character code to identify the locality where the customer resides 6 44 ORACLE While maintaining customer information details and associating a location code with a Customer and Country Code combination a list of all the valid location codes you have maintained in this screen will be available in the option list for the Location Code field You can select the appropriate code Description You can also associate a brief description with the location code This description is for information purposes only and will not be printed on any customer correspondence o While maintaining the Customer Short Name in the CIF Details screen the system automatically appends the Location code to the customer short name when you associate the appropriate Location Code with the Customer Code 6 1 27 Capturing Algorithm Details in Oracle FLEXCUBE In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can choose to generate check digits for Customer Accounts based on the algorithm of your choice You can define algorithms of your choice through the Algorithm Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing CSDALGMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Algorithm Maintenance Web Page Dialog Algorithm Name TEST13 Algorithm Description TEST13 Input By BRIJ1 Date Time 7 3
112. Page Dialog Branch Account Number Currency Account Open Date QUERY Period Financial Year Balances And Turnovers E Financial Cycle Period Low Balance High Balance Average Credit Balance Average Debit Balance Average Net Balance E The details displayed are as follows Low and High Balance for a period The lowest and highest current balances for the period Average credit and debit balance for a period This is computed as the sum of credit debit current balances in a period divided by the number of days of credit debit balance during the period Credit and debit days The number of days the account was in credit debit balance in the period Credit and Debit Turnover The credit debit turnover for the period Excess days in debit balance The number of days in a month when the account exceeded the overdraft limits Overdraft Limit This is computed by summing the temporary overdraft limit and the sub limit of the account For each month this would represent the limit on the last date of the month Credit grade of the Customer 3 76 ORACLE 3 9 1 This would be the prevalent rating on the last day of the period For the current period this information is provided up to the previous working day Printing of this information for an account is only possible if the Account Statistics option has been enabled in the Account Class Maintenance for the account class used by the account If acco
113. Query Web Page Dialog Account Number Currency Customer Number Account Class QUERY Accounts ia Account Humber Currency Current Balance Available Balance WUnutilized Line Amount Total Available Balance Uncollected Fe Account Details Account Statistics Specify the following Branch You can indicate whether only customer accounts in the current branch should be displayed or customer accounts across branches should be displayed Check this box to view customer accounts pertaining to the current branch Indicating whether to include Relationship While querying for the customer position you can choose to include all the accounts loans or deposits where the customer is not the primary holder To indicate this choose the check box Include Relationship The summary screen displays the customer number or primary holder of the account the customer s name and the relationship that the customer has with the account If you leave this box unchecked system will display the account details of primary account holder only 9 2 2 Viewing Loans Details You can view details of all loan contracts for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen Click the Loans tab The loan amount that appears is the consolidated amount grouped by Branch Product and Currency 9 2 ORACLE The screen appears as shown below 3 Customer Information Query Web Page Dialog Customer Information Customer T Curre
114. RACLE Example If frequency is monthly and payment date is 10th Jan then first payment happens on 10th Jan and subsequent payments happen on same date for the continuing months Payment Currency Specify currency of the payment amount Note the following e he system enables the offset account and branch detail fields only if the option to paying is selected as the savings account e Ifyou select the Move to Unclaimed GL option this specification takes precedence That is on maturity the funds will be moved directly to the respective Unclaimed GLs even if customer accounts for the principal and interest have been maintained e The Unclaimed Interest and Principal GLs are specified while maintaining an Interest and Charges IC Deposit Type product The Accounting Roles for the GLs are INT UNCLAIMED and PRN UNCLAIMED respectively When maintaining an IC Deposit type product you have to map these Accounting Roles to the appropriate GLs maintained at your bank e The system allows you to select close on maturity option only when you specify the recurring deposit details You have to maintain deposit transaction code as DPN redemption transaction code as RED and prepayment transaction code as TRF for the recurring payments in Branch Parameters for the Interest and Charges e All recurring deposit payments are part of IC batch beginning of day activity 5 33 ORACLE 5 4 6 4 Capturing Details
115. RYING FOR ACCOUNT STATISTICS ccccccccsecccceseccccssccccesecsceusecsceueccecesececeeeececuecseeesecessuseseseseseeeeecess 3 75 3 9 1 Mainio min SWEEP VEACCOUIUS ecstascaanssieinesustsei NENE ESSEE tee 3 77 3 9 2 Capturing Sweep in Accounts Detals ccccccccccssssecccccccccnansssseccccecaaessseeceeeeeeaaaasseeeeeeeaaaaaseeeeeesaaaaaees 3 80 3 9 3 Viewing Sweep in ACCOUNTS Summary Details ccccccccccccceseesesccccccceeeaeeeesesecceeeaaaseseeeeseeaaaaeeseseeeeeaas 3 82 MAINTAINING TAX ALLOWANCE DIVO vosccccsecccescsscssccusccbecccsccusscteectccecsccusscussebeecemeeeteereeresteseeeaesieens 4 1 4 1 MNO DUO arensea sa a EE E EREA EEA 4 1 4 2 MAINTAINING CUSTOMER TAX ALLOWANCE SCREEN ssscccccccceceeeeeeessseessssseneaaaccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeaaaeeees 4 MAINTAINING TERM DEPOSIT ACCOUNTS esssssssssssssssssssssssssssccscccecsscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssoo 5 3 5 1 Par ODEI O a T sects ia oaenanenbeusaanmenteedy 5 3 Ia ANVOIKING DACCOUNT SCREEN scoptaczedecceaseanepaencdetanpstecaseccatecatateccrmiesaansehe ceva esesatson ent aneasenotetesateceneennceens as 5 3 5 3 SPECIFYING ERM DEPOSIT ACCOUNT sce ascscanenncdatacosicsastaseteaatanecsananseassehepeuaseceaattoaapatcheasencteteianiamseeontneaias 5 4 5 3 1 MTA 7 er een ePEe Ce ST eeeT MET Teer CeT Teo Teeter reeerrentrrer sr a creer eer ere rerere tT yer 5 5 5 3 2 Noer WA seia EA a 5 7 5 3 3 DD 0 a EnS AAN A AA ener ae ee reer rte eer 5 8 5 3 4 Dual Currency Tab wa
116. Short Name Corporate Branch Code Bank Main Auxiliary Personal Corporate Director Director Details Permanent Address Director Name Tax id Mobile Number E mail Address Mailing Address Address Address2 Address3 Address4 Group MIS Joint Standing Instructions Linked Entities Text Fields Image CLS Restrictions MT920 Domestic Professional Issuer Maker Date Time Mod No WB authorized Checker Date Time E Open In this screen you can maintain director details of a customer You have to capture the following details of director Director Name Specify the director s name 2 22 ORACLE 2 2 11 2 2 12 Tax ID Specify the director s tax ID details Mobile Number Specify the directors mobile number E mail Specify the directors e mail ID Mailing Address Specify the director s mailing address to which the mails needs to be sent Permanent Address Specify the directors permanent address Capturing UDF Values for Customers In order to know your customer better you may need to capture certain additional information specific to a customer This is in addition to the regular information that you would capture in the Customer Maintenance screen To capture more details of the customer you can define a set of UDFs and associate them with the function id STDCIF for Customer Maintenance screen After you associate the UDFs they will appear in the Customer Maintenance screen Y
117. Specify the address of the beneficiary for the pay out Passport IC Number Specify the Passport or IC Number of the beneficiary for the pay out Narrative Specify the description for the pay out 5 4 3 PC Tab Click on PC tab to capture PC related details 5 19 ORACLE Term Deposit Web Page Dialog Term Depost Bankers Cheque DD Counter Party Details Counter Party Bank Code Counter Party Account Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Mame Address Line 1 Passportac Number PC Details Pt Product Account Class Clearing Metvrork Beneficiary Account Type Beneficiary Address Line 1 Beneficiary Address Line 2 Savings Bank Address Line 2 Narrative Interest The following details are captured here Counterparty Bank Code Specify the bank code of the counter party for the pay out Counterparty Account Specify the account number of the counter party for the pay out Counterparty Currency System defaults the TD Account currency as the currency of the counter party for the pay out Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the pay out Passport IC Number Specify the Passport or IC Number of the beneficiary for the pay out Beneficiary Address Specify the address of the beneficiary for the pay out 5 20 ORACLE Narrative Specify the description for the pay out 5 4 4 Linking FX Transactions In the IC Special Conditions Maintenance screen click FX Linkage
118. Stat Only On Movement Previous Statement Details Date Balance No 7 Display IBAN in advices Type None Summary Detailed Account Number 100002 o E Previous Statement Details Date I Generate Stat Only On Balance Movement No Type None Secondary A c Statement Summary Detailed o E Tertiary A c Statement Previous Statement Details Date I Generate Stat Only On Balance Account Number The system displays the account number for which you are setting the statement details Primary A c Statement This refers to the type of statement to be generated periodically by the system for this account You can specify whether you want a detailed or summary statement or if you do not want a statement for this account at all Cycle You can specify the frequency for generating the account statements To specify the frequency of the statements click on the adjoining drop down list The following list is displayed Annual semi annual Quarterly Monthly Fortnightly Weekly Daily 3 29 ORACLE On For a weekly statement you specify the day of the week on which account statements should be generated and for fortnightly and monthly statements the dates of the month To specify for weekly statements click on the adjoining drop down list The following list of days will be displayed Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday To specify for monthly statements enter a number be
119. T E E AEE E EA E 5 123 5 4 29 Capturing Pay Out Parameters Details vccssssici oss scerssvctonsstanensagaretonneduedsniseantoneaedeasiassoNexcaduaacieeseits 5 126 5 4 30 Generating and Viewing Term Deposit Account Certificate cccccccccssssccccccecceeenesseeeceeeeaaaeeeeseeeees 5 134 5 4 31 Specifying Deposit details for Simulated Account ccccccccccsseeesseccecetenneeseeecceeeaaaasseeeeesesaaaaseeeeees 5 135 5 4 32 Specifying Interest Details for Simulated ACCOUNL ccccccccccssveseecccceetcnesesseeceeeecaaeseeeceeesaaaasesees 5 135 SASS Manual Rece OF TNSIQIINGIIS serrirar eara ENNE EOE 5 139 MAINTAINING MANDATORY INFORMATION sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 6 1 MATOBO CTION ee e E E E E E EE ne etaeies 6 1 6 1 1 Maintaining ACCOUNT CLASSES sorier noia n nr e AEN E i 6 1 6 1 2 Invoking Account Class Maintenance SCr een neennnnnnnnnnnnsssseennnssssssernnsssssseerosssosssseeresssssseereessse 6 2 6 1 3 Specifying Account Statement Parameters ccccccccccccsseecccccceccncaeseseeceeeeenaeeeseeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeeeesaaaaeeeeeeeeeaas 6 7 6 1 4 Maintaining Cheque Book Preferences nnnnnnennnnsssssssssssseeersrerrresssssssssssesererrresessssssssssseseeeens 6 8 6 1 5 Capturing Details about Specially Designated Nationals ccccccccccssseccccccccesnneeesseeeceeeaaasesseeeseseaaaaees 6 9 6 1 6 Specifying your Preferences fOr Account CLASS cccccsscecccccccccccccsescccccececaasessescee
120. TOS Amt TD Account Total Refund TOS Amt LEY TE Cey O Payment Date Interest Amt TDS Excl Surchg Surcharge Adatnl Tax TOS Amount Refund TOS Excl Surchg Refund Surcharge Retund Adctnl Tax Retund TOS Amt Refund TES Amt LEY Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Checker Date Time BB open Tax refund details can be queried based on TD account TD Ccy Refund reference number financial year and branch code Specify the following details Branch Code This current branch of the customer is displayed here Financial Year Select the financial year from the adjoining option list of financial years for which tax refund is processed TD Account Select the Term deposit account from the list of term deposit accounts available in the current branch for which tax is refunded TD Ccy TD Ccy displays the currency using which term deposit is opened 5 123 ORACLE Refund Reference No This field displays the refund reference number The refund reference number is generated using the process code ZTRF when the P button is clicked Total Refund TDS Amount This field displays the sum of Refund TDS amount entered by the user against each payment date which is populated when the transaction is saved Total Refund TDS Amount LCY This field displays the sum of Refund TDS amt LCY computed against each payment date and populated when the transaction is saved Payment Date The date on which tax is liquidated is displa
121. Tax Withholding is used in the United States taxation system by foreign persons including corporations to certify their non American status The form issued by the Internal Revenue Service establishes that one is a foreign non resident alien or foreign national performing work outside the United States in order to claim tax treaty benefits such as a lower amount of tax withholding from dividends paid by U S corporations 10 3 ORACLE 11 Reports 11 1 Introduction Every action that results in a debit or credit to the customer s monetary account is recorded The advices are generated and sent to the customer depending on the advice generation frequency that you have specified You can generate the following reports e IRA Statement e Minimum Withdrawal Advice e Charge Advice e IRS Form 5498 e IRS Form 1099 R e Customer Account Opening Confirmation e Netting 11 2IRA Statement Reports An IRA statement is a statement of accounts for an IRA plan You will be able to generate statements for a list of all the transactions carried out in an IRA plan for the statement generation frequency specified for the plan You also have the option of generation on an ad hoc basis 11 2 1 Selection Options You can choose to generate the account statements for transactions involving all plans within your branch or for transaction within a single plan or for a range of plans You will also have to indicate the date range for the generation o
122. Web Page Dialog Exposure Category NB NASTRO BANKS Exposure Provisioning Percentage C Status Description Provisioning Percentage Discount Percentage M NORM 0 0 Input By VENL1 Date Time 7 3 2000 09 58 45 Modification Number 3 iv Open Authorized By VENU1 Date Time 7 3 2000 09 58 45 E authorized You can view the summary of the provisioning details in the Exposure Category Provisioning Percent Maintenance Summary screen Invoke this screen by typing LDSPRVMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Corporate Deposits Exposure Category Provisioning Percent Maintenance Web Page Dialog A Authorization Status Record Status x z Exposure Category 7z E SCS CENTA Reset Records per page is gt Perey a Go to Page _ Authorization Status Record Status Exposure Category FPREEEEPE E olok ololololojo Authorization Status Record Status A Authorized C Closed U Unauthorized Open For contracts and accounts involving a customer whose exposure is being tracked under the exposure category the applicable provisioning percentage as well as the discount percentage is picked up from this maintenance if not specified at contract input or in the case of accounts in the Customer Account Maintenance 8 5 ORACLE 8 1 4 2 Specifying Logic for Deriving Exposure Category After you have ma
123. Y 3598 50 Surcharge TAX PAY v55 54 Additional TDS amount n ORACLE On 30 Aug 2009 TDS amount TAX_PAY 3598 50 Surcharge Additional TDS amount 5 4 19 Maintaining Tax Remittance You can maintain the tax remittance details of the bank in the Tax Remittance Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type ICDTXREM in the field top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button The details maintained during tax payment are specified in TDS certificate A Tax Remittance Web Page Dialog Branch Financial Year Fron Date To Date BSR Mo Chalan Humber Cheque Number Date of Remittance Tax Remittance Amount Details of Remittance Maker Date Time teeta Me lite FF thorized Exit Checker late ay _MECKEL ate HME Ei Open Specify the following details 5 72 ORACLE Branch Specify the branch code for which tax remittance is done Financial Year Specify the financial year for the remittance From Date Specify the start date from which remittance has to be paid To Date Specify the end date till when remittance has to be paid BSR No Specify the BSR code of bank s branch where tax payment is done Challan Number Specify the challan no of payment receipt Cheque Number The cheque or DD number through which payment is done Date of Remittance Specify the remittance date Tax Remittance Amount Specify the tax remittance amount for
124. a brief description of the locality where the customer resides Media Specify the media of the TD account Option Track Receivable Check the box to block the subsequent credit that happens to the settlement account linked to this account class of a loan contract or retail teller contract if the system detects insufficient funds in the account during liquidation oe ORACLE 5 3 2 Nominee tab Click on Nominee tab to capture nominee related details TD Accounts Maintenance Web Page Dialog Pay In Option Branch Code CHO Customer No Pay in by Term Deposit Account Customer Name Clearing Type Number Term Deposit Currency Cheque Date SD User Reference Account Class gt z P Mnemonic Code Cheque Instrument No Small Account Number Drawee Account Number Routing No Main Nominee Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Hominee Details Name Date Of Birth Relationship Address Relationship Address Address2 Address3 Address4 Guardian Name Address2 Address3 Address4 Interest Charges Linked Entities Restrictions Mis Statement Joint Holders Fields Account Signatory TD Payout Details FX Linkage Change Log Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Cancel JER Cancel Checker Date Time We open You need to capture the following details here Name Specify the name of the nominee Date of Birth Specify the date of birth of the nominee Relationship Specify the relation
125. aaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaasseeeeeeeeaaaaees 3 ORACLE 3 1 2 Capturing Main Details ss scszsczcsiaoessusaaaannsncasaieassoaanaesaeiastenasensatadidasani iinan T An Ea Ta owned aa eee 3 3 3 1 3 Viewing Details Of Amounts ANA DAtECS cccccccccsssseecseccceet eee eeeeeeeeeeeaa a eeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeesaaaaseeeeeeeeaaas 3 1 3 1 4 Capturing Auxiliary Details cccccccccccccccseccccccceceeeeeseeceeeee a eeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeseeeeeeeaaaasseeeeeeeeeeaaaes 3 13 3 1 5 Specifying Provisioning DetaIlS cccccccccccssseescceecceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeesesaaaaeeeeeees 3 17 3 1 6 Capturing Additional Details ccccccccccccsccccccccccccceseeseeceeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeaeeessseeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseseesaaaasseeeeeeseeaaaaes 3 19 3 1 7 Specifying BIC Detail s cccccccccccccccssescccccccenenessesecceeeeeaesseseeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaesseeeeeessuaaasseeeeeeesaaaaaeeeeees 3 20 3 1 8 Specifying Deposit Details ccccccccccssscccccccccceneseseccceeeaneeseseeceeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeesessaaasseeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeees 3 21 3 1 9 Specifying Account Operating Instruction Details ccccccccccccseeecscccccctensesseeceeceeeeaaasseesceeesaaaaseeeeees 3 21 3 1 10 Specifying REG Details ccccccccccccccssssccccccecccseseseeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaseseeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeeeesaaaeseeeceeesuaaassaneeeees 3 22 3 1 11 Specifying Account Status Details cccccccccccscccccccccccccssseessccccceeeeasesseeceeeeeaaseseeceeeesuaaeeeeeeesesaaaaeseeeees 3
126. account details Provision processing depends upon the status processing for accounts The Provisioning Batch For accounts for which provisioning has been indicated a batch process is run subsequent to the following processes to perform provisioning e Status processing for accounts e Interest and Charges IC batch process e The Automatic Daily Contract Update process in the Loans module To trigger the provisioning batch you can use the Provisioning Batch screen When the batch is triggered the provisioning events SPRO provision and SPWB write back are executed Specifying Frequency at which Provisioning Batch is Executed To recall provision processing depends upon status processing for accounts and contracts The provisioning batch executes after the status processing batch as explained in the previous section If status processing is indicated to be processed at group CIF level you can indicate the frequency at which the provisioning batch is to be executed for your branch You can specify the provisioning frequency in the Branch Parameters Preferences screen The frequency options available are daily and monthly To view the Branch Parameters Preferences screen refer the Core Services user manual The Provisioning Process If status processing for your branch is done at customer group CIF level as specified in the Branch Parameters the provisioning process executes according to the frequency defined in the Branch Pa
127. ach customer is required to provide certain identification details to your bank for establishing the customer s identity For instance the passport number or ration card of the customer may serve as the criteria to establish the customer s identity In Oracle FLEXCUBE this is known as Unique Identifier Name Name Enter the identifier name in not more than 20 characters Value You have to capture the serial number or any number of significance that is to be associated with the document which can help in identifying the document You can use a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters to capture the identifier value 2 2 2 4 Indicating Customer Customer Account Status As part of indicating the personal status of the customer or the customer s account you have to specify whether the customer has e Deceased e The customer s whereabouts are unknown e The customer s account is Frozen either an order passed by law or any of the above mentioned reasons For each customer you will be allowed to mark one or more statuses For example if the customer has deceased then the customer account will be declared frozen Therefore for the particular customer both the statuses Deceased and Frozen will be applicable If none of the statuses is marked it suggests that this customer s status is normal Customer Category Each customer that you maintain can be categorized under any one of the categories that you have maintained in the Cus
128. actions would be counted over the primary statement cycle defined for the customer account 3 1 10 1 Indicating Reg D Details Start Date The start date for Regulation D applicability is first set to be the date on which you mark the availability option in this screen Subsequent to the first period the EOD process would update the start date according to the periodicity defined End Date Subsequent to the first period the EOD process would update the end date according to the periodicity defined 3 23 ORACLE 3 1 11 Specifying Account Status Details You can specify status details for the account using the Status Details screen To invoke this screen click the Account Status button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen lt 4 Status Details Web Page Dialog Account Branch CHO Account Number 100002 Account Status Status WORM MORMAL STATUS Reporting Lines GL Lines Cr WOSO01 Dr YWOSO01 Central Bank Lines CBL2S00 Here you can capture the following details Branch The system defaults the code of the current branch Account Number The system defaults the account number from the main screen Status You can select the different status codes applicable to the account class in this field Use the Add icon to define each status and the attributes for the same You can use the navigation icons to move from one status to the other On selection of the status the associated de
129. after sweep out Minimum Sweep Amount Specify the minimum amount you need to sweep out from CASA account to loan account Active Check this box to activate sweeping of amount between loan account and CASA account Note the following e If asweep instruction is maintained for a CASA account with loan account then during the closure of CASA account and CL loan account system will automatically deactivate the sweep instruction e Once the loan account is linked with CASA account for sweep then the system will not allow to maintain any other sweep for CASA account at Linked Sweep Accounts level 3 66 ORACLE 3 2 Levying Penalty Interest on Notice Accounts The Notice Account is a savings account for which the bank levies Advance Interest if the account holder withdraws an amount more than the Free Amount The free amount is the amount that a customer can withdraw per calendar month from his her savings account without providing any notice to the bank and without being liable to pay advance interest Oracle FLEXCUBE facilitates the setting up of a Notice Account using the Customer Accounts Maintenance Notice Preferences screen by enabling the option Advance Interest You can also configure an account class for advance interest by enabling the option Advance Interest at the Account Class Maintenance Notice Preferences screen For more details on the Customer Accounts Mainten
130. aintaining narratives if you choose the narrative type for a module the prompt codes maintained for this module are displayed You can choose the relevant prompt code from the option list For the FT module the prompt codes can be the following 6 39 ORACLE e FT EVENTDESC e FT USERREFNO For the above prompt codes you have to enter the descriptions in the desired language For instance the description for FT EVENTDESC can be maintained as EVENT DESCRIPTION in the English language The Account statement for the above maintenance will look like EVENT DESCRIPTION REVERSAL where reversal is the actual event happening The word REVERSAL itself is picked up from the same screen for Event type of narratives o The same logic applies to the other type of narratives 6 1 25 Maintaining Customer Instruction Details Instructions Maintenance screen allows users to maintain instructions for customers with the current branch as the local branch You can invoke this screen by typing CSDINSTR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Instructions Maintenance Webpage Dialog Customer No Instructions Details O Instruction id instruction Description Instruction Date Instruction Expiry Date Maker Date Time Mod No WE Authorized XI Checker Date Time z ele Specify the following 6 40 ORACLE Customer Number Specify the required Cust
131. alculated from the last scheduled liquidation date If the last scheduled liquidation date is on the previous financial year then the total interest accrued from the start to end of financial year will be calculated for TDS processing ICTXYEB batch processes tax liquidation for year end accruals on each term deposit This batch is configured after ICEOD batch in EOTI stage You can set frequency to yearly operationally controlled You can set the Holiday rule as Previous Working Day 5 90 ORACLE 5 4 23 4 Processing Tax computation during year end involving surcharge limit Example Account details Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity Projected date rate frequency date Interest amount till 31 Mar 09 240 days cho Acooot 600000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 31 Jul 09 40000 x AC0002 300000 1 Aug 08 Quarterly 31 Jul 09 20000 Liquidation schedule Liquidation Total Surcharge Additional amount interest to be TDS to be earned deducted deducted deducted 10 10 3 15000 co o 22500 31 Mar A0001 1 10000 1 1000 2009 Yearend A0002 15000 accrual details 5000 A0001 22500 7500 will be considered for tax 30 Apr 09 15000 5000 processing A0002 7500 2500 250 31 Jul 09 A0001 15000 22500 A0002 7500 The projected interest for all deposits during the financial year 2008 2009 i e Between 1 Aug 08 to 31 Mar 09 is 60000 Since the projected interest is greater than the taxable limit and su
132. allowance limit at the account level or the contract level i ORACLE 5 1 5 2 5 Maintaining Term Deposit Accounts Introduction You can define term deposit accounts for the customers of your bank through the Term Deposit Accounts Maintenance screen Each account that you define is identified with an term deposit account number The structure of the account number is based on the Account Mask you have maintained through the Account Parameters sub screen of the Bank wide Parameters screen For an account number you also need to define in this screen other parameters like the account class the term deposit currency in which transactions can be passed to this account the customer s number the customer s name and so on Every account created or modified in Oracle FLEXCUBE needs to be authorized to become effective Whenever a new customer account Is created or an existing record is modified the system generates a notification message on the record authorization This notification message can be sent to any external system if required Invoking TD account Screen You can open TD accounts using the Term Deposit Account Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDCUSTD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button TD Accounts Maintenance Web Page Dialog Pay In Option Branch Code Customer No Pay in by Term Deposit Account
133. ance Notice Preferences screen refer to the preceding section titled Maintaining Notice Preferences for Withdrawal For more details on the Account Class Maintenance Notice Preferences screen refer to the section Maintaining Notice Preferences in the chapter Maintaining Mandatory Information of this User Manual These Notice Accounts are linked to the Notice Period maintained at Account Class Customer Account level for the withdrawal of amount from the account The account holder should provide a notice of specified days months to the bank to withdraw an amount more than the Free Amount Once the notice period is crossed the notice becomes active and the customer can withdraw the noticed amount during the validity period of the notice For example if the Notice Period is 3 months then the customer should inform the Bank 3 months in advance about the amount the customer wants to withdraw from his account The noticed amount can be withdrawn at one go or in several installments within the notice validity period window After the validity period expires the status of the notice remains closed Sro Note the following The system deducts the advance interest from the credit Interest earned by the customer on his credit balance in the account If the customer does not withdraw his free amount during any month he is not allowed to carry forward the same in the subsequent month You have to maintai
134. ance The customer s current annual expenditure incurred on re payment of loans availed The customer s current annual expenditure incurred on payment of expenses other than rent insurance premium or loans The number of credit cards the customer has subscribed to The value in terms of money of this customer s house in case he owns one The Other Details Include The name of your customer s previous employer and the designation that the customer held in the previous job The customer s current designation and the full name of the customer s employer The complete mailing address of your customer s employer The telephone telex fax numbers and E mail address of your customer s current employer or business partner After having captured all the relevant details you can save the record You will be returned to the Personal Details section of the CIF Maintenance screen 2 20 ORACLE 2 2 9 Capturing Details Specific to Corporate Customer Click the Corporate Details tab from the Customer Maintenance screen to define the details of a Corporate or a Bank type of customer Customer Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer No Full Name Individual Short Name Corporate Branch Code Bank Main Auxiliary Personal Corporate Director Registration Address Description of Business Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Country Name National ID Incorporation Date Capital Net Worth Country Currnecy of Amounts Group MIS Joi
135. and Total Interest Payable Deposit Currency Currency of the TD account 12 6 ORACLE 12 4 Term Deposits Maturity Report You can generate reports for the Term Deposit accounts matured for a period for a customer To generate the report invoke Term Deposit Account Maturity Report screen This report displays the Term deposit accounts which are matured for the given period e TD Account Maturity Report Webpage Dialog Branch Code From Date To Date Account Class Customer Specify the following details From Date The From Date is greater than the current application date To Date The To Date is greater than the current application date Branch Code Specify the branch code from the list of values provided Account Class Specify the account class from the list of values provided Customer Specify the customer number from the list of values provided The generated report will contain the following elements Sl No Field Name Field Description Account No Deposit No TD account Number Date of Open TD account opened date 12 7 ORACLE Deposit Term TD Tenor Maturity Date Interest Start Date Total Interest Payable Interest Amount This will show simple interest amount which will be calculated using the Deposit Amount Deposit Term and Interest Rate This will be the projected value and this may not be equal to the actual interest amount Maturity Amount This will show the s
136. ank Apart from creating CIF records for each entity you need to maintain separate accounts for each customer The features of these two screens have been discussed in detail in the preceding sections While defining CIF records and Customer Accounts you would have noticed that many of the fields have option lists positioned next to them While some option lists contain pre defined values for some option lists to be populated you need to capture data through separate screens For instance while maintaining CIF records you need to associate each customer with a customer category For this purpose you will need to maintain customer categories before you begin to maintain CIF records Similarly each customer account needs to be associated with an account class Therefore you will need to maintain account classes before you start defining customer accounts All such screens have been documented in the subsequent sections 6 1 1 Maintaining Account Classes In the Oracle FLEXCUBE system you can classify the customer accounts of your bank into different groups and assign each an identifying code For instance you may define a group called INDSB to represent savings accounts held by individuals SB INS to comprise institutional savings accounts COR CU for corporate current accounts Each group is referred to as an Account Class and is maintained in the Account Class screen For each class you also define certain common attributes applicable t
137. ansaction Code Tax Refund Transaction Code Purging Details Retention Period Mext Purge On Mest Purge For Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized EEE Ey XI Checker Date Time a Open Specify the following details Tax Payable for recovery process Specify Tax Payable for recovery process to specify tax payable GL for recovery process and its related transaction code 5 117 ORACLE Tax Transaction Code Specify Tax Transaction Code EXAMPLE Liquidation Interest Booking date Interest rate frequency Maturity date amount CHO 2 00 000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 15 000 Liquidation schedule Liquidation amount deducted 31 Jul 08 NIL 31 Oct 08 NIL On 31 Jan 09 The total tax amount payable on 31 Jan 09 is 1500 The tax applicable on the current liquidation amount 5000 is 500 The tax applicable for the previous period 31 Jul 08 to 31 Oct 08 is 1000 will be marked for recovery The ICTXRBT batch is run to recover the tax amount from the tax recovery account Tax recovery process captures the TDS amount excluding surcharge surcharge amount and additional tax amount separately to display in the Form 16 TDS certificate TDS report and TDS inquiry screen Example Account details Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity Interest date rate frequency date amount CHo 4 00 000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 eure ORACLE Liquidation schedule TDS to be Liquidation amount deduc
138. apply You now have to specify the numeric values of all the UDEs that you identified for the interest rule The value that you specify here will be used to calculate interest for the account All the UDEs that you have identified for the rule to which the product is linked will be displayed here The UDEs that are displayed here can be of four types They are Credit Rate Debit Rate Amount Number The interest that you charge on a debit balance is an example of a debit rate The interest that you charge on a credit balance is an example of a credit rate A User Data Element will be an amount under the following circumstances In the case of a tier structure the upper and lower limit of a tier or a tier amount In the case of a charge when it is indicated as a flat amount Any amount that can be used in the definition of formula e When building an interest rule you may have indicated the UDE to be a number if the interest or charge is based on the number of transactions or the number of account statements A UDE under this category can also be used to store a numerical value that may be used in a formula Now for each of the UDEs that are displayed you must specify the values individually If the type of UDE that you have identified for the rule is a Rate element you can either specify a Rate Code or enter a value for the Rate element If you specify a Rate Code for the UDE the value that you have maintained for the
139. ar period amt 1 Apr 2008 to 30 Jun 2008 2008 91 09 100000 1 Oct 07 30 Jun 08 6005 48 days 1994 Scenario 2 If term deposit booking date is before the beginning of financial year and maturity date is after the financial year end then Interest accrued liquidated during the financial year will be considered for computing tax Example Total Interest earned accrued Taxable Taxable Booking Maturity No of Interest for the interest interest date date days rate financial year period amt ci ORACLE Total Interest earned accrued Taxable Taxable Booking Maturity No of Interest for the interest interest Fin Yr date date days rate financial year period amt 1 Apr 2008 to 31 Mar 2008 2009 365 09 100000 1 Oct 07 30 Jul 09 8 14663 01 days Scenario 3 If term deposit booking date and maturity date is within the financial year then Interest accrued Liquidated from booking date to maturity date will be considered for computing tax Example Total Interest earned accrued Taxable Taxable Booking Maturity No of Interest for the interest interest Fin Yr date date days rate financial year period amt 1 May 2008 to 31 Oct 2008 31 Oct 2008 184 09 100000 1 May 08 08 184 8 4032 88 days 4032 88 Scenario 4 If term deposit booking date is within the financial year and maturity date is after the financial year end then Interest accrued liquidated from booking date to financial
140. are defining special conditions you must specify the date from which you would like to apply interest Interest for this account will be calculated according to the special conditions that you define subsequently Charge Start Date For the account for which you are defining special conditions you must specify the date from which you would like to apply charges Charges for this account will be calculated according to the special conditions that you define subsequently 3 39 ORACLE By default charges on an account would be applied when the free banking period if any elapses This means that the Charge Start Date is arrived at by the System by adding the Free Banking Period days if any specified for the account class used by the account to the Account Opening Date If no Free Period has been indicated for the account class used by the account the Charge Start Date is defaulted to the Account Opening Date that is charges on the account would be applied right from the account opening date and displayed in the Special Conditions Maintenance screen You can override the default Charge Start Date and specify the desired start date for charge application Interest Booking Branch By default the customer s account in the current branch will be displayed in this screen in the Interest Charge Booking Account and Interest Charge Booking Branch fields However you have the option of booking interest charge to a different account belonging
141. arge entries if applicable at the transaction level Specifying Turnover Limit Preferences You can specify turnover limits for an account class and thereby monitor the turnover in all accounts linked to the account class Turnover Limit Code Specify a turnover limit code that should be linked to the account class The adjoining option list displays all valid turnover limit codes maintained in the system using the Turnover Limit Maintenance screen You can choose the appropriate one Specifying Liquidation Preferences for Debit Interest and Charges You must specify the liquidation preferences for debit interest and charges for those accounts classes where interest charge has to be debited from a Receivable GL before actually debiting the customer account This feature is applicable only for the debit interest and any charges on the account calculated through the IC module The preferences that you need to specify are e Liquidate Using Receivable Indicates whether receivable tracking is required for IC Debit interest and IC charges e Debit Notice enabling this option indicates that a notification needs to be sent to customers before debiting the customer account for the interest charge calculated for the period e Liquidation Days specifies the number of working days from the actual liquidation date before the interest charge can be liquidated into the customer account Working days are calculated on the basis of the
142. as 2 40 2 2 25 Maintaining Type of Relationships 000000nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnseseennnnnsssseenonssssseerenssssssssreessssssseeressssseeseee 2 41 2220 IRCUPLON SIN IS Or CUSTOMETS erasian EE E EE conn oe eee eed uaaeet 2 42 2 2 27 Maintaining Risk Category for Customers ceiisvcersescinsdecsancaanssuetetaleccubsaiesasdiaiacdebunoiesestelescevsetebasanedss 2 43 Zo I TNT IPI ee ONS US sete trsecosucaarses exe anet A ETTET A NEETER 2 44 2 3 1 Maintaining Types OF Relationships escris E EE a a 2 44 25 2 Maintaining Relationships between Customers cccccccccccseecccccccececnesessecceceeeeaaaeeseseeeeeeaaaaeseeeeseseaaaes 2 45 2 3 3 Mamluming Customer GI OUDS sissies e aA AAE aAA E EAS 2 48 2 3 4 Capui no CUS OMCr PEAS ayia r e E E A 2 50 2 3 5 Storing Authorized Variations Of CUSTOMET S NAME ccccccccccccssssecsccccceteneeesseseeeeecaaaeseeceesesaaasseeeeeeees 2 51 2 3 6 Maintaining Float Days for Outward Clearing Customer Transdctions cccccccccesseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 2 52 Zed LOC N O E arra a E E E E NEA 2 53 2 3 8 Maintaining Buyer wise ECGC Limits cccccccssccccccecsneeeccccceescceeaaeesccescaaeeeeesaaeesseesaaauseeesaaenseseeseaes 2 54 3 MAINTAINING CUSTOMER ACCOUNTS secieceesavcctectcccacescicctoecaveleceesecsatesteccavectatexaveiaczecteceterstsaseeseievetexecs 3 1 3 1 TTS T ON ce E some eee AEE E EE EE I EE EEE A EE E ences 3 1 3 1 1 Invoking Customer Accounts SCCM sccccccccccccseseeecseeeeee een eeeeeeeeeeeee ae eeeeeeeeeee
143. aturity date For the next financial year the customer will have to submit new form for tax waiver 5 57 ORACLE lf the interest on all the Term Deposit exceeds the tax exemption limit then waiver will not be considered and tax will be levied from the customer In case there is an amount deducted by way of TDS on the interest earned on term deposit prior to submission of application of exemption with the required documents it will not be refunded TAX_WAIVER SDE is populated with 0 if tax waiver is not submitted and 1 if tax waiver is submitted by customer This SDE is used to check whether customer has submitted any tax waiver instrument to claim tax exemption The SDE TAX_WAIVER_LIMIT is populated with the Waiver limit based on the gender of the linked TAX CIF ID Primary Customer The SDE TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR is populated with the sum of interest earned accrued projected on all the term deposits of the customer s grouped based on TAX CIF ID Primary customer and branch lf the interest paid accrued on all the term deposits of the customers grouped based on TAX CIF ID Primary Customer is greater than TDS limit then tax will be deducted on interest pay outs of all the term deposits of the customer s grouped based on TAX CIF ID 5 4 16 Viewing TDS Details You can enquire the tax details of a customer in the TDS for Deposit screen To invoke this screen type ICDINQRY in the
144. ays the account number of the Child TD The account number for the child term deposit is generated automatically 5 4 5 1 Capturing Interest Details Specify the following Calculation Account Select the calculation amount of the Child TD from the option list 5 24 ORACLE Interest Statement Check this box to generate an interest statement for the account The Interest Statement will furnish the values of the SDEs and UDEs and the interest rule that applies on the account Charge Booking Account Select the charge booking branch from the option list available You have an option of booking interest charge to a different account belonging to another branch The accounts maintained in the selected booking branch are available in the option list provided The system liquidates the Interest Charge into the selected account Interest Start Date Select the interest start date from the option list Charge Start Date Select the charge start date from the option list Interest Booking Branch Select the interest booking branch from the option list Dr Cr Advices Check this box to generate payment advices when interest liquidation happens on an account The advices are generated in the existing SWIFT or and MAIL format No advices will be generated if you leave this box unchecked Charge Booking Branch Select the charge booking branch from the option list available You have an option of booking interest charge to a different account
145. batch process when executed not only computes the provisioning amount it also records the current status of the account and checks whether the current status is different from the status that was prevalent when the process was previously executed If so the old provisioning amount is reversed if the Rebook Provision option has been set in the Status Details and the entries for the new provisioning amount are booked into the provisioning and write back GLs maintained for the current status in the Status Details If the Rebook Provision has not been set there is no reversal of the old provisioning amount and the differential provisioning entries are passed as usual into the GLs maintained for the new Status 6 18 ORACLE 6 1 13 Maintaining Auto Deposits Auto deposits are the linked deposit accounts to the savings accounts These accounts are created once the threshold balance exceeds in the customer accounts You can maintain these accounts using Auto Deposits screen Click the button Auto Deposit in the Account Class Maintenance screen to invoke it S Auto deposits Web Page Dialog Account Class Def Rate Code Transaction Code Def Rate Type fI Currency Sweep Mode Minimum Required Balance Break Method mci D Provide Interest On Broken T Break Deposits First Deposit You have to specify the following fields in this screen Account Class Specify the deposit type of account class for the auto deposit account
146. belonging to another branch The accounts maintained in the selected booking branch are available in the option list provided The system liquidates the Interest Charge into the selected account Product Code Specify the product code UDE Currency Specify the UDE Currency defined for the product Integrated LM Product Check this box to indicate the product is an Integrated LM product IL Product Type Specify the IL product type ORACLE Waive Charges Check this box to waive of a particular interest or charges that has been specified Generate UDE Change Advice Check this box to generate the UDE change advice Open Check this box to make the product applicable again More than one product may be applicable on an account class at the same time You can temporarily stop applying a product on an account class by closing it You can achieve this by un checking the box Open The product will cease to be applied on the account class Effective Date Specify the effective date of a record which is the date from which a record takes effect Open Specify the open records with different Effective Dates if the values of UDEs vary within the same liquidation period UDE ID Specify the UDE ID for the account UDE Value Specify the values for a UDE for different effective dates for an account When interest is calculated on a particular day for an account with special conditions applicable the value of the UDE
147. ber of years for the renewal of term deposit Note the following e On saving the tenor the system displays the Maturity Date e The system allows the Renewal of the term deposit for the tenor which is less than the maximum tenor maintained at the account class level 5 121 ORACLE Tax Refund Transaction code This transaction code is used for Tax refund process 5 4 27 1 Specifying Term Deposit Pay Out Details Specify the following Pay Out Option Select the pay out mode from the drop down list The options available are e Saving Account e GL e Bankers Check e Other bank Account e Term Deposit o For Dual Currency Deposits you are allowed to select only GL and Savings Account options as the pay out mode You can either select GL or Savings Account but not both Also you can select only one GL or one Savings account and not multiple GLs or accounts in either case Percentage Specify the amount of redemption in percentage Redemption Amount Specify the amount of redemption in absolute Offset Branch Specify the branch code of the account for redemption Offset Account Specify the account number GL for redemption Narrative Specify the description for the redemption 5 122 ORACLE 5 4 28 Tax Refund You can refund the tax deducted from the individual term deposit with Tax refund screen Y Tax Refund Webpage Dialog Dok Branch Refund Reference No Financial Year Total Refund
148. between the customer and the nominee Address 1 to 4 Specify the address of the nominee Minor Check the box if the nominee is minor Guardian Name Specify the name of a guardian for the minor nominee 5 7 ORACLE Relationship Specify the relation between the minor nominee and the guardian Address 1 to 4 Specify the address of the guardian 5 3 3 Deposit tab Click on Deposit tab to capture deposit related details TD Accounts Maintenance Web Page Dialog Main Nominee Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Interest Start Date Maturity Date Term Deposit Currency Term Deposit Amount Computed Amount Auto Rollover Close on Maturity Move Interest to Unclaimed Move Principal to Unclaimed Next Maturity Date Deposit Tenor Rollover Type Principal Principal Interest Special Amount Interest Rollover Amount Payin Details O Term Deposit Pay In Option Percentage Amount Offset Branch Offset Account Cheque Instrument No Clearing Type Cheque Date Mnemonic Code Draywee Account Interest Charges Linked Entities Restrictions Mis Statement Joint Holders Fields Account Signatory TD Payout Details FX Linkage Change Log Maker Checker Date Time Mod No MB Authorized Cancel Date Time E Open You need to capture the following details here Interest Start Date Specify the date from which the interest accruals of TD account begins Next Maturity Date On sele
149. breaks the maximum valued deposit account or the deposit account having the maximum balance in order of descending amount e MINB The system breaks the deposit account having minimum balance in order of ascending amount e FIFO The system breaks the deposit account in order of chronological account creation date e LIFO The system breaks the deposit account in order of reverse chronological account creation date the latest created deposit account breaks first Provide Interest On Broken Deposit Check this box to indicate the system to calculate interest on the deposits This is done when the attached account class is mapped to the IC product Break Deposits First Check this box to indicate the system to break the deposit accounts created and transfer the proceedings to the savings account The system breaks the deposits when the savings account does not have sufficient balance to withdraw the amount 6 20 ORACLE In this case the system breaks the auto deposit account and restores the savings account with balance to allow withdrawing the money Example The customer has the total balance in the account for 5675 including 650 as auto deposit He withdraws 5500 from an ATM As part of intraday batch DESWPBAT the system breaks the auto deposit account of 650 and restores the balance amount to savings So his current standings would be 175 in his savings account and he does not hold any auto deposit account 6 1 14 Main
150. cable Excess Employer Contributions Plan Remarks if any 11 4Charge Advice Reports This advice is sent to all customers on whom you are levying a charge as a result of the IRA Charge set up The system generates this advice automatically as part of the EOD processes on the day the charge liquidation takes place 11 4 1 Contents of the Report Apart from the header the following details are printed for the report Body of the Report Customer The CIF Number full Name and mailing address of the Information customer as recorded in the CIF Maintenance screen Charge Code The Code associated with the Charge for which you are charging the customer Charge Level Indicates the level at which charging is being done CIF Level or Plan level Plan Type The plan type involving the plan Charge Amount and The charge is always charged in the local currency of your Currency branch 11 3 ORACLE Customer The CIF Number full Name and mailing address of the Information customer as recorded in the CIF Maintenance screen Liquidation Date The date on which the charge amount was liquidated Debit Account The Branch Account Number and Currency of the account Information involved in the transaction 11 5IRS Form 5498 Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to generate Form 5498 for reporting contributions to IRA plans for any year to the Internal Revenue Service IRS You can generate this report for e Filing with IRS authorities
151. can store free format text scanned images etc about the customer whose details you are capturing You can store this information either as text documents or as plain text Through this you can capture user defined fields Through this screen you can capture the photograph of the customer whose details you are maintaining You will be allowed to access this screen only if you have the requisite access rights i e you may have rights to access the CIF screen but not view the photograph of the customer 2 25 ORACLE CLS Restrictions MT920 Domestic Professional Through this button you can view modify add define the liability details of a customer provided you have been assigned the necessary rights This button appears enabled only if the function Id LMTCURES has been added to your User Role If this Function Id has not been added to your User Role the button will appear disabled In case of a CLS participant you can capture CLS currency restrictions Through this screen you can specify MT920 preferences Through this screen you can capture domestic details of the customer Through this screen you can capture professional details of the customer In case of an issuer customer you can capture issuer details Through this screen you can view cards details of the customer 2 26 ORACLE 2 2 14 Viewing Debit Card Details Click Cards button to view details about debit cards is
152. ccount Number Debitor Category Risk Profile FT Accounting as of Individual Corporate Bank User Defined Fields 1 User Defined Fields 2 User Defined Fields 3 User Defined Fields 4 User Defined Fields 5 Group MIS Joint Standing Instructions Linked Entities Text Fields Image CLS Restrictions MT920 Domestic Professional Issuer Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No WB authorized a Open 2 11 ORACLE 2 2 4 1 Indicating whether AML Reporting is required As a CIF level parameter you can specify whether AML Reporting is required for the customer You can check the box positioned next to this field to indicate that AML reporting should be done for the customer whose details you are maintaining If you indicate that AML Reporting is required the code assigned to the customer whose details you are maintaining is defaulted to the Customer Group field since the system recognizes each customer code as a customer group You can choose to either categorize the customer under the same group or choose another customer group If you leave the box unchecked the system will suppress the generation of AML reports for the customer 2 2 4 2 Specifying Utility Provider Details Utility Providers are the recipients of the bill payment Typical entities involved in a bill payment transaction are the consumer your bank and the institutions utility providers If the customer whose details you are maintai
153. ce screen Z User Defined Fields Web Page Dialog UDF Details IE Field Name Value 3 1 24 Specifying Deposits Instructions You can capture details of the deposit account using the Deposits Instruction screen To invoke this screen click the Deposits Instruction button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 4 Deposits Instruction Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Number 100002 Account Class SNSAV Customer 1111118 Cey USD Sweep Branch Deposit Currency Sweep To Account Amount Amount Block Number Tenor Sweep Multiple Of Minimum Required Balance Source Code External Reference Number Retry Till Date Start Date 3 52 ORACLE Here you can capture the following details Account Number Specify the account number of the customer Select the account number from the adjoining option list Account Class This is the account class to which the account is linked Customer The customer for whom you are maintaining the deposit instructions Sweep Branch Indicate the branch to which the sweep is carried out Sweep To Account Indicate the account to which the sweep is carried out Amount This is the deposit amount Minimum Required Balance The minimum balance indicates that only the amounts above this limit will be used for auto creating deposits Source Code The code assigned for the sweep External Reference Number Branch The branch code of the branch w
154. cessing at the Group CIF level as part of your branch preferences oe ORACLE Since The date on which the status of the account is changed to the current status is displayed here Propagate Reporting Details This field indicates whether the reporting lines defined for status movement for the account class that this account reports to must also be applicable to it The following GL s are defined in the Account Class Maintenance for posting account balances when a status movement occurs on any accounts belonging to the account class e The Debit and Credit GL s to which account balances must be posted for movement to each status e The Central Bank Reporting Debit and Credit GL s e Head Office Reporting Debit and Credit GL s When you select this option the GL s maintained for the account class will be applicable to the Customer account you are defining in this screen The reporting lines will be propagated to the account whenever a status change occurs If you do not want the account class details to be propagated to the account as well you have the option of maintaining the status codes and the reporting lines exclusively for an account You can achieve this through the Status Details screen Click the Account Status button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen to invoke it Account Derived Status The system displays the current status of the account here This is applicable for CASA accounts curren
155. ch the credit amount is limited to a part of the available line amount Temporary OD End The date on which the temporary overdraft limit ceases to be effective 10 2 ORACLE Temporary OD Limit The maximum overdraft allowed on an account for a specified period of time Temporary OD Start The date on and following which the temporary overdraft limit comes into effect Tenure The duration for which a customer has been in professional employment This information is captured as part of the professional details for a customer Uncollected Funds Limit On any given business day the credit transaction amounts that have not been collected Unposted Credits In a multi branch or online activity such as tele banking or Internet banking transactions that are posted into an account when the system is either not available or during End of Day run are stored to be posted into the system when the system is available Credit transactions of this nature are classified as unposted credits Unposted Debits In a multi branch or online activity such as tele banking or Internet banking transactions that are posted into an account when the system is either not available or during End of Day run are stored to be posted into the system when the system is available Debit transactions of this nature are classified as unposted debits W 8BEN Form The W 8BEN form entitled Certificate of Foreign Status of Beneficial Owner for United States
156. claimed T Recurring Deposit Account Principal Liquidation Account Next Maturity Date Deposit Tenor Rollover Details Rollover Amount Offset Account Term Deposit Amount Installment Frequency Days Months Years Principal Principal interest Special Amount I Move funds on Overdraft The information that you need to capture in this screen is as follows e Principal Liquidation Branch the code assigned to the branch in which the recurring deposit account resides e Principal Liquidation Account The number of the account for which you are performing liquidation e Interest Start Date the interest accrual start date is displayed in this field e Maturity Date the Maturity Date of the recurring deposit e Default Tenor the default tenor of the deposit e Next Maturity Date if the liquidation of the RD is to create a fresh recurring deposit then specify the maturity date of the new RD e The Rollover Details if you indicate that Auto Rollover is required for the RD you have to specify the following gt Whether the deposit has to be rolled over with Principal and accumulated interest gt Whether the amount involved is a special amount or gt Whether only the principal is to be rolled over 5 138 ORACLE e The Other Preferences which include gt Whether the account is to be closed when the RD reaches its maturity date gt Whether the maturity proceeds should move t
157. corresponding to the date will be picked up Rate Code Specify the rate code for the account 5 26 ORACLE 5 4 5 2 Capturing Details for Deposit To capture the deposit details click on the Deposit tab Term Deposit Interest Web Page Dialog Account Details Interest Deposit Maturity Date Next Maturity Date Deposit Tenor C Auto Rollover Rollover Type Principal C Close on Maturity Principal interest C Move Interest to Unclaimed Special Amount C Move Principal to Unclaimed Interest Rollover Amount oe A Term Deposit Payout Details CO Payout Type Percentage Offset Branch Account Number Narrative Payout Parameters You need to capture the following details here Maturity Date The system defaults the maturity dates from the default tenor from the account class However you can modify this date On this date the term deposit account gets Next Maturity Date On selecting the rollover for the TD account the system defaults the next maturity date from the previous tenor of the deposit Deposit Tenor The system calculates the tenor of the deposit account to the difference between Interest start date and Maturity date and displays it In case of change in maturity date the system changes the value of this field Auto Rollover Check this box to automatically rollover the deposit you are maintaining You have to indicate Rollover Type on selecting this option 5 27
158. count during liquidation In other words the system will track the account for receivables credits As and when a credit happens the funds will be allocated to the loan or the retail teller contract for liquidation e Posting Allowed if checked indicates that the account class being created is to be used while creating IRA monetary accounts Monetary accounts used for IRA need to be distinguished from the other accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE so that these accounts do not come up for posting in the other Oracle FLEXCUBE screens e Referral Required enabling this option indicates whether a referral check should be performed on accounts belonging to the account class Consequently the system checks the available balance not the current balance while performing the referral checks for all transactions involving the account If a transaction involving the account results in the account moving to overdraft the account and transaction details will be sent to the Referral Queue 6 11 ORACLE e Lodgment Book If you wish to allow orders of lodgment books for all accounts that use an account class you can indicate so in the Account Class Maintenance screen by selecting the Lodgment Book option e Back Period Entry Allowed if checked indicates that back valued entries can be posted to account belonging to the class as long as the account is open You will be allowed to change this specification for a specific account While pos
159. count only when there has been a movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred out of the account For instance let us assume that on the August 21 2001 you have set the account statement generation frequency as Daily for the account LI020804 On September 5 2001 there has been no movement of funds in the particular account If you have opted for the Generate Only on Movement option the system will not generate a statement message for September 5 2001 If you choose not to enable this option account statements will be generated regardless of whether there has been a movement of funds or not 3 32 ORACLE Tertiary A c Statement This refers to the type of statement to be generated periodically by the system for this account You can specify whether you want a detailed or summary statement or if you do not want a statement for this account at all Cycle You can specify the frequency for generating the account statements To specify the frequency of the statements click on the adjoining drop down list The following list is displayed Annual Semi annual Quarterly Monthly Fortnightly Weekly Daily On For a weekly statement you specify the day of the week on which account statements should be generated and for fortnightly and monthly statements the dates of the month To specify for weekly statements click on the adjoining drop down list The following list of days will be displayed Monday Tuesday
160. creen You must specify an appropriate classification code and description You can invoke this screen by typing STDCCMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Customer Classification Maintenance Web Page Dialog Cust Classification Description Input By Date Time Modification Number a Open Authorized By Date Time a Authorized For instance you could set up the following classifications e Good for customers with no bad loans and no accounts with outstanding overdrafts e Unstable for customers with a few bad loans and accounts with outstanding overdrafts e Not Good for customers with many bad loans and accounts with outstanding overdrafts e Deteriorate for customers with mostly bad loans and accounts with outstanding overdrafts e Bad for customers with only bad loans and accounts with outstanding overdrafts 8 3 ORACLE Customer Classification When you specify CIF details for a customer in the Customer Information Maintenance screen you can also specify the appropriate classification for the customer Description Enter a description for the classification 8 1 4 Setting up Exposure Categories You can maintain the different categories under which you wish to track total exposure due to loans issued to customers in customer groups or CIF s as well as due to total overdraft in accounts belonging to customer groups or CIF
161. ctecrscnicosvacwenstveregsadestidinaaieincdeacesied unosiredendush deectanoonecnentosuatowedeadiatidcactemetenanisesewsacie 5 14 JA SPECIFYING TD PAYOUT DETAILS rere caeteaenst cence tata gee n n em tedoocec tance E a a E E e 5 16 5 4 1 Tom PO TOT aeie EEE E EEEE E E T EAE ETENE 5 17 5 4 2 Banker s Chen ODIAD sisii iieiaei E NENEN AENA EA OE 5 18 ORACLE 6 1 5 4 3 g Oa is s eeentere nrc terre E cr rinse coer cererer ry ere et err ere ter reve rererrerer Terr ceri nee t rterer tener tere tt ere 5 19 5 4 4 Linking FX Transactions ooccccccccccccccccccccssseeesseecceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseeeeeeeeeeaaaaaseseeeeeeaaaes 5 21 5 4 5 Specifying Child TD Details cccccccccscccccccccccccesscccccceeeeesseseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeaaaaaseeeeeeesaaaaeeesseeeeeas 5 24 5 4 6 Capturing Pay Out Parameters Details cccccccccsecccccccccecnneeseeceeeecaaeeseeeceeeeaaeeeseeeeeesaaaaseeeeeeseaaaeees 5 30 5 4 7 Maintaining Time Deposit ACCOUN S eeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnsssennssseennssseersssserossssersssseersssseerssssseeeossseressseeens 5 38 5 4 8 Maintaining Interest Conditions and Other Parameters fOr ACCOUNL csccccccecccceeeeneeeseeceeeeennaeees 5 40 5 4 9 Maintaining TD Paying Parameters for ACCOUNt ccccccccsseecccccceeee nn eeeseseeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaasseeeeeeeeaaaaees 5 44 5 4 10 Maintaining Cluster Deposit Details ooooo0o0nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnesssssssssssessseeeereessssssssssssseeeereeresssssess 5 44 5
162. cting the rollover for the TD account the system defaults the next maturity date from the previous tenor of the deposit Example If account opening date is 1st Jan and maturity date is 15th Feb then next maturity date is 31st march 15th Feb plus the previous tenor i e 45 days 5 8 ORACLE Maturity Date The system defaults the maturity date from the default tenor from the account class However you can modify this date Deposit Tenor The system calculates the tenor of the deposit account to the difference between Interest start date and Maturity date and displays it In case of change in maturity date the system changes the value of this field Auto Rollover Check this box to automatically rollover the deposit you are maintaining You have to indicate Rollover Type on selecting this option Close on Maturity Check this box to close the term deposit account on maturity date and transfer the amount to the principal liquidation account If you select this option the principal liquidation account should be an account other than the term deposit account Move Interest to Unclaimed Check this box to move the interest amount to the unclaimed GL mapped at the IC product in the accounting roles on maturity date of the term deposit account If you select this option the principal liquidation account should be the term deposit account Move Principal to Unclaimed Check this box to move the principal amount to the unc
163. d Product Details iof 1 Product Code C yia hee Interest UDE Currency GBP Generate UDE Change Advice ad Open qof Effective Date aj Effective Date 2003 06 27 EE UDE Values C User Defined Element ID UDE Value Rate Code TAX_RATE EE Ofm IH Interest Booking Account You can select the accounts for booking interests on transactions processed at your bank 3 38 ORACLE At the time of creating an IC product if you have maintained the booking account type as Interest in the Interest and Charges Product Definition screen the Interest will be liquidated into the Interest Booking account By default the customer s account in the current branch will be displayed in this screen in the Interest Booking Account field However you have the option of booking interest to a different account belonging to another branch also The accounts maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the adjoining option list You can select the appropriate account Interest will then be liquidated into the selected account Charge Booking Account You can select the accounts for booking charges on transactions processed at your bank At the time of creating an IC product if you have maintained the booking account type as Charge in the Interest and Charges Product Definition screen the charge will be liquidated into the Charge Booking account By default the customer s acc
164. d be qualified by a currency The amount for the corresponding account currency will be defaulted from here while opening the account Minimum Credit Amount and Currency Specify the minimum transaction amount for the credit transaction which is eligible for reporting in the interim statement This amount should be qualified by a currency The amount for the corresponding account currency will be defaulted from here while opening the account Generate Balance To indicate that accounts under certain account classes are to be considered for generation of their balance messages check this box The valid values for this action are Y and N Of Select the mode of message for balance generation form the option list Report Transaction Since This is a list of all the transactions the accounts under a class have undergone in the interval of balance messages generated for the accounts under the respective classes You can choose the appropriate values applicable e Previous MT940 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 940 in the current balance report e Previous MT941 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 941 in the current balance report e Previous MT950 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 950 in the current balance report 6 29 ORACLE You can synchronize the time instance by hours for
165. d for a credit account and transaction code that is used for a new transaction that debits the Sweep in Account and Credits the Credit Account To capture the Sweep in Accounts for a Credit Account invoke the Online Sweep in Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing ACDSWPON in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 2 Online Sweepln Maintainance Webpage Dialog Credit Branch CHO Transaction Code 000 E Credit Account 00012ZUSD03 Sweep Account Details 7 Debit Branch Debit Account cHo 3 joooosuspo1 Liicho 48 ooo0suspo2 Date Time Mod No Wi Authorized Cancel ve ri Cancel Date Time B open You need to capture the following details here Credit Branch Specify the branch of the transacting account Credit Account Specify the transacting account The system lists all the Open and Authorized Customer Accounts except the Deposit Type of Accounts Transaction Code Select the transaction code from the adjoining option list The system lists all Authorized and Open Transaction Codes with Available Balance Check required is Yes 3 80 ORACLE Debit Branch Specify the Sweep In Account Branch Debit Account Specify the Sweep in Account Number The system lists only Authorized Non TD Accounts Customer Accounts of same currency and Credit Account While saving the system performs the
166. d to the screen from where you invoked the authorization function Remember that you cannot authorize an event that you have input Only another user who has the requisite rights can authorize the event To exit click Exit icon You will return to the Application Browser 2 2 22 Maintaining Customer Groups To track your credit exposure to a group of customers you should e Create Customer Groups and assign credit limits to it e Associate a customer with a group _ ORACLE 2 2 23 Maintaining Limits for Customer Group You can maintain Customer Groups and set up credit limits in the Customer Group Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDGROUPFP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Customer Group Maintenance Web Page Dialog Group ID BANK Group Name BANKING INSTITUTIONS Limit Currency USD Limit Amount Input By SUNDAR Date Time 7 3 2000 12 32 44 Modification Number 2 E Open Authorized By SUNDAR Date Time 7 3 2000 12 32 44 E Authorized Group ID You can assign a unique identification code to each customer group that you create You can also enter the detailed name of the group In the subsequent fields you can set up credit limits for the group While setting up a customer you can indicate the group to which the customer is associated It is important to note that in Oracle FLEXCUBE a customer group is different fro
167. dation cycles On 31 Jul 08 TDS amount TAX PAY 3000 Additional TDS amount On 31 Oct 08 TDS _ amount TAX_PAY 3000 Additional TDS amount On 31 Jan 09 0 84 ORACLE TDS amount CUSTOMER 3000 CR TAX_PAY 3000 Additional TDS amount CUSTOMER CR TAX_PAY The following SDE values is populated for the above Account no AC0001 31 Jul 08 90000 20000 TAX TDS SURC SURC ADL_T _RA LIMIT HG LI HGR AX RA TE MIT ATE TE2 10000 100000 be 31 Oct 90000 20000 10 10000 100000 10 08 90000 20000 10 10000 100000 09 1 INTF YEA TAX TDS SURC SURC F OR PE RE _RA LIMIT HG_LI HGR OR Y RIOD ND TE MIT ATE 31 Jul 08 90000 10000 10000 100000 10 31 Oct 90000 10000 10 10000 100000 10 08 90000 10000 10000 100000 09 5 85 ORACLE 5 4 23 2 Processing Tax computation during Liquidation projected interest greater than surcharge limit Example The following table gives the account details Interest Booking Interest Liquidation amount for date rate frequency Maturity date financial year ACO001 800000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 60000 AC0002 400000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 30000 The following table fives the liquidation schedule Liquidation Total Surcharge Additional amount interest to be TDS to be earned deducted deducted deducted 10 31 Jul 08 A0001 20000 30000 A0002 10000 31 Oct 08 A
168. debit and credit turnover and the interest details The turnover limit details of an account include the current financial period currency utilized and unutilized limit balances Click Amounts and dates button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Amounts And Dates Webpage Dialog Branch Code CHO Account Number CHO00038901 Opening USD Opening Daily TurnOver Dr Daily TurnOver Cr Daily TurnOver Dr Debit Dr Daily TurnOver Cr Credit Cr Current Achy Current Lacy Uncollected Accrued Dr Accrued Cr Withdrawal Uncollected Funds i Interest Due Charge Due Blocked Previous Date Receivable Debit Available Credit DR Activity Unutilized Amount CR Activity ilable Provision Amount Unposted Debit Dr Credit Cr linenlleerted Turnover Change Log 3 1 3 1 Viewing Total Available Balance Details The total available balance displayed by the system includes the initial funding amount and unutilized line amount in case the customer enjoys an OD limit Example The customer account has a line with an amount of USD 50 000 linked to it Case Account has a Credit balance of USD 1000 Total unutilized line amount is USD 50 000 Your bank would like to see USD 51 000 The total available balance is displayed as 3 11 ORACLE o Unutilized Line amount USD 50000 e Total available balance USD 51 000 Case Il e Account has a Debit balance of USD 2000 e Total unutilized l
169. deposit while maintaining the deposit account in the Details for Deposit Type Account screen Close on Maturity Deposit accounts opened under an account class can be closed automatically on the Maturity Date of the deposit You can specify this for the account class you are maintaining by choosing the Close on Maturity option If you choose the Close on Maturity option during the Beginning of Day operations on the Maturity Date the account will be closed The principal will be moved if specified to the account your customer has directed If the deposit remains unclaimed you can opt to move the principal and interest to the respective Unclaimed GLs maintained at your bank o If you choose the Auto Rollover and Close on Maturity options the Auto Rollover option takes precedence In other words choosing the Close on Maturity option and the Auto Rollover option is redundant Your specifications here will default to all deposit accounts opened under the account class However when maintaining a deposit account you can change the specifications that default 6 50 ORACLE Cluster ID Specify a valid cluster ID you need to link to deposit account class You can link cluster ID only for term deposits Tax Details Limit Specify tax details limit appropriate to deposit account class Tax Details Limit Currency Specify a valid currency for the specified tax details limit from the adjoining option list Mandatory Ta
170. dered for exclusion Your specification for this at the account class level defaults to all accounts involving the class You can change it for a specific account For comparing transactions the System will look for similarity of reference number and date Consolidation for Inward Clearing You need to indicate whether or not consolidation is required for inward clearing transactions in a batch at the Account Class level The indication for this option is carried forward to the Customer Account Maintenance screen If this option is unchecked here it cannot be checked in the Customer Account Maintenance screen 6 1 6 1 Processing for Consolidation of Inward Clearing During the Inward Clearing process the consolidated entry for clearing will be passed according to the following grouping Remitter s Account Clearing Product Instrument Currency Remitter s branch End point A consolidated clearing entry will be passed using a separate Transaction Code maintained in the Clearing Product Preferences screen This Transaction Code should be set with Cheque Mandatory option as No in the Transaction Code Maintenance screen 6 13 ORACLE 6 1 7 One consolidated clearing entry will be passed for each of the above groups Entries will be passed against a common reference no generated for each of the groups After the consolidated entry has been passed each individual instrument will be processed separately to pass ch
171. description of the additional tax rate 5 53 ORACLE Additional Tax Rate 2 Specify the additional tax rate like surcharge education cess that are used to compute tax amount Description Specify a brief description of the additional tax rate TDS Limit Specify the limit up to which tax will be excempted Surcharge Limit Specify the limit up to which surcharge will be exempted You can perform the following operations in this screen e New e Amend e Delete you can delete the record before first authorization e Open e Close e Re open An SDE TDS _LIMIT is populated with the TDS limit value maintained in the above screen An SDE TAX_RATE is populated with tax rate additional rate1 additional rate2 maintained in the above screen Example The primary tax rate for individual is 10 Additional tax rate towards educational cess is 3 Additional tax rate towards surcharge is 1 You can compute the total tax rate as follows 10 10 3 100 10 1 100 10 4 The SDE TAX_RATE will have the computed value 10 4 An SDE SURCHG_LIMIT is populated with the surcharge limit value maintained in the above screen An SDE SURCHG_RATE is populated with Additional Tax rate1 Surcharge maintained in the above screen 5 54 ORACLE An SDE ADL_TAX_RATE2 is populated with Additional Tax rate2 maintained in the above screen 5 4 14 Maintaining Waiver Types You can maintain tax waiver based on the type of form 15G 15H 15A
172. draft option as a preference while defining Outgoing Payments or Incoming Collection products the transactions involving the products will be processed regardless of the overdraft status Else such transactions will be sent to the Credit Exception queue and to the Referral queue as well Upon Accepting or Rejecting a transaction in the Referral Queue these transactions are processed in the same manner as any other transaction in the Credit Exception queue For further details refer to the processing transactions in the Credit Exception Queue refer to the Processing Credit Exceptions section in the Processing a Payment or Collection Transaction chapter of the Payment and Collections manual 7 1 1 8 Clearing CG Transactions If the fund available in the customer account are insufficient the clearing transaction is processed i e the relevant accounting entries are passed and the transaction is sent to the Referral Queue If the transaction is rejected the entries are reversed The status of the transaction is updated to Dishonored in the clearing log In case the transaction is accepted no processing Is required apart from updating the charge counter If the account goes into overdraft all processed transactions for the day with transaction code marked for referral are moved to the Referral Queue However transactions which have already been accepted will not be marked for referral again If a transaction is to be marked for refer
173. dress Vendor Address Vendor Address3 Vendor Address4 Blacklisted Information D vendor is Blacklisted Reasons for Blacklisting Stock Details ls vendor a Inventory Supplier Stock Details E Stock Catalog Code Stock Catalog Description no Oo Fields Input By Dou Date Time Modification Humber El Authorized Authorized By Date Time Open In this screen you can maintain the following details for a Vendor Vendor Code Specify the vendor code here to uniquely identify the vendor Is Vendor a Customer Check this box to indicate that the vendor is a customer of the bank Short and Long Descriptions You may provide short brief and long detailed descriptions of the vendor whose details are being maintained here Vendor Address 1 4 Enter the address of the vendor here 6 55 ORACLE Country Specify using the adjoining list the country from which the vendor operates Phone and Fax Enter here the phone and fax numbers of the vendor Blacklisted Information If the vendor is a blacklisted vendor then check the Vendor is Blacklisted box Additionally specify the Reasons for Blacklisting Once a vendor is recorded as blacklisted you cannot enter into contracts with them This guards against accidentally entering into unviable contracts Stock Details Under the Stock Details section you can specify whether the vendor is an inventory supplier or not If the vendor is an invento
174. e 3 1 3 4 Viewing Turnover Amounts In the Customer Account Turnover Amounts screen you can view the total turnover of this customer account from the first date of this month to the current day s system date Also you can view the accumulated interest associated with debit or credit transactions after the last liquidation To view the turnovers for the account click the Turnover button The Customer Accounts Turnover Amounts screen is displayed e ORACLE lt Turn Over Web Page Dialog After maintaining the required details you can return to the Amounts and dates screen 3 1 4 Capturing Auxiliary Details Click on the Auxiliary tab to invoke the following screen E Customer Accounts Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Number Customer Account Class Account Currency Main Auxiliary Positive Pay Stale Days Provisioning Details T Auto Provisioning Required Deferred Reconciliation Exposure Category z T Funding Risk Free Exposure Branch EH Ane Provisioning Currency Into EH Account T Mod 9 Validation Required Local Validation Digit x Provisioning Percentage T Positive Pay ATM Details Cheque Book Preferences Cheque Book Name 1 Daily Amount Limit Cheque Book Name 2 Daily count Limit T Auto Reorder of Cheque Account Number Book Reorder Level Options Reorder Number Of Leave T Euro Cheques I AN Raeu tired BIC Deposits Instruction
175. e Overdue Interest RFC Risk free Collateral RV Recoverable Value PP Provisioning Percentage The recoverable value could be computed by applying the discount percentage to the balance expected cash flow as shown Loss 100 100 The resultant amount could be discounted using the overdraft interest rate For loans in status LOSS the recoverable value is zero An example for the provision amount calculation for accounts in impairment loss For an account in respect of which the balance value of exposure is BGN 700 and the balance overdue interest is BGN 100 the outstanding overdraft amount 700 100 BGN 800 If the account is in WATCH status the applicable discount or loss percentage for the account is 25 Therefore the recoverable value of the exposure 800 800 25 BGN 600 If the risk free collateral is BGN 100 the provision amount 800 600 100 100 Retail Customers with Exposure Less than BGN 5000 The expression used for this category could be PA OD RFC x PP where PA Provisioning Amount OD Outstanding Overdraft Amount Principal Overdue Interest RFC Risk free Collateral PP Provisioning Percentage 8 14 ORACLE The provisioning percentage could be computed as shown Status Provisioning Percentage The provisioning would be done for individual accounts as shown above 8 1 7 3 Specifying Rebooking Provision Entries In the Status Details function
176. e TD account the exchange rate for that day is compared with one captured in this screen and the currency in which the deposit is settled on maturity is also decided Yield Enhancement Specify the additional percentage of yield that the customer receives for agreeing to the currency Option Inception Fair Value Specify the market value of the option contract at inception This option is defaulted from the Linked Option Contract 5 35 ORACLE The options mentioned above cannot be modified after the first authorization On saving a Dual Currency Deposit account system validates the following conditions if the Linked Currency is specified e Auto Rollover is unchecked e Close on Maturity is checked e Move Interest to Unclaimed is unchecked e Move principal to Unclaimed is unchecked e Incase of Dual Currency Deposits for the Payout option you can select only the Transfer to Savings Account option System gives an error if some other Payout options are selected Also for Transfer to Saving Account you can select only one account System gives an error if multiple accounts are selected Following are the options for Payout Options e Transfer to GL GL e Transfer to Savings Account AC o An error is thrown if any other options are selected The system does not allow both Transfer to GL and Transfer to Savings account to be selected simultaneously For e g Transfer to GL with 50
177. e accounts for which the account class is being defined This would be used for tracking NPA s on current and savings accounts 7 Maintaining status wise GLs for provisioning 8 Identifying the reporting lines GL Line Central Bank Lines and the Head Office Lines for each status 6 2 ORACLE 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Maintaining account statement details like the type of statement that is to be generated the frequency at which statements should be generated for all accounts under a class Indicating the preferences unique to an account class like the check book passbook or ATM facilities to be given to account holders under this account class whether overdraft facility should be allowed for accounts linked to this class whether the credit limit should be checked for all accounts under the class interest and charges to be computed for accounts under this class Specifying preferences regarding account holder facilities interest computation etc Indicating whether status change for all accounts belonging to the account class should be automatic or manual Identifying and assigning preferred branches currencies and customers to the account class Specifying whether receivables should be tracked for the account class This specification will default to all accounts that are linked to this account class Specifying whether reordering of Cheque Books for all accounts linked to this account class sho
178. e box Open The product will cease to be applied on the account class You can make the product applicable again by checking the Open box Effective Date The Effective Date of a record is the date from which a record takes effect You can maintain different values for a UDE for different effective dates for an account When interest is calculated on a particular day for an account with special conditions applicable the value of the UDE corresponding to the date will be picked up Typically you would want to open records with different Effective Dates if the values of UDEs vary within the same liquidation period 3 1 18 Specifying Charge Details You can capture details of charges for the account using the Account level charges conditions screen To invoke this screen click the Charge button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 43 ORACLE SAccoun dey corprecontitions rtre per Product Deals Branch The Branch Code to which the account belongs for which you are defining special conditions is displayed in this field Account The Account number of customer for which you are defining special conditions is displayed in this field o You can click the Default button to default the Charge Products and the corresponding details applicable for the account You can then modify these values to define the special conditions 3 1 18 1 Specifying Product Details Specify the
179. e following parameters here Cluster Identification Specify a Cluster ID to uniquely identify a cluster This ID is used to associate a cluster with a product or a specific deposit Description Specify a description for each cluster that you define This will be displayed when you specify the cluster while defining a product or a contract Cluster Details You can maintain the following cluster details here Currency Specify a valid currency for each cluster that you define Minimum Booking Amount Specify minimum amount you need to book a deposit in the cluster 5 45 ORACLE Booking amount should be greater than or equal to minimum booking amount Booking Unit Specify unit for booking a deposit in the cluster This unit should be e A positive number e Awhole number without decimal points e Once you specify the size of the cluster the following should be in multiples of this unit for a cluster deposit specified with this cluster e The contract principal e Principal schedules of the contract e Any increase in principal after the contract has been initiated e The principal payment amount e Deposit amount e Minimal booking amount Sron Cluster deposits cannot be amortized Withdrawal Unit Specify unit for premature withdrawal of amount from a Principal amount Withdrawal amount before maturity is a multiple of the withdrawal unit 5 4 11 Redeeming Term Deposits The redemption option enables you to redee
180. e have to be provided A Term Deposit Web Page Dialog Term Deposit Bankers Cheque PC Branch Code Account Class Account Mo hal Customer Number Account Currency Account Chass Interest The following details are captured here 5 4 29 1 Specifying Term Deposit Details Branch Code The system defaults the branch code Account Number Specify the account number Customer Number The system defaults the customer number Currency The system defaults the currency 5 126 ORACLE TD Amount Specify the TD amount Default From Select the Default From option to default the details from either the parent account TD account or account class The options available are e Account e Account Class Account Class Specify the account class If you have selected the Default From as Account Class then you have to specify the Account Class mandatorily Else you can leave it blank If you select the Default From as Account then on clicking of P button the system defaults the interest and deposit details from the parent TD account Or if you select the Default From as Account Class then on clicking of P button the system defaults the interest and deposit details from the account class selected 5 127 ORACLE 5 4 29 2 Specifying Bankers Cheque Details To capture the details for pay out through Bankers Cheque click on the Bankers Cheque tab A Term Deposit Web Page
181. e is linked as an advice for the event and the individual transaction tax certificate is required to be generated for the customer For income other than through interest on customer accounts the advice format for the tax certificate can be maintained depending on the requirement This advice format can be linked to the products For income through interest on customer accounts the advice format for the tax certificate is pre shipped The format of the advice can be modified except for the name of the advice format which is pre shipped 2 2 4 9 Maintaining Tags for Advice Generation The following tags will be available for advice generation for individual transaction _ TXNNUMBER The contract Alphanumeric 16 characters reference number CALCDATE The tax calculation date COMPCCY The interest Alphanumeric 3 characters component currency TAXCCY The tax currency Alphanumeric 3 characters TAXAMTINTAXCCY The tax amount in tax Number currency INTERESTAMT The interest amount Number basis amount on which the tax has been calculated vs ORACLE 2 2 5 Specifying when Accounting is done for Funds Transfers Specify the following FT Accounting As of For funds transfer contracts involving certain customers you may need to generate messages on the booking date of the contract while the actual accounting may be deferred to the debit value date This facility could be required in respect of future dated funds transfers i
182. e specified Grace period for Renewal option for the account e Whether redemption is by Bank Cheque Savings or GL e The tenor for the TD This is indicated in terms of Days Months and Years Based on the tenor the system calculates the maturity date e Whether the Redemption mode is Full Redemption or Partial Redemption e The date on which the TD matures e The amount for redemption In case you have opted for partial redemption and do not specify the amount here the system will consider the full amount for redemption e Whether you want to waive the penalty for redeeming the TD You cannot however waive penalty for TD specified for automatic redemption The system will validate for the following 5 47 ORACLE During partial redemption the withdrawal amount should be a multiple of withdrawal unit maintained at the Deposit Cluster Maintenance level else the system will display the following error message Withdrawal amount must be multiples of withdrawal unit Withdrawal amount should be greater than minimum booking amount maintained at the Deposit Cluster Maintenance level else the system will display the following error message Withdrawal exceeds minimum balance level Term Deposit Pay Out Details Term deposit payout can be made to GL Bankers Cheque and Savings Account Specify the following payout details Pay Out Option Select the payout option from the drop down list You have the following options
183. e to maintain the same status codes for BC and CL products at the product level The system assigns the status to all the authorized BC CL contracts or accounts linked to the customer While saving the details the system moves the statuses of all the CL and BC contracts of the customer to the new status selected For more information on maintenance of auto status change at CL and BC contracts refer Account Creation chapter under Retail Lending User Manual and Processing Bills under Bills and Collection User Manual respectively 2 3 8 3 Viewing Customer Level Status Change Summary Details You can view the summary details of Customer Level Status Change in Customer Level Status Change Summary screen You can invoke the screen by typing CSSCSTCH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 2 58 ORACLE Customer Level Status Change Summary Web Page Dialog SELH Transaction Ref Number Customer Mew Status 5 Auth Status Run Date S J Search Advanced Search Reset Records per page LOCK 1 of 1 Transaction Ret Number Customer Mev Status Auth Status Record Status Input By Auth By Run Date In this screen you can query based on any combination of the following fields Transaction Reference Number New Status Run Date Customer Auth Status After specifying the parameters for the query click Search The system d
184. eck this box Relationship Pricing Select this checkbox to indicate that the customer is eligible for relationship pricing This checkbox will be unselected by default ORACLE For more details on relationship pricing refer Customer Relationship Pricing chapter in Core Services user manual 2 2 2 1 Specifying Geographical Details As part of specifying the Geographical details of the Customer you have to capture the following details Language As part of maintaining customer accounts and transacting on behalf of your customer you will need to send periodic updates to your customers in the form of advices statement of accounts and so on You have to indicate the language in which your customer wants the statements and advices to be generated English is defaulted as the language of correspondence you have the option to change the default The list positioned next to the language field contains all the language codes maintained in the SMS module You can select the appropriate Country This is the country as given in the address of correspondence of this customer Click on the option list positioned next to this field a list of countries maintained in the Country Codes screen is displayed You can select the appropriate Nationality Specify the nationality of the customer The list of country codes maintained in the Country Codes Maintenance screen are available in the option list positioned next to this field You can select
185. ected unauthorized authorized and unposted transactions e The amount available for withdraw e The overdraft limit of the account This is inclusive of the sub limit e The Credit Rating or the credit worthiness of the account holder o A charge fee or interest debited to the customer account will not be referred to the Referral Queue 7 1 ORACLE Using the Referral Queue you can view details of all transactions processed during the day due to which the account has moved into overdraft For example Silas Marner s savings account has a balance of 1000 Euro with no O D facility There are five checks of 300 Euro each drawn on the account on the same day On double clicking on Silas Marner s account number in the Referral Queue the details of all five checks will be displayed for your perusal in the Referral screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDREFQU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button a Referral Queue Web Page Dialog f Account Number Current Balance TOD Limit Start Date Avaliable Balance Tod Limit End Date Overdraft Limit Customer Name Posted UnPosted REFERRAL QUEUE E Posting Date Contract Reference Number Referal Description Dr Amount Pay Flag Unpay Flag Waive Charges Reason ACCOUHT STATISTICS You will be able to view the following details about the entries which have been posted and those that are not to post e
186. ed under this account class are EEFC accounts lt is applicable only for current account types The box is not selected by default For more information on EEFC details refer chapter Processing Bills in the Bills and Collection User Manual Natural GL The reporting of all turnovers of the particular account class will be directed to the GL that you identify as the natural GL Based on the characteristic of the account balance you can specify whether the turnover is to be posted to the Debit GL or to the Credit GL For instance if the account class is for overdrafts the balance is normally a debit whereas current accounts normally do not have a debit balance Specifying Account Statement Parameters For each account class that you maintain you have the option of generating account statement details periodically for all customer accounts associated with the account class If you need to generate account statements that would need to be sent across multiple media generated at different frequencies you can define up to three different frequencies at which the statements could be generated with a primary secondary and tertiary frequency If you are defining primary secondary and tertiary statements the frequency for each must be different and unique for instance if you define a monthly primary statement you cannot define a secondary or tertiary statement with a monthly frequency As part of specifying the account statement p
187. ee format text without spaces which identifies the amendment you are doing This is mandatory Service Name The relevant service name this is a broad level grouping of similar operations within a module in Oracle FLEXCUBE The service names are published by Oracle FLEXCUBE 2 33 ORACLE The maintenance pertaining to service names is factory shipped for your bank Operation Code The relevant operation code This is the operation that the external system wishes to perform within the selected service The operation names are published by Oracle FLEXCUBE As an example you can take ModifyCustomer which is for modification of a customer record Each operation under different service names is identified by a unique code o The maintenance pertaining to operation codes is factory shipped for your bank Element Name The relevant field that can be amended On choosing a field its type gets defaulted in the Element Type field It can be one of the following Element These ultimate leaf elements occur directly under the parent node of an amendment request It is displayed as an F Node This is a child node of a main amendment request It has its own child elements and nodes It is displayed as an N 2 2 17 1 Processing for Element If such a field is sent as part of an amendment request and is maintained in this screen then a value for that field is expected when the request comes in from the external
188. eeeaasseeeeeseeeaaaaeeeeeeess 6 1 6 1 7 Specifying Liquidation Preferences for Debit Interest ANd Charges csssssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeseeeeeeeenaaes 6 14 6 1 8 Maintaining Details for Free BANKING cccccccccseecccccccc cee eeeeeeeeeeee ceca a eeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeessaaaaesees 6 15 6 1 9 Speci YING Initial FUNGING PIC CTENCES vcuascicnaccsaynccsansncnasigapechditns cise yGecais TENES 6 15 O110 Maintaining POvisionine DOTIS aerosois Ni N asinine NORA 6 16 6 1 11 Maintaining Status Codes for Account Class cccccccccccccssssesscccceeeceneeeceecceeeeaaassseseceeesaaasseeeeeeeesaaaaaaees 6 16 Odd2 opec Vine Repor ineine Detall S erais oia NE E AE Ae 6 17 Odl Manainn AmO Depos UiS sirrinin naen N EE EE ET OE EA 6 19 6 1 14 Maintaining Rules for Automatic Status Change neeeeessssssssssseseerresssssssssssssssssssseerrreeesss 6 21 6 1 15 Maintaining Sequence for Funds Allocation o eeeeoosesnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnensssssssssssseeerrersssssssssssssssererersesess 6 24 6 1 16 Maintaining Transaction Restrictions for Account CLASS icccccccccsssseccccccccecenesseecceeecaaaeeseseeeeeeseaaanees 6 27 6 1 17 Maintaining Details of Account Statements Generation cccccccccccccccssssecssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaeeeees 6 28 6 1 18 Specifying Regulation D Applicability for Account Class wiicccccccccssscccccccccceeseneeesececeeesaaaeeseeeeeeseaaanees 6 33 6 1 19 Assigning Preferred Branches Currencies and CUStOMETS csssccccccccces
189. eeeeececceceeeeeaaaeeseeceeeseaaaaees 6 34 01 20 Mamaming Branch T Te eren ES orresrir ei iiaa AT EAEN ONE 6 34 6 21 Maimidimng Currency PrEJeTENCES aeiia enon o TEE TA 6 35 Glaze Mamiainine Customer Pie erences oiris E E E E N E ANTR 6 36 ORACLE 6 1 23 Maintaining Notice Preferences cccccccccccccsssseesseccceceenesssseeeeeeeeaeeseseeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeseeeeeaaaaaeees 6 38 6 1 24 Maintaining NArratives n cccccccccccccccccccessccccccccceensssseeeeeeeensesseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaesseeeeceeesauaasseceeeesaaaaaseees 6 39 6 1 25 Maintaining Customer Instruction Details cccccccccccsssececeeeccccecceeeeeeeeeeea ase sessesesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeaaes 6 40 6 1 26 Maintaining Location Details cccccccccccccccccccssssesccecceeecneseeseeceeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeaaaeeeeceeesaaaaaseeeceeesauaaasaeeees 6 44 6 1 27 Capturing Algorithm Details in Oracle FLEXCUBE ccccccccccsseesscccceecenneeesseceseccaaeeseeceeeeaaaaaaeeeees 6 45 6 1 28 Maintaining Turnover Limits ccccccccccccsecccccccccccneesseecceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaaaaaeaeeseeeeseaaaaeseeeeseesaaaaees 6 48 6 1 29 Account Classes for Time Deposit ACCOUNTES cccccccccssseesscecceeccneeessecceeeeaaasseeeceeesaaaeseeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeees 6 49 6 1 30 Specifying Dual Currency Deposits Details ccccccccccssesccccccccccneseseeceeceeeaaaesseeceeeeeaaaeseeeceeeseaaaaeeeeees 6 52 6 2 MAINTAINING DEPOSITS INSTRUCTIONS ssesesssssssseeesssssssreeessssseteeessssssstteessssss
190. eeeeeneeeseseeeeeaas 2 9 2 2 4 Specifying Details in Auxiliary Tab viiccccccccccssccccccccccseccesesseecceeeeeaeeseeceeeeeaaaeeseseeeeeeaaaseeeeeeesuaaaaaaeeeeees 2 11 2 2 5 Specifying when Accounting is done for Funds Transfers ccccccccccccce ee neeccececcecnaasseseeeceeeasaaaaseeseees 2 15 2 2 6 Maintaining Personal Details of Individual Customers cccccc cc sseesecceceee ea eeeeeeeceeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaees 2 15 22 Maintaining Domestic Details of Individual Customer 6ccccccc css eeeeeeecceeece ae eeseececeesaaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaaees 2 18 2 2 8 Maintaining Professional Details Of Individual CUSTOMETS cccccccseeecccccceeeeneecceeeeeeecaaeeseeeeeeeeaaaaees 2 19 2 2 9 Capturing Details Specific to Corporate CUSTOMET ccccccccccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaasaaaeaenees 2 21 2 2 10 Specifying Details in Director TAD wiccccccccccscccccccccccssseescceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaseeeeeeessaaaaeeseeeeeeas 2 22 2 2 11 Capturing UDF Values for Customers ccccccsseeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeee eee nn es eesseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaasaassneeeeeess 2 23 2 2 12 Special Customer GrOUPING s csccciccsosssivcessccivseessesiedscossssasscaciecoseesesecsacedessesssteanscesseasseedsceoosesseesseeats 2 23 2 2 13 Other Basic Customer Information ooeeeeeeeeessssssssnseeeeneesssssssssssssseeerrresrssssssssssseeerereseesssssssssseses 2 25 2 2 14 Viewing Debit Card DICiA Ss ccsinecostassasaritasaanashaancasocnsiaorsebatas
191. een by typing the code CSRPACCO in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button 3 Customer Account Opening Confirmation Web Page Dialog Customer Report All Customers Single Customer Customer Number 0000001 Date 7 3 2000 Customer Report You can generate customer account opening confirmation report for one or all the customers Indicate your choice here If you select Single Customer you have to specify the customer number in the space provided 11 6 ORACLE Customer Number If you wish to generate a report specific to one customer specify the customer number The option list displays all valid customer numbers maintained in the system Select the appropriate one Date Specify the date as of which you want to generate the report Once you have set the preferences click OK button The system displays the print option screen where you can set your preferences as to viewing and printing the report 11 8Netting Report You can generate a Customer Currency and Date wise report to retrieve details of contracts amounts that were netted You can specify the following preferences for the report e Report Type You can indicate whether the report should contain details of contracts amounts that have the same Value Date or whether the details should be generated as per the Netting Reference Number If you indicate that the report should be
192. effective date gets defaulted For the new rate code maintenance the P button doesn t default any rate You cannot delete the rate code once authorized You can maintain Tier Rates only from the HO branch During authorization rates get propagated to all the branches 2 3 8 5 Populating tiered tenor rates Click the P button to populate the tiered tenor rates of the previous effective date for the selected rate code and currency 2 3 8 6 Operations on Tiered Interest Rate Maintenance screen You can carry out the following operations in the Tiered Interest Rate Maintenance screen e New Itis allowed only from the HO branch e Unlock Modify You can modify a record even after the first authorization only when the effective date is greater than or equal to current date e Delete It is allowed only before authorization e Authorize You can authorize the rate added e Query You can query the tier rate Example Assume the rate code maintained at the account is TIER _RATE1 with the following details The tenor details stored will be cumulative Effective Date 01 Jan 2000 Tenor from Tenor to Rate 2 61 ORACLE Assume that the Main and the Penal Interest components are MAIN_INT and PENAL_INTEREST Tiered Tenor is linked to loan accounts with Bullet schedule only This is because it is linked to loan accounts whose Main Interest component is discounted and there are no schedules defined for di
193. elivered to the same account previously The value of Include for Cheque Book Printing and Cheque Type specifications defined in the Cheque Book Details screen will be defaulted from the previous order of the Cheque Book Capturing Details about Specially Designated Nationals Specially Designated Nationals SDN are those customers with whom you need to refrain from trading in any form The US government publishes a list of such nationals and circulates this list among banks and other financial organizations You can to maintain the details of SDNs in Oracle FLEXCUBE The details of Specially Designated Nationals are updated and published by the US government on a regular basis You could download these details from their web site You have two options to replicate the contents of this file into Oracle FLEXCUBE They are ORACLE 1 Upload the file into Oracle FLEXCUBE through the SDN Upload screen 2 Maintain the details of each SDN manually Both these options have been elaborated upon in the subsequent sections Maintaining SDN Details Manually Through the Specially Designated Nationals screen you can capture the details of SDN customers manually Invoke this screen by typing STDSDNMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below E Specially Designated Nationals Detailed Web Page Dialog Mame Date
194. ellor etc Therefore you must maintain the list of possible options for each of these academic titles and salutations referred to as prefixes through the Customer Prefix Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDCUSPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Customer Prefix Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch Code DYR Branch Name Derivatives testing branch Customer Prefix Details a Pretixt Pretix2 Pretix3 O pt pn pt Input By BISHNU Date Time 7 3 2000 21 58 30 Modification Number 1 d Open Authorized By Date Time E Authorized The following details need to be captured e Branch code This is the code of the branch for which the list of prefixes will be made available The description associated with the branch is displayed in the adjacent field e Prefix1 This is the first prefix to appear in the Customer Name e Prefix2 This is the second prefix to appear in the Customer Name e Prefix3 This is the third prefix to appear in the Customer Name While specifying the prefix in the customer in the CIF screen a list of all the values maintained in this screen is displayed You will also be allowed to key in a prefix of your choice These details will be printed along with the receiver name in all messages sent to the customer If the global tags for prefixes have been maintained in the advice the System substitu
195. enor defined for the account class under which it is opened You can change this tenor Based on the Interest Start Date and the tenor you specify for the deposit the Maturity Date is calculated and displayed If rollover is allowed for the deposit the next maturity date is also displayed 5 4 8 2 Specifying Rollover Details for Deposit The rollover specifications for an account class apply to all deposit accounts opened under the class You can change this acquired attribute in this screen 5 40 ORACLE Choose the Auto Rollover option in this screen to automatically rollover the deposit you are maintaining You can set the terms and conditions for rollover as follows e Only the outstanding principal of the original deposit is to be rolled over or e The outstanding principal is to be rolled over with interest e A special amount is to be rolled over If a special amount is to be rolled over you have to specify the amount less than the original deposit amount in the Rollover Amount field Sron When a deposit is rolled over the new contract continues to have the reference number of the old deposit The implications of choosing the different rollover options are given below You can indicate rollover type as here under e f rollover type is principal then principal is rolled over and interest is pay out as per the pay out maintenance e If rollover type is Principal Interest then both principal and interest rollover ta
196. enotes the sum total of balances in all the accounts of the selected customer 9 2 11 Viewing Accounting Entries You can view all the accounting entries passed for a selected Customer Account in the Accounting Entry Retrieval screen To invoke this screen select a customer account and a date range in the Customer Position screen and then click Accounting button 9 10 ORACLE The Accounting Entry Retrieval screen is displayed with all the accounting entries passed for the selected customer account and date range Accounting Entry Retrieval Web Page Dialog Guery Criteria Contract Relerence Humber Bete Crectt Transaction Code Currency Eveni Code edule Code Vale Date Transagion Dabe Related Reference Reisbed Accound Account Details Branch Code CHO Account Humber Starting Balance Currency Debi Credit Balance D Transacci n Delais E Contract Reference umber Module Code Transechon Code Event Code Transaction Date Tinke DE oo HiT 7 SOO C cHOsseso01 850000 DE 116 INT 732000 Double clicking on an accounting entry in this screen displays the corresponding contract input screen Click Query button if you wish to query for any particular accounting entry 9 11 ORACLE 10 Glossary 10 1 Important Terms Account Class A group of customer accounts with similar characteristics and attributes Account Statement Cycle The periodicity for the generation of account statements Account Statement Type
197. ent SDE Days from Star which will indicate the number of days from deposit initiation to withdrawal date While maintaining the penalty formula you can specify a condition to charge penalty only if the value of the Days from Start SDE is greater than 6 days Closing Account When you close an account the system will check whether an IC product linked to the account is pending liquidation If an IC Product is pending liquidation you will be prompted to perform the liquidation before closing the account You can click on the Liquidate button to imitate the process whereby the system will calculate all outstanding amounts for all products involving the account and display the same On confirming the details that are displayed the system liquidates the products You will not be required to authorize this action If any provisioning has been done in respect of the account the relevant amount is written back to the GL as specified in the maintenance on Closure If the account does not have any IC products pending liquidation the system will display list of Close Out modes in the Account Closure Details screen Account Closure Details Web Page Dialog Branch CHa Account Number 100005 Branch Account Currency Instrument Details Cheque Mo Stationary Mo Beneficiary Mame Branch Instrument Type status Expiry Date lzsuing Bank Beneficiary Address Other Details Type 1 Type 2 Type fa
198. er Groups for Tracking Exposure You may wish to track exposure due to loans issued to a group of customers as a whole and assign the status of all loans issued to the group as the status of the loan with the worst status among those issued to the group You may similarly wish to include the exposure due to outstanding overdraft in respect of a group of customer accounts as a whole and assign the status of all customer accounts belonging to the group as the status of the customer account with the worst status among the accounts and loans belonging to the group When you set up a group for tracking exposure due to loans and customer accounts you will need to specify the applicable exposure category The exposure category for a group is either derived from the logic maintained in the Exposure Type Category Linkage maintenance for the group type or explicitly specified If it is derived it is displayed in this screen by the End of Day batch program The type of the group indicates the type of customers that belong to the group retail or corporate If no logic has been maintained in the Exposure Type Category Linkage for the group type you can indicate the applicable exposure category for the group Group Status All loans and overdraft accounts issued to customers in the group will be assigned the same status which will be the status of the loan overdraft account with the worst status among those issued to customers in the group The G
199. er can be used to query the TD Account Exchange Rate Specify the exchange rate between TD Account Currency and the Linked Currency The standard exchange rate is defaulted here However you are allowed to modify it Linked CCY s Settlement Account Specify the settlement account of the linked CCY Alternatively you can also select the settlement account from the adjoining option list This settlement account is used if the settlement has to take place in the Linked CCY at maturity Linked CCY s GL Specify the GL used for posting the settlement entries in the FX This is used when settlement happens in the Linked Currency It triggers exercising of Linked Option Contract which in turn creates an FX contract for settlement Since the settlement is done in the linked currency within TD redemption the FX contract created by the system does not post any customer credit entries The Accounts maintained at the FX product for amount tags SETBOTAMT and SETSOLDAMT is flipped with the Linked CCY s GL so that the Linked CCy s GL is credited and debited in the respective currencies Fixing Days Specify the number of days from TD maturity date before which the exchange rate has to be fixed This option is defaulted from the Account Class screen and can be modified Sron The Fixing days cannot be lesser than zero or greater than the tenor of the TD For example If the fixing days specified is 2 then two days before the maturity of th
200. ere all subsequent status movements will be triggered automatically during the EOD run for the branch However the changes will come into effect only upon authorization of the details maintained here At a later date you can switch back to the manual mode by unchecking this option and having the same authorized The manual status movement that you specify in this screen has to be authorized for the new status of the account to come into effect 6 1 14 2 Maintaining Status Change Processing For accounts marked with automatic status change you can execute a batch process at EOD to trigger the status movement and other associated changes Use the Account Status Update Processing screen available in the Application Browser to begin the batch process If the Status Processing Basis defined for the branch is Group CIF level the worst status for all loans and overdrafts accounts is calculated for a Group CIF level This status is displayed in the respective Group CIF screens as well as at the respective account and contract screens The individual status of each account and contract is also displayed in the accounts screen as Account Derived Status Refer the Products chapter of the Interest and Charges user manual for more details 6 1 15 Maintaining Sequence for Funds Allocation The allocation of funds will occur as per the product sequence you maintain in the Product Maintenance screen invoked from the Account Clas
201. es the Linked Entities screen This invokes the Management Information System screen 3 19 ORACLE This invokes the IC Special Conditions Maintenance screen Charge This invokes the Account level charges conditions screen This invokes the UDF screen Deposits Instruction This invokes the Deposits Instruction screen Billing Parameters This invokes the Billing Parameters screen Account Signatory This invokes the Signatory Details screen terine Ealance Parameters This invokes the Interim Transactions Report screen This invokes the Notice Preferences screen This invokes the Cards Summary screen 3 1 7 Specifying BIC Details You can capture details of all SWIFT BIC that should be allowed for a customer account using the Authorized SWIFT BICs for Customer Account screen To invoke this screen click BIC button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen z Authorised SWIFT BICs for Customer Account Web Page Dialog Account Humber 100004 AIC Codes T BE Code Description Account Number The system defaults the account number of the customer in this field 3 20 ORACLE 3 1 8 3 1 9 BIC Code Specify the BIC here You can choose any valid BIC maintained in the BIC Code Maintenance screen Description The system displays the description for the corresponding BIC that you have specified Specifying Deposit D
202. etails In case of a Deposit type of account you can capture additional details using the Deposit screen To invoke this screen click Deposits button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen E Deposits Web Page Dialog Auto Deposit Balance Sweep Type Sweep If Instructed Master Account No Min Reqd Balance 10 00 Auto Deposit Balance This indicates the amount that got auto deposited into the account Sweep Type The drop down list shows No sweep Default from A c Sweep if instructed Min Reqd Balance The minimum balance indicates that only the amounts above this limit are used for auto creating deposits You have to specify the minimum amount that the customer can retain in the account Specifying Account Operating Instruction Details You can capture details for operating the account using the Account Operating Instructions Maintenance screen To invoke this screen click Instructions button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 21 ORACLE The screen is shown below E Account Operating Instructions Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Date of Last Maintenance 7 Maintenance Instruction Instructions 1 wayyy Instructions 2 eeeeeeeeceeeeceee Instructions 3 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr Instructions 4 tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt Conditions X Elements Operators z X Value Branch The sign on branch code is defaulted whe
203. eteeessssseseeeesssssstteeesssssereeeese 6 53 G3 MAINTAINING VENDON riopas tr ae o oaae uoa ae oae 6 54 7 PROCESSING REFERRALS IN ORACLE FLEXCUBE eeeecececcccccsssssssscccececcoccccsssssesceceseccccococesssssssssee 7 1 7 1 Eg ODOC TION Serene ee ee eee en ee en reer re ee eer er ee en eter 7 1 7 1 1 Maintenance Required for Referral Processing sccccccccccccccccccccceeeenesesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaasaaaaassseeeeeess 7 3 8 PROVISIONING FOR CUSTOMER ACCOUNTS eeeeeeeccecccccccecccecececccccecececccccccececccecccccececececccececececesesse 8 1 8 1 ig 8 5 BY BG BJ Serene rere ere en re ee er er ree rr ere ere eee re 8 1 6 1 1 Specifying Basis fOr Status Processing cccccccsssecccccccccecseessceeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeeeaaaasseeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeaas 8 1 6 1 2 Setting up Customer Groups fOr PLOVISIONING c ccccsseccccccccceccnneeeesceeeeeeaneseseceeeeeaaaeseeeeeeeeeaaaaseeeeeeeeeeaas 5 2 6 1 3 Setting up Customer Classifications for Status Processing ccccccccccccssveseeececeeceeaaaeseseeeeeeeaaaseeeeeeeeaas 8 3 5 1 4 OE I VND OS IEC 1 CONIC Sco onsciarscat rte ices th aban EEE EAA sensed sation 5 4 6 1 5 Maintaining Rules OF PrOVISIONING ascori iien En i E E EEEE 8 6 8 1 6 Deriv ation Rules Jor Status Change sererceineiereecierein r A E EEE E E 8 9 6 1 7 Provision PTOCESSING FOP AN CCOUIIS arrisera en E EEE E 5 10 9 CUSTOMER INFORMATION QUERY sorciers a aaea EEE E aera aE iKa Sarai 9 1 9 1 BOr CLIO I e E E E A E E ada aeeotaeac
204. ettlement account is used if the settlement has to take place in the Linked CCY at maturity Linked CCY s GL Specify the GL used for posting the settlement entries in the FX This is used when settlement happens in the Linked Currency It triggers exercising of Linked Option Contract which in turn creates an FX contract for settlement Since the settlement is done in the linked currency within TD redemption the FX contract created by the system does not post any customer credit entries The Accounts maintained at the FX product for amount tags SETBOTAMT and SETSOLDAMT is flipped with the Linked CCY s GL so that the Linked CCy s GL is credited and debited in the respective currencies Fixing Days Specify the number of days from TD maturity date before which the exchange rate has to be fixed This option is defaulted from the Account Class screen and can be modified Sron The Fixing days cannot be lesser than zero or greater than the tenor of the TD For example If the fixing days specified is 2 then two days before the maturity of the TD account the exchange rate for that day is compared with one captured in this screen and the currency in which the deposit is settled on maturity is also decided Yield Enhancement Specify the additional percentage of yield that the customer receives for agreeing to the currency Option Inception Fair Value Specify the market value of the option contract at inception This option is defaul
205. exceeding 35 characters alohanumeric The characters should conform to SWIFT standards 2 16 ORACLE Submit age proof Select an option Not required pending or verified from the list provided Date of Birth Specify the date of birth of the customer to calculate the total tax exemption limit if there are any tax waivers applicable for the customers on deposit accounts lt is mandatory to specify this option for individual customers for computing tax waiver based on age Domicile Address 1 2 and 3 Specify the address of domicile of the customer Three lines have been provided for this Each line can have a maximum of 35 characters alohanumeric Only characters specified as per SWIFT standards are permissible Country Specify the country of domicile of the customer A list of all country codes maintained in the Country Codes Maintenance screen is available in the option list You can select the appropriate code Permanent Address 1 2 and 3 Specify the permanent address of the customer Three lines have been provided for this purpose You can capture a maximum of 35 characters alphanumeric in each line Only characters specified in SWIFT standards are permissible Country Along with the permanent address specify the country of permanent residence of the customer Telephone Specify the telephone number of the customer Fax Specify the fax number of the customer E mail Specify the E mail address o
206. f 30th is a holiday on the next working day If you set the statement date to 31 then account statements will be generated on e The 31st for month with 31 days if 31st is a holiday on the next working day e The last working day for months lt 31 days For all other cycles account statement would be generated on the last day of that cycle Maintaining Cheque Book Preferences Oracle FLEXCUBE provides you with the facility to automatically trigger the reorder of Cheque Books for all accounts reporting to a specific account class However you have the option of changing your preferences at the account level also To facilitate automatic reordering of Cheque Books you have to maintain the following details Cheque Book To indicate that automatic reordering of cheque books should be allowed and for specifying the details for the same you have to check this option If not selected you will not be able to maintain the automatic reordering preferences for the account class 6 8 ORACLE 6 1 4 1 6 1 5 Auto Reorder of Cheque Book You have to select this option to specify that automatic reordering of Cheque Books is required for all accounts reporting to this account class This field will be enabled only if you have checked the Cheque Book option explained above Reorder Level Here you have to indicate the level at which the reordering of Cheque Book should happen Automatic reordering will be set off by the system w
207. f the report 11 2 2 Contents of the Report The options that you specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report The contents of the IRA Statement have been discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the Report information on the branch code the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report Body of the Report Customer The CIF Number full Name and mailing address of the Information customer as recorded in the CIF Maintenance screen Plan Number The reference number of the plan involving the transaction Plan Type The plan type involving the plan Period of the The period for which you are generating the statement statement 11 1 ORACLE Customer The CIF Number full Name and mailing address of the Information customer as recorded in the CIF Maintenance screen Statement The statement number of the statement Number Plan Balances The balances in the plan at the beginning and end of statement period Current and Previous Years Note The current balance is reflected for the current year and the year ending balance after considering contributions and distributions done during the current year for the previous year for the previous year Total Contributions Excess Contributions Total Distributions Total Employer Contributions where applicable Excess Employer Contributions Transaction Transaction type Contributions Dist
208. f this customer Passport Number Specify the passport details of this customer which include the passport number the date on which the passport was issued and the date on which the passport is due to expire 2 17 ORACLE 2 2 1 Permanent Address Specify the resident status of this customer Whether the customer is a recognized resident of the country in which the particular branch of your bank operates The national identification number or national social security number of this customer o You may or may not choose to maintain this information for specific individuals This is entirely dependent on your requirement Maintaining Domestic Details of Individual Customer As part of maintaining personal details of the customer you can capture Domestic details about the customer like the customer s educational status marital status number of dependents etc Click on Domestic button The Customer Domestic Details screen will be displayed Customer Domestic Details Web Page Dialog Marital Status Single Spouse Mame Spouse Employement Status Fut time Permanent r Educational Status Non Student Dependents Accomodation Self Owned Children thers In this screen you can capture the following details for each individual type of customer e The Marital status of the customer A customer could be married single re married divorced separated widowed etc You have to indicate the appropriate e
209. fer Log Branch The current logged in branch code is displayed here MIS Group For an account the transaction type of MIS class will be picked up from the account class Rate Code Specify the rate code Select the appropriate one from the adjoining option list which displays all valid rate codes maintained in the system Link to Group If an MIS Group is linked you can indicate whether the linkage with the group should always be maintained If yes any change to the MIS Group will automatically apply to the customer to whom the MIS Group is linked If not the entities defaulted for the customer will continue even if they are changed subsequenily for the group 3 49 ORACLE Rate type If you have indicated that rates maintained for the individual account should be picked up for MIS refinancing you have to specify the Rate Type that is to be used The options available are Fixed Floating Automatic indicating that the system should pick up the refinancing rate associated with the account Since the account number is linked to a Rate Code the system picks up the rate code associated with the account when the EOD processes are run to refresh the various rates Select the appropriate Pool Code Account Level The Pool Code Account Level to which the account class or product belongs should be defined Pool Code For an account the pool code will be picked up from the account class Transaction MIS Group For an acco
210. following CLS Participant Customers of your bank can settle their FX deals via the CLS Continuous Linked Settlements Bank to reduce the risks associated with such transactions To allow the customers to do CLS trades you have to mark the customer as a CLS Participant However you have to ensure that the branch at which the customer operates is also qualified to process CLS deals i e the branch should also be marked as a CLS Participant before allowing the same for the customer Further you can also capture currency restrictions for your customers by maintaining a list of allowed or disallowed currencies for CLS trading Click the CLS Restrictions button to maintain this list Note that currency restrictions will be allowed only for customers who are CLS participants Refer the Continuous Linked Settlements chapter of the Foreign Exchange User Manual for details on maintaining currency restrictions and other maintenances required for processing CLS deals in Oracle FLEXCUBE MT920 Check this option to indicate that the customer is eligible to request for MT920 messages MT920 Account Update Request A request for an up to date statement from the bank where the referenced Account is held The request may be for an Intra Day Update M1942 or an End of Day Update M1940 and is subject to the service agreed with that bank Issuer Customer If the customer whose CIF you are maintaining is an issuer of securities then ch
211. following validations At least one Debit Account and one Debit Branch need to be entered Debit Account and Credit Accounts should not be the same While using Sweep in Accounts for Debit Transaction the Sweep in Accounts taken are those for which Sweep in Account s Branch Date should be equal to the Current Date of Transaction Branch Sweep In Account s Branch Status is in Transaction Input Stage 3 81 ORACLE 3 9 3 Viewing Sweep in Accounts Summary Details You can view the summary details of a Sweep in Accounts in Online Sweep in Summary screen You can invoke the summary screen by typing ACSSWPON in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Online Sweepin Summary Webpage Dialog Authonzation Status Cred Branch Transachon Code Q Search Advanced Search Records per page 15 4 Authorization Staius lecord Status Credit Branch In this screen you can query based on any combination of the following fields e Authorization Status e Credit Branch e Transaction Code e Record Status e Credit Account After specifying the parameters for the query click Search The system displays all the records matching the parameters specified 3 82 ORACLE Sron Note the following Next day reversal of debit transaction will not credit the sweep in accounts automatically you need to handle it manually In addition same day reversal will a
212. for the selected status You can identify the CB Credit Line that should be associated with the status from the option list available Dr and Cr Head Office Lines This is the Debit Head Office GL maintained in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen to which all accounts belonging to this class will report if they move to the status being defined Similarly select the Credit Head Office GL maintained in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen to which all accounts belonging to this class will report to when they move to the status being defined o As a mandatory requirement you have to associate the status NORM Normal when maintaining status codes for an account class Accounting Roles and Heads for Provisioning In addition to the provisioning preferences that you specify for an account class you must also maintain the accounting roles and heads representing the GLs to which the accounting entries for provisioning must be passed for each account status You can maintain this information in the Status Details screen when you define each of the status codes Rebook Provisioning on Status Change In the Status Details screen you can indicate whether provisioning entries for an account must be rebooked when provisioning is done after an automatic status change for the account Rebooking essentially means that fresh provisioning is done after writing back the previous provisioning amount The provisioning
213. ft will be sent to the referral queue Dormancy Parameters lf Transaction Code associated with the account has the Consider for Account Activity option enabled the dormant status of the account will be updated to Active Apart from this you can specify the parameter that is required for re activating the account Choose from the following options to indicate the re activation parameters for the dormant account e Debit e Credit e Any e Manual In case of a transaction the system will check for the parameter you have specified here and accordingly change the status of the account The parameter you specify here will supercede the parameter you have maintained at the account class level 3 1 2 3 Specifying Turnover Limit Preferences The account inherits the turnover limit code linked to the parent account class Turnover Limit Code The system displays the turnover limit code applicable to the account 3 1 2 4 Specifying Account Facilities As part of specifying the account facilities you can indicate whether the account holder can avail of the following facilities e A checkbook facility e A passbook facility e An ATM facility You can indicate that the account holder can avail of a Checkbook Passbook ATM facility by checking the box positioned next to each of these fields ae ORACLE 3 1 2 5 If you have indicated that the account holder needs to be provided with the check book facility you can also specify whether a
214. fy the following details Tax Exemption limit for Corporate Others Specify the total interest limit up to which the waiver is applicable for corporate others TAX_WAIVER_LIMIT SDE is populated with tax exemption limit for male female for individual customer and tax exemption limit for corporate others for corporate customers If total interest earned by the customer on all the term deposits is greater than the TAX_WAIVER_LIMIT SDE then tax waiver will not be applicable and hence tax will be deducted 5 4 15 Maintaining Tax Waiver Tax Waiver Maintenance screen is used for capturing the waiver details for a specific customer branch and financial period To invoke this screen type STDTWMNT in the top right corner of the application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button amp Tax Waiver Maintenance Web Page Dialog TAX CIF ID Branch Code Financial Year Tax Waiver Type F Customer No Account No Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Checker Date Time E Open 5 56 ORACLE You can maintain tax waiver only for a TAX CIF ID primary customer You cannot maintain tax waiver for customers linlked to a TAX CIF ID Specify the following details TAX CIF ID Specify the Tax CIF ID from the adjoining option list Tax CIF ID is the CIF in which CIF ID amp TAX CIF ID are same these are called primary tax customers from the adjoining option list All the valid customers maintained in t
215. generated for a Netting Reference Number you will have to identify the number in the respective field e Date indicate whether you would like to generate the report for a specific date range or for all dates Depending on your specification the netting details report will be generated for all contracts that were netted within your branch for the given date range start and end date inclusive or it will be generated for all contracts regardless of the date on which they were netted e Customer indicate whether the report should contain details of all customers whose contracts were netted or for a single customer For a single customer you will have to identify the CIF ID of the customer from the option list e Currency You can indicate whether the report should be generated for all currencies or for a specific currency Identify the currency for which the report should be generated in case of a single currency Note If you fail to specify a date the generated report will return data for the Current System Date e If you indicate that the report should be generated for a specific Currency and fail to specify the Currency the report will contain details of all currencies Similarly if you indicate that the report should be generated for a specific Customer and fail to identify the customer the report will be generated for all customers 11 7 ORACLE 11 8 1 Contents of the Report The report options that you selected while
216. generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report The contents of the report are discussed below Body of the Report Counterparty This is the name of the counterparty whose netted contract details are being displayed Contract Reference This is the reference number of the contract which was Number netted Component This is the name of the component Amount Tag involved in the transaction This is the amount for which the particular entry was passed Account Due This is the account to which the netted amount is either debited credited 11 8 ORACLE 12 Term Deposit Reports 12 1 Term Deposits Opened for the period You can generate reports for the Term Deposit accounts opened for a period for a customer To generate the report invoke Term Deposit Account Opened Report screen This report displays the Term deposit accounts which are opened for the given period and that are currently on open Status TD Account Opened Report Webpage Dialog Branch Code From Date To Date Account Class Customer Specify the following details From Date The TD accounts opened from this date Current application date is defaulted To Date The TD accounts opened till his date Current application date is defaulted Branch Code Specify the branch code from the list of values provided Account Class Specify the account class from the list of values provided Customer Specify the cus
217. generation of balance messages by clicking the Times button 2 Message Generation Time Web Page Dialog Message Generation Time E Message Generation Time This screen is employed to indicate the the time instance in hours for the generation of the balance reports Message Generation Time Specify the timing for generation of the MT 941 MT942 messages You can specify the time interval in hours only A new message type is created for the balance report process which can be run as part of a scheduled task This message type is ACST_BALANCE and ACST_INT_DTL 6 1 17 2 Balance Statement Handoff The balance statement can be handed off as part of scheduled task under Oracle You need to assign its frequency in hours This process is initiated for all accounts requiring a balance account statement As discussed previously the time for generation of the statement is determined and specified In case of no subsequent transactions reports the statement is not generated 6 1 17 3 Assigning Balance Statement as Job The balance statement can be facilitated to run as part of a scheduled job as part of the Oracle jobs initiated during processing The Jobs Browser screen of the application provides you the facility to run the balance statement as a synchronized task subject to specified time intervals in hours 6 30 ORACLE Invoke the Jobs Browser screen from the application typing CSSJOBBR in the field at the
218. h will be applicable to all the accounts under it The accounts will move from one status to the other based on the number of days they have remained inactive in the system The status of an account will determine whether the account should be marked as an NPA or not Further you can also specify the reporting lines for GL Central Bank and Head Office to which accounting entries should be passed when an account moves from one status to the other You can post all debit and credit balances of one account class to a single General Ledger account Conversely you also have the option of posting debits and credits to separate GLs 6 16 ORACLE The status codes and the reporting lines for each status may be defined in the Status Details screen Click the GL Lines button in the Account Classes screen to invoke it ZS Status Details Web Page Dialog Account Class TIMDT4 Description Term Deposits A c Status NORM I Rebook Provisioning on Status Change Description NORMAL STATUS Debit Reporting Lines Credit Reporting Lines Debit LI2902016 Credit LI2902016 CBLI2900 CBLI2900 HOLI3500 HOLI3500 Status Details O Account Role Accounting Role Description Account Head Accounting Head Description You can specify the following details in this screen Status You can select the different status codes applicable to the account class in this field Use the Add icon to define each status and the attribute
219. he Branch parameters The account number is created according to the account mask you have maintained for the branch This will be mandatory and has to comply with length of 9 characters and MOD 11 validation if the value of the UDF Clearing A C Mandatory is maintained as YES in the Field Name to Value Definition screen However you can choose to change this number here and the system validates this number with the account mask you have maintained for the branch IBAN Account Number To capture the detail of the IBAN account for a specific customer you have to enable the IBAN Required option by enabling it Subsequently click the M button The IBAN details sub screen will be displayed In this screen you can capture the IBAN Account Number as well as the bank code of the bank where the IBAN account resides The bank code and account number that you specify in this field will be validated against the Bank Code and Account Number masks maintained in the Branch Parameters screen If the account Number that you capture is less than the length of the mask and the mask happens to be numeric the system automatically appends a zero to get the required length After you specify the Bank Code as well as the Account Number the system calculates the check digit based on the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination 3 4 ORACLE Description This is the description of the account Here you can enter the nature of
220. he exposure due to loans issued to the group CIF is summed to compute the total exposure 8 7 ORACLE 8 1 4 3 Specifying Exposure Category for Customer When you maintain CIF details for customers in the Customer Information Maintenance screen you can specify the exposure category under which exposure due to loans issued to the CIF will be tracked The exposure category is derived by the End of Day batch program and displayed if the applicable logic has been maintained for the specified customer provisioning group in the Exposure Type Category Linkage maintenance If no logic has been maintained for the group you can specify the applicable exposure category 8 1 5 Maintaining Rules for Provisioning For each account class for which you have defined account provisioning to be applicable you can define the rules according to which the provisioning amount would be computed when applied to an account using the class You can define the provision rules in the Account Class Provisioning Rule Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing LDDPRULE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ze Corporate Deposits Provisioning Rule Maintenance Web Page Dialog Product Code BALP BASIC LD PRODUCT Elements Elements lt Fields ansant Input By RIZAL Date Time 7 3 2000 16 17 23 Authorized By Date Time WG_LCY PROY _PERCEh
221. he system are available for selection in the option list Branch Code Specify the branch code Financial Year Specify the financial year Tax Waiver Type Specify the tax waiver type Customer Number The primary and secondary customers i e all CIF IDs which have the TAX CIF ID as the specified TAX CIF ID are displayed here Account Number In New Mode after specifying the branch customer ID waiver type and financial year on clicking the P button system defaults all the active deposits available under the customer id and branch specified New term deposit accounts opened after maintaining the tax waiver will not be considered for tax waiving You have to amend the tax waiver maintenance to include the new term deposit account Waiver can also be maintained for a future financial year If you are maintaining waiver for future financial year the waiver can be marked for all deposits under the customer ID which are active as on the date of marking waiver Sron Maintaining waiver for old previous financial year is not allowed Verification of age and gender for the purpose of maintaining tax waiver will be done manually for individual customers based on the Date of birth and gender details maintained at CIF level If a TD for which 15G H has been submitted gets renewed manual renewal force renewal automatic renewal during the financial year the waiver will continue only for that financial year irrespective of the new m
222. he transaction with the authorized customer name If the validation is successful the customer name is added to the existing list and the contract is marked as authorized If the validation fails the contract is marked as unauthorized Even during manual authorization of such contracts an override is displayed asking whether the customer name needs to be added to the existing list It will be added to the existing list on confirming the override 2 51 ORACLE 2 3 6 Maintaining Float Days for Outward Clearing Customer Transactions Float days applicable for arriving at the Credit Value Date for outward clearing customer transactions are defined through the Float Days Detailed screen Invoke this screen by typing STDFLTDS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Float Days Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch Code Description Product Code Description Sector Code Description Customer Group Description Customer No Description FLOAT DAYS DETAIL E Currency Float Days Input By Date Time Modification Number H Open Authorized By Date Time BB Authorized You can define the float days for transactions involving a specific Clearing Bank Branch Product Sector and Currency combination for e All customer groups and all customers within the groups e A specific customer group and all customers within the group e A specific customer g
223. hen the unused number of cheque leaves becomes equal to or less than the re order level that you maintain here This field will be enabled only if you have indicated that automatic reordering of Cheque Books is required i e the Auto Reorder of Cheque Book option is checked Reorder No of Leaves In this field you have to specify the number of leaves that should be ordered for the new Cheque Book This field will be enabled only if you have checked the Auto Reorder of Cheque Book option Processing Automatic Reordering of Cheque Books The automatic reordering of Cheque Books is processed at EOD by executing a batch function The following conditions should be satisfied for initiation of automatic reordering e The Auto Reorder of Cheque Book option is turned on at the account level e The number of unused check leaves for the account is less than or equal to the reorder level maintained at the account level The system will pick up the number of leaves to be reordered from the field Reorder Number of Leaves maintained for the account The numbering of cheque leaves for the new Cheque Book will depend on the Cheque Number Unique for Branch option in the Bank Parameters screen If this option is checked the numbering will begin from the Last Number 1 of the Cheque Book that was delivered last to any account If you do not select this option the number will start from the Last Number 1 of the Cheque Book d
224. hich is to be associated with the account Sequence Number The system generated sequence number for the instruction you are maintaining Currency Currency of the particular account Deposit Currency The currency in which the deposit is made Tenor Tenor for the deposits that are opened under an account class Sweep Multiple Of The sweep can only be in multiples of the sweep specified Retry Till Date The instructions specified will be invalid after this date Any failed sweeps after this date will not be picked up for processing the next day 3 53 ORACLE 3 1 25 Specifying Billing Parameters You can capture billing parameters for the account using the Billing Parameters screen To invoke this screen click the Billing Parameters button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 Billing Parameters Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account No 100002 Consolidating Account Billing Liquidation Auto Settlement Account 7 Direct Debit Bank Code Account Name Aggrement Id Billing Details T Billing Product Description 3 1 26 Specifying Account Signatory Details You can capture details of signatories for the account using the Signatory Details screen To invoke this screen click the Account Signatory button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 54 ORACLE 3 Signatory Details Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Number 1000
225. ically the bank sets this figure Sron In arriving at the total exposure figure as shown in the table above the outstanding overdraft in the account as well as the outstanding amounts on all loans issued to the group CIF that the account belongs to are summed 8 12 ORACLE Examp le utner exeeue Ano eom Te ee ec ee fo fom fe fa O emon fasaon fo O mown ow Jo O emoonopmearan ww Exposure to Retail Customers The expression used for this category could be PA OD RFC x PP where PA Provisioning Amount OD Outstanding Overdraft Amount Principal Overdue Interest RFC Risk free Collateral PP Provisioning Percentage The provisioning percentage could be computed as shown Loan Type Categorization Percentage Retail OD RO Retail Overdrafts 1 5 Retail Mortgages Retail Loans that has mortgages 2 0 RM as collateral Retail Consumer Other than the above 1 5 RC Provisioning for Impairment Losses Impairment losses include loans that are not in the Regular status The provision amount computation could be done as follows according to the following categories All Corporate customers regardless of exposure and Retail customers with exposure exceeding BGN 5000 The expression used for this category could be PA BVE RV RFC x PP Where PA Provisioning Amount BVE Balance Value of Risk Exposure Outstanding Overdraft amount which is Principal Balanc
226. ication Browser to maintain the deposits instructions specifically for the auto created deposits 23 Deposits Instruction Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Class ACCO Customer 1111112 Cey USD Sweep Branch Deposit Currency Sweep To Account Amount Amount Block Number Tenor Sweep Multiple Of Minimum Required Balance Source Code External Reference Number Retry Till Date Start Date 6 53 ORACLE You can set the terms and a condition for a deposit as follows e Account Number This is the account number of the deposit e Account Class This is the account class to which the account is linked e Customer Number The customer for whom you are maintaining the deposit instructions e Sweep to Account Indicate the account to which the sweep is carried out e Amount This is the deposit amount e Minimum Required Balance The minimum balance indicates that only the amounts above this limit will be used for auto creating deposits e Source Code The code assigned for the sweep e External Reference Number e Start Date The instructions will be valid from this date e Branch Code The branch code of the branch which is to be associated with the account e Sequence Number The system generated sequence number for the instruction you are maintaining e Currency Code The Currency of the particular account e Deposit Currency The currency in which the deposit is made e Tenor The tenor for the deposit
227. ich the installment for the Recurring Deposit is collected as per the installment frequency Installment Amount Specify the installment amount that has to be collected from the payment account as per the installment frequency This installment amount should be greater than the minimum amount mentioned at the account class 5 12 ORACLE Recurring Deposit Account Check this box to indicate recurring deposit account Payment Date Specify the date on which the payment needs to be done for recurring deposit account Example If frequency is monthly and payment date is 10th Jan then first payment happens on 10th Jan and subsequent payments happen on same date for the continuing months Payment Currency Specify currency of the payment amount Installment Frequency Specify the installment frequency in days months or years Check the box if you want to move the funds on override 5 13 ORACLE 5 3 4 Dual Currency Tab Click on Dual Currency tab to capture dual currency related details Term Deposit Account Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch Code Customer No Term Deposit Account Customer Name Number Term Deposit Currency x SD User Reference Account Class Main Nominee Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Dual Currency Deposit Linked Currency Currency Option Product Option Contract Ref No Exchange Rate Linked Currency Settlement Alc Linked Currency GL Fixing Days Yield Enhancement Inceptio
228. ide e On saving a secondary customer if the PAN number is not specified for the TAX CIF ID primary customer system throws an error as PAN is mandatory for Primary CIF in case of grouping e On saving a customer linked to TAX CIF ID Secondary customer if the PAN number and tax group of TAX CIF ID Primary customer are different system displays an error message e Closure of TAX CIF ID primary customer happens only if the customers linked to TAX CIF ID Secondary customer are delinked TAX CIF ID TAX CIF ID indicates the linked primary customer using which customer grouping is done for the purpose of deducting TDS System defaults the TAX CIF ID with the same customer id if left blank o Secondary customers linked to TAX CIF ID are not allowed to be chosen as the TAX CIF ID Primary customer for some other customer 2 2 4 Specifying Details in Auxiliary Tab Click on the Auxiliary tab to view the following screen Customer Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer No Short Name Branch Code Main Auxiliary Personal Corporate Director AML Reporting AML Customer Group Required Consolidated Cert Required Individual Cert Required Utility Provider Utility Provider Utility Provider ID Algorithm ID Check Digit Validation Required Full Name Additional Details Credit Rating AML Risk Rating VY8BEN Signed Date 105 Completion Date OMX Base Currency Head Office A
229. if you have indicated individual account wise status processing for accounts in the Branch Parameters If you have indicated status processing at Group CIF level then the provisioning batch process executes at the frequency maintained in the Branch Parameters screen for your branch and not at the frequency maintained in the Account Classes screen e The currency in which the provisioning amount must be calculated either account currency or local currency e Default exposure category for accounts using the account class e Event class for which the provisioning accounting entries would be defined The specifications you make here are inherited by any account that uses the account class In addition to these preferences you must also indicate e The accounting roles and heads representing the GLs to which the accounting entries for provisioning must be passed for each account status e Whether provisioning entries for an account must be rebooked when provisioning is done after an automatic status change for the account You can maintain these details for each account status in the Status Details screen 6 1 11 Maintaining Status Codes for Account Class Current and Savings accounts that have not generated any interest over a specific period or have remained inactive with interest overdue may be identified as NPAs Non Performing Asset In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can assign different status codes to an account class whic
230. ify whether the nostro agent your account servicing institution prefers to receive a Notice to Receive SWIFT message i e MT 210 when it is debited in the case of a funds transfer To indicate that the message MT 210 is to be generated by default whenever the nostro account is the debit account for a funds transfer select the MT 210 Required checkbox in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen for the relevant nostro account If you indicate so an MT 210 is generated by default whenever this nostro account is being debited during the posting of accounting entries in any transaction This preference to generate an MT 210 by default can be over ridden when you enter a contract involving a debit to the nostro account Once you have specified this preference for a nostro account you can change it whenever necessary For instance if you have not specified that an MT 210 be generated you can unlock the record and specify the generation of MT 210 Conversely if you have specified that MT 210 generation is applicable you can unlock the record and specify that it is no longer applicable Lodgement Book lf you have allowed the use of lodgment books for an account class this specification is defaulted for all customer accounts that use such a class You can change the Account Class default and make the required specification If you wish to allow orders of lodgment books for individual customer accounts you can indicate so in the Cus
231. igadnsaant qenabssauiadaseaaaaabbatahotauciuceiaaaaaaeas 2 27 2 2 15 Maintaining Waiver for Customer Tax Group iccccccccsssccccccccccccsesccccccceecaaessecceeeeeesaaaseeeceeeesaaaeseeeeeeas 2 28 2 2 16 Maintaining Tax Allowance Limit fOr CUStOMETS ccccccccccessneseeseceeeceeceanesesecceeeeaaaseeeseceeeseaaaaeeeeees 2 30 2 2 17 Amendment MAintenance cssccccccccccccccccccee cece ne nnseeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eee e AAA A AAA EEEEEEEEE EEE E EEE EEE EEE EEA G Aaa aaa E EEE ES 2 32 2 2 18 Specifying Details for Generation Of MT 920 i cccccccccsssccccccccescsssessccceeecaaseeseeceeeesaasseeeceeeesaaaaeeeeeeeeaas 2 35 2 2 19 Defining Customer Category cccccccsccccccccccccccccssccscccceeecasseeecceeeenaeseseeeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeesaaaasseeeeesesaaaaeeeseeees 2 36 2 2 20 Invoking Customer Cate gory Screen iccccccccsssecccccccccceccassscsecceeeeeasssseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeceeeesaaaeeeeeeeeeeesauaaaeeeeees 2 36 2 2 21 Creating Customer Categories iic ccciaviarcatecsntediaeerdatonas tes wiencdtedioedsslaxsn ei chebabsaaaedcedstedeeacatan entssansiatevens 2 37 22 22 Maimtaininge Customer GIOUDS vin cinticwssssninticisins eishstesdstastiartslanieteSiaxsasicesdstasiadlaniepesiaken u ceaksuestaaecies 2 38 2 2 23 Maintaining Limits for Customer Group csssseesseeeeceecccceecceeene na eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeaaaaaaaaaaenseeeeees 2 39 2 2 24 Associating Customer Account with Group occccccccccsssseccccccccceaeesscecceeeeaaeesseeceeeeaaaessseeeeeeeseuaaaeeeseeeeea
232. ill be input to generate TDS certificate Branch code Specify the branch code of the account holder from the list of values provided Financial year The field defaults the financial year for which TDS certificate is viewed Customer Specify the customer for whom you need the report from the list of values provided The report lists all the SB NRO account the customer has 5 80 ORACLE 5 4 23 Generating TDS Report You can view and print TDS for single customer in a branch in the TDS Report screen To invoke this screen type ICDTDSRP in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Ts Report Webpage Dialog DoR z Branch Financial wear Customer Specify the following details to generate TDS certificate Branch code Specify the branch code of the deposit holder This adjoining option list displays all the valid branch code maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Financial Year Specify the financial year for which TDS certificate has to be viewed printed Customer Specify the customer name This adjoining option list displays all the Tax CIF IDs i e primary customers maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one o Permanent account no PAN no needs to be captured for individual customers as per the requirement of income tax department to track financial transactions It is mandatory to indicate PAN no in For
233. ine amount is USD 48 000 Your bank would like to see USD 48 000 The total available balance is displayed as Unutilized Line amount USD 48 000 Total available balance USD 48 000 In the Amounts and Dates screen you can view the outstanding debit interest and or charges due on the account as on the current date You can also view the amount that can be withdrawn against uncollected funds on the account The System computes the allowable amount based on the Withdrawable Uncollected Funds Basis option specified in the Branch Parameters Preferences screen 3 1 3 2 Viewing Unposted Entries When this branch is under EOD processing the inter branch transactions originated from other branches are tanked The funds are made available automatically after BOD and till such time they are treated as unposted items 3 1 3 3 Viewing Turnover Limit Details You can view the account balance status with respect to the turnover balance limit set for the financial period You can view the financial period currency total deposited amount and the permissible limit for deposits The period and limit details are inherited from the limit code associated with the parent account class During every credit transaction on the account the system updates the limit utilization and checks the balance amount against the permissible threshold On account of a transaction if the balance breaches the limit threshold the system will display an override messag
234. ing STDRELMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Relation Maintenance Web Page Dialog Relation Description Fields Input By Date Time Modification Humber I Open Authorized By Date Time I Authorized Specify the following details in this screen Relation Define the type of relationship in this field You can use a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters to define a relationship Description Provide a brief description of the relationship being maintained This will further help you in identifying the relationship The types of relationships defined in this screen will become available for linking two customers only upon authorization of the details maintained 2 44 ORACLE 2 3 2 Maintaining Relationships between Customers The Customer Linkage Maintenance screen is used to maintain relationships between customers In this screen you can link two customers and specify the relationship that exists between them You can invoke this screen by typing STDCUREL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Customer Linkage Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer1 Customer Name Customer2 Customer Name Relation Input By Date Time Modification Number BS Open Authorized By Date Time Authorized Customer 1 and 2 You can select the names of the cust
235. ing the system validates the sum of Pay In Amounts against the TD Amount keyed in The system will validate for the following e The deposit amount should be equal or greater than minimum booking amount maintained at the Deposit Cluster Maintenance level else the system will display the following error message The deposit amount is less than the minimum booking amount e The deposit amount should be a multiple of the booking unit maintained at the Deposit Cluster Maintenance level else the system will display the following error message The deposit amount must be in multiples of booking unit Computed Amount The computed amount is displayed automatically Rollover Amount If a special amount is to be rolled over you have to specify the amount less than the original deposit amount in the Rollover Amount field Payin Details Term Deposit Pay In Option You must specify the mode in which the payment will be made for the time deposit account The payment can be made by cash account transfer or GL transfer Percentage Specify the amount of payin in percentage Amount Specify the amount which is paid for the time deposit account in the account currency Offset Branch Specify the offset branch code of the account for payin The adjoining option list displays all the valid branch codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one 5 10 ORACLE Offset Account You have to specify the custome
236. ing a parent account a message will be shown requesting removal of the parent child account linkage il ORACLE Sron Even while generating ad hoc statements you can indicate whether linked account details should be displayed in the generated report 3 1 15 Specifying Account Limits You can capture details of account limits using the Account Limits screen Click the Limits button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen to invoke this screen FA Account Limits Webpage Dialog Limit Currency USD L Lu Temp OD Start Uncoll Funds Limit Temp ODB End EA Temp OD Limit CreditLine Offline Limit Netting Required v Daylight Limit Credit Start Date Credit Rev Date Cr Transaction Limit Temp OD Start The start and end dates represent the dates from which the temporary overdraft limit becomes effective upto the date on which it should ceases to be effective Temp OD Start The start and end dates represent the dates from which the temporary overdraft limit becomes effective upto the date on which it should ceases to be effective Credit Line You can indicate the credit line to which you would like to link the customer to A list of all the credit line codes maintained in the system will be displayed in the option list You can select the appropriate Netting Required To process linked accounts which are marked for referral you will need to enable the Netting Required option This option i
237. ing of this information for all accounts using an account class you must enable the Account Statistics option in the Account Class Maintenance 6 12 ORACLE For each account class for which account statistics has been enabled an accounting End of Day EOD process updates the statistics table both period wise and according to financial years The book dated balances are used for computation of statistics and the balances are maintained according to accounting periods For information about viewing the period wise account statistics refer the section Querying on Account Statistics found earlier in this chapter Status Change Automatic If you check this option the status of the account will be changed automatically by the system as per the conditions maintained in the Status Rule Definition screen If you do not select this option you have to change the status manually through the Manual Status Change screen These screens are discussed in detail in the subsequent sections of this document This specification will be defaulted to all the accounts reporting to this account class Exclude Same Day Reversal transaction from Statement If you do not wish transactions booked and reversed on the same day to be reflected in the account statement you can specify the preference here This feature is applicable only for the customer account legs and not for the related GL legs Also reversals made through the DE module will not be consi
238. intained exposure categories you must also specify how the system would derive the exposure category under which contracts and accounts must be tracked The exposure category can be derived from the following parameters Category Type You may wish to track the exposure in respect of customers from different categories such as retail or corporate under different exposure categories Amount Limits You may wish to specify an amount range within which the total exposure would be tracked for the customer or group In the Exposure Category Category Type Linkage screen you can link the exposure category to be used for tracking different customer category types and total exposure in respect of a customer group Invoke this screen by typing LDDETMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Corporate Deposits Category Type Maintenance Web Page Dialog Category Type Corporate Basis Amount Currency USD Exposure Type Details O Serial Number Basis Amount From Basis Amount To Exposure Category O 1 0 1233 CL Input By RIZAL Date Time 7 3 2000 15 56 13 Modification Number 9 jv Open Authorized By Date Time BB Authorized You can view the summary of the exposure category linkages in the Exposure Category Category Type Linkage Summary screen 8 6 ORACLE Invoke this screen by typing LDSETMNT in the field at the top right corner of the App
239. intenance Oracle FLEXCUBE checks for duplicate location codes To recall existing location codes are maintained through the Location Codes Maintenance screen If a match is found system throws up an error 2 53 ORACLE e This maintenance is applicable only for account level address maintenances and not for address maintenances done at the customer level 2 3 8 Maintaining Buyer wise ECGC Limits You can maintain the ECGC Export Credit Guarantee Corporation limits based on buyer in the ECGC Buyer wise Limits Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDECGC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button F i E ECGE Buyer wise Limits Maintenance F Ed Exporter ID Buyer ID Exporter Mame Buyer Mame Currency Policy Expiry Date Limit amp mt Remarks Input Bry Date Time Modification Humber Ba Open Authorized By Date Time Authorized Specify the following details in this screen Exporter ID Specify a valid customer id of the exporter of the current branch This adjoining option list displays all valid customer id of the exporter maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Exporter Name On selecting the exporter from option list name of the exporter gets populated Currency Specify a valid currency of the limit This adjoining option list displays all valid currency maintained in the system You can cho
240. interest then interest mount is rolled over and principal amount is pay out as per the pay out maintenance Rollover Amount If a special amount is to be rolled over you have to specify the amount less than the original deposit amount in the Rollover Amount field 5 4 5 3 Specifying Term Deposit Pay Out Details Payout Type Select the pay out mode from the drop down list The options available are e Bankers Cheque BC e Transfer to Other bank PC e Transfer to GL GL e Transfer to Savings Account AC 5 28 ORACLE Note the following e This option will be available only when account number generation is Auto e For Dual Currency Deposits you are allowed to select only GL and Savings Account options as the pay out mode You can either select GL or Savings Account but not both You can select only one GL or one Savings account and not multiple GLs or accounts in either case Percentage Specify the amount of redemption in percentage Offset Branch Specify the branch code of the account for redemption Account Number Specify the account number GL for redemption Narrative Specify the description for the redemption 5 29 ORACLE 5 4 6 Capturing Pay Out Parameters Details You can capture the parameters for automatic pay out by clicking on the Pay Out Parameters button To capture the details for pay out through Bankers Cheque click on the Bankers Cheque tab Payout Paramaters
241. ions for a loan account maintained at the account class level for online sweep of amounts with CASA account through the Sweep Instruction screen Click Sweep Instruction button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen The Sweep Instruction screen is displayed as follows eS Sweep Instruction Web Page Dialog Branch Code CHO Account CHOO00002410 Currency INR Loan Account Transaction Code Sweep Out Details Minimum Sweep Amount Minimum Balance After Sweep You can maintain the following parameters here Branch Current Branch code of the CASA account will be defaulted here from the main screen 3 65 ORACLE Account Account number of the CASA account will be defaulted here from the main screen Currency Currency code of the CASA account will be defaulted here from the main screen Loan Account Select a valid loan account you need to sweep with the CASA account from the adjoining option list o Note the following e Select only Revolving type of loans e The Branch Customer and Currency of the Loan account and CASA account should be same e You can link only one loan account to the CASA account and vice versa Transaction Code Select a valid transaction code for sweep entries from the adjoining option list Sweep out Details You can maintain the following sweep out details here Minimum Balance After Sweep Specify minimum balance amount you need to maintain in the CASA account
242. ip When you specify the relationship of the customer you can also choose to default the same preference to the customer account maintenance for the specified customer by checking the Include Relationship box Also specifying this option at the customer maintenance level will inherit all the properties of the customer relationship to the counterparty of the loan deposit during the contract input 2 2 2 Maintaining Risk Category for Customers In order to support risk weighted risk tracking you will have to maintain risk details for Customers You can maintain different Risk Categories for Customers in the Risk Category Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDRKMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Risk Category Maintenance Web Page Dialog Risk Category WER Description Fields Input By SUDHA Date Time a2000 19 53 53 Modification Number 1 Gi Open Authorized By SUDHAS Date Time 732000 19 53 54 E Authorized Specify the following details in this screen e Risk Category Define the type of Risk Category in this field e Description Provide a brief description of the Risk Category being maintained The types of Risk Categories defined in this screen will be available for Liability maintenance of customers and Risk percent maintenance only upon authorization of the details maintained Risk Category
243. is not a mandatory input during Customer Maintenance Risk Category is applicable to the Customer and not to the Customer s Liability ID 2 43 ORACLE 2 3 2 3 1 Multiple Relationships The credit facility granted to any customer is tracked against the Liability Number of the customer You can also track the liability of a customer child against a different customer parent Thus the liability number emphasizes only one kind of relationship that of the parent with the child However a customer of your bank can have relationships with other customers of your bank i e there is a possibility of one to many relationships between customers Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to define different types of relationships that can exist between two customers For eg Business Husband Wife and Partners etc You can link two customers by specifying the relationship that exists between them The advantage being that when you generate the exposure report for a customer it will display the total exposure of the bank to every customer linked to the liability in question as well as the exposure of every customer who is related to any customer within the liability The example given at the end of this section will further illustrate this concept Maintaining Types of Relationships You can maintain the different types of relationships that can exist between customers of your bank in the Relation Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typ
244. is to be sent to the customer indicating the commencement of charging on the account Specifying Initial Funding Preferences You need to specify the following details pertaining to initial funding for opening accounts under the account class Event Class Code Specify the event class code maintained for initial funding process for the module code DE This adjoining option list displays all valid event class codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Charge Role to Head Code Specify the class code that you wish to use for posting charge related accounting entries for initial funding This adjoining option list displays all valid class codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one 6 15 ORACLE Refer the section Maintaining Event Class for Account Initial Funding in the chapter titled Creating Classes under Modularity User Manual for further details about the event class code 6 1 10 Maintaining Provisioning Details When you define an account class you can specify whether provisioning is applicable for accounts using the class You can make the following specifications in the Provisioning Details section in the Account Classes screen e Auto Provisioning Required Check this box if provisioning is applicable e Provision Frequency Frequency at which the provisioning would be done either daily or monthly Sron The frequency you define here is only applicable
245. isplays all the records matching the parameters specified On authorization of a record the system fires a status change STCH event for each of the customer s contract The system moves the status of the contract and authorizes it If there are several contracts for the customer and if the status change of one of the contracts fails the system displays a message at the end and processes the remaining other contracts All successfully processed contracts will consist of new status and the others will consist of the old status The system logs the failed contracts into an exception data store The system displays an override message if a new contract or account is booked for a counterparty for which the bulk status change performed 2 59 ORACLE While linking a new contract to the customer after bulk status change processing you can input it in any status irrespective of the status of the other contracts of the customer The system should control it operationally to have the same status for the new contracts or accounts in case bulk status change performed for the corresponding counter party When you re execute the Customer Level Status Change function you can change the status of the contract to new status 2 3 8 4 Maintaining Tier wise Interest Rates You can maintain tier wise interest rates for an effective date rate code and currency combination in the Tiered Interest Rate Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typi
246. it qualifies the TDS is deducted TDS is also deducted on interest accrued but not yet paid at the end of the financial year 5 50 ORACLE Individuals can avail tax benefit based on certain criteria If the total interest income from all the term deposits doesn t fall within the taxable limits then a waiver request needs to be submitted by term deposit holder as per income tax regulations Individuals claiming such exemption have to submit Form 15G 15H companies form 15AA association of companies form 15AA and trusts must provide details in form 15AA You can maintain tax rate for the customer based on the residential status Example The default tax rate for residential customer is 10 whereas for non residential ordinary customer it is 30 Note the following e Form 16A is the TDS Certificate which bank has to provide for a financial year to the account holder for the purpose of filing IT returns e You can enquire tax details of term deposit account holders The taxable interest for a financial year will be computed as follows Scenario 1 If term deposit booking date is before the beginning of financial year and maturity date is within the financial year then Interest earned from beginning of financial year to maturity date is considered for computing tax for the financial year Example Total Interest earned accrued Taxable Tax Booking Maturity Interest for the interest inter Fin Yr date date rate financial ye
247. ities Web Page Dialog List of Linked Entities T Customer Description Relationship Include Relationship 1111118 UPLOADCUSTFIRSTNAME101 UPLOADCL primary E 3 47 ORACLE Customer Select the customer from the option list with whom you want to establish the relationship with the customer account that you are maintaining Description In this field the system displays the name of customer that you have selected in the previous field You cannot change the description Relationship You have to choose a relationship code to establish a relationship between the customer being selected and the customer account you are maintaining By default the system will select the customer of the account as the Primary Holder This is a pre shipped relationship and you will not be allowed to change the relationship 3 48 ORACLE 3 1 22 Specifying MIS Details You can capture Management Information System details for the account using the Management Information System screen To invoke this screen click the MIS button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen E Management Information System Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Calc Method Rate Type Account Number Spread MIS Group T Link to Group Pool Code Rate Code Account Level Pool Code SAVINGS Transaction MIS Code Composite MIS Code MIS Group MIS Group CC_TRANSC CCY_TRANS MSTC002 MSTCOO3 MSTCO04 MSTCO05 MSTCOO F Change Log Trans
248. ity of the This X days are the Fixing days that are captured in the TD screen The following processes are done as part of this batch e Allthe TD accounts that are maturing X days ahead are picked up e For those TD accounts the exchange rate captured in the TD Account creation is compared with the current day s exchange rate e Based on the currency that is weaker the system decides on the Settlement currency e On Maturity gt If the Linked currency is weaker settlement is done in the Linked currency gt If the Contract currency is weaker settlement is done in the Contract currency If the Fixing Date happens to be a holiday the rate as of previous working day is considered for Rate fixing 5 4 6 6 Dual Currency Deposit Liquidation Batch During TD liquidation batch for Dual Currency Deposits the following changes take place e If the deposit currency is weaker as on Fixing Date then the settlement is done in the deposit currency as part of TD redemption The Linked OT contract expires as part of EOD e Ifthe Linked Currency is weaker as on Fixing Date the settlement is done in the Linked Currency as part of TD Redemption e Ifthe Payout option is Savings the Linked CCY s Settlement A c and Linked CCY capture at the TD account level is used for settling the Deposit An error is thrown on save if a different settlement account or currency is selected e Ifthe Payout option is General
249. joining arrow button S Tax Waiver Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer Group TAXGROLUP Description TAXGROUP Customer Number C 0001 Description Customer Tax Category DY _TAx Description Tax Category for Derivatives Tax Currency AUD Description Australian Dollar Product Or Account Class ACEL Description Account class for Mostro From Gate 72000 To Date 7A 22000 Waiver Percentage 1 Fields Input By ANANMDBE Date Time 3 2000 14 30 02 Modification Number 3 E Open Authorized By Date Time E Authorized Customer Group You need to specify the Customer Group for which you wish to maintain Tax waiver Select a customer group from the option list provided 2 28 ORACLE Customer Number All customers who have been maintained under the selected customer tax group will appear for selection If the maintenance is applicable to all customers select All as customer number If no maintenance is done then there will be no tax waiver at the customer level Tax Category You need to specify a tax category for which you wish to main tax waiver Tax Currency You need to specify the currency in which the tax waiver should be defined Select All if you wish to define tax waiver for all currencies Product Or Account Class You need to specify the Product Account Class for which the tax waiver is being defined All account classes and all LD MM products will be available for selection You may also select
250. joining arrow button ose ORACLE el ECGC Buyer Wise Limits summary Webpage Dialog ail fx Authorization Status Record Status Exporter ID Currency Buyer ID Search Advanced Search Refresh i Records per page LOCK 1 of i Grty Page Authorization Status Record Status Exporter ID Currency Buyer ID Limit Amt Policy Expiry Date You can search for an existing record by specifying any of following details as search criteria e Authorization Status e Record Status e Exporter ID e Buyer ID This option list contains all the valid customers of the bank e Currency After specifying the parameter for the query click Search The system displays all the records matching the parameter specified 2 3 8 2 Maintaining Customer Level Status Change Oracle FLEXCUBE facilitates asset classification borrower wise If one of the contracts of a customer is an NPA as per NPA norms then the system changes the status of all the loan contracts and bill contracts of the customer to NPA for the purpose of Income recognition and provisioning though the contracts might perform well 2 56 ORACLE You can change the customer number and the desired status through Customer Level Status Change screen You can invoke the screen by typing CSDCSTCH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Customer Level Status Change Web Page Dialog Branch
251. k Parameters screen However in the advices and statements that are sent to the customer only the first 35 characters of the name will be displayed Address You can specify the mailing address of the customer in the four rows that are provided In each line you can enter a maximum of 35 alphanumeric characters All characters should conform to SWIFT standards Swift Code You can choose to associate a SWIFT Code with the customer whose CIF details you are maintaining This code will be used to send all SWIFT related messages to the customer This is pertinent while creating CIF record for banks as customers Fax You can specify the Fax Number of the Customer whose CIF details you are maintaining This will be used for faxing the LC confirmation mail message copy to the Counterparty IFSC Code Specify the IFSC code of the institute sending or receiving the SFMS Structured Financial Messaging Solution message You need to mandatorily specify this if you have selected Media as SFMS 2 6 ORACLE If you have selected the media as SFMS then during save the message address details in Customer Address Maintenance screen will be populated for the format SFMS for ALL branch AL module and ANY MSG TYPE For more details on customer address maintenance refer the section titled Address Maintenance at Customer CIF Level in Messaging System user manual 2 2 2 3 Specifying Unique Identifier Details E
252. kes place If you select this option the principal liquidation account has to be the term deposit account e lf rollover type is special then special mount is rolled over and the remaining amount is pay out as per the pay out maintenance e If rollover type is interest then interest mount is rolled over and principal amount is pay out as per the pay out maintenance The following example illustrated this Example Take the case of Ms Yvonne Cousteau who has placed a deposit of USD 10 000 under Domestic Short Term Deposits scheme on 1 June 2002 at 5 interest and to be liquidated at maturity on 31 December 2002 In December 2002 however Ms Cousteau requests you to renew the deposit on the maturity date She has two options e She can have it rolled over without the outstanding interest or She can have it rolled over along with the outstanding interest If it is to be a rollover without interest Principal only the principal of the new deposit will be USD 10 000 The accrued interest on this deposit will be paid out to Ms Cousteau If it is to be a rollover of the old deposit along with the unpaid interest Principal Interest the principal of this renewed deposit will be USD 10 250 USD 10 000 USD 250 as of 31 December 2002 The interest on the new deposit will be applied on a principal of USD 10 250 5 41 ORACLE Ms Cousteau decides to rollover only USD 1000 on 31 December 2002 the Maturit
253. laimed GL mapped at the IC product in the accounting roles and liquidate the interest amount to the interest booking account on maturity date of the term deposit account is moved and is liquidated If you select this option the principal liquidation account should be the term deposit account Rate Chart Allowed Check this box if you do not want to allow floating rate code during Term Deposit account creation Checking this box ensures the maintenance of the LD MM rate for the Term Deposit Rollover Type You can indicate rollover type as here under e If rollover type is principal then principal is rolled over and interest is pay out as per the pay out maintenance e If rollover type is Principal Interest then both principal and interest rollover takes place If you select this option the principal liquidation account has to be the term deposit account e lf rollover type is special then special mount is rolled over and the remaining amount is pay out as per the pay out maintenance e If rollover type is interest then interest mount is rolled over and principal amount is pay out as per the pay out maintenance 5 9 ORACLE Term Deposit Currency Specify the term deposit currency Term Deposit Amount Specify the amount which is paid for the time deposit account in the account currency If you have specified the percentage in the Pay In options on clicking the Compute button the system computes the amount And while sav
254. lationship of the signatory with the customer Customer Name The system displays the name of the corresponding customer Minimum Number of Signatories Specify the minimum number of signatories necessary to endorse an instrument involving the account Account Message You can capture information about particular signatories These messages could pertain to the name number and the type of signatory your customer is For instance you can capture a message like This signatory is a joint account holder with rights to sign instruments only up US 8000 Signatory Number The system displays values maintained in CIF signatory for the customer number Signatory Name The system displays the corresponding name of the signatory number specified Approval Limit Specify the amount up to which the account signatory can approve for debits 3 1 27 Specifying Details for Balance Report Statement The Customer accounts maintenance provides you with the facility to generate balance reports for the customer account These details are defaulted from the account class maintenance performed for the account class category the customer account comes under You can however alter these details utilizing the Customer account maintenance screen To invoke this screen click the Interim amp Balance Parameters button in the customer account maintenance screen You need to specify the details for an MT 941 message 3 56 ORACLE E Interim Transactions Rep
255. le clicking a record displays the summary screen for that record and double clicking further displays the contract details screen for that record Click the FX tab The screen appears as shown below 3 Customer Information Query Web Page Dialog Customer Information Customer T Current Branch Only I Relationship Address Query Accounts Loans Deposits FX FT Foreign Exchange Details E Branch Product Description Currency Balance Debit Credit Indicator pe iE Collateral MIS Projection Limits Accounting From Date To Date Transaction Date Value Date Here the FX bought amount is displayed as Debit Balance and the FX sold amount is displayed as Credit Account 9 5 ORACLE Double clicking a record in the Customer Position screen displays the corresponding FX Contract Summary screen Double clicking a record in the FX Contract Summary screen displays the corresponding FX Contract Detail screen comprising the transaction details 9 2 5 Viewing FT Details You can view details of all FT contracts for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen Click the FT tab The screen appears as shown below J Customer Information Query Web Page Dialog Customer Information C Current Branch Only C Relationship Accounts Loans Deposits FX FT C Branch Customer Accourt Cus Relationship _DebitXCredit nd 2 C Peu OO000R02INDS 0 0000002 PRIMAR Y DR PRIMARY PRIMAR primary PRIMAR
256. lgorithms you have maintained through the Algorithm Maintenance screen is displayed You can select the appropriate e The Function Type which specifies the type of the function using the algorithm The options available are gt Validation indicates that the function is using the algorithm to validate the input string For all such functions the input string is validated as being True or False depending upon whether the validation was a success or a failure gt Check Digit Generation indicates that the function is used for the generation of check digit using the algorithm Such functions will take the input string without the check digit and return the check digit You must enter the algorithm rule in the form of PL SQL code After writing the PL SQL code click Execute button to compile the code The algorithm rule is validated by the system and the success or failure message is shown in the Error editor Click Errors button to view the errors If any checks fail you must alter the statement so that the validation can be made successfully The algorithm is generated on Authorization of the rule Click the Clear button the Algorithm Rule editor and the Error editor will be cleared for you to enter a new rule in the field 6 46 ORACLE The System provides two pre defined key elements both for Check Digit Generation and Validation type of algorithms They are e branch _code e customer_no Y
257. lication tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button lt 4 Corporate Deposits Category Type Summary Web Page Dialog Authorization Status Record Status Category Type Basis Amount Currency a Search Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 x TTH of 1 bal Go to Page Authorization Status Record Status Category Type Basis Amount Currency A USD U o c USD Authorization Status Record Status A Authorized C Closed U Unauthorized Open Category Type You must specify the customer category type for which you wish to link the appropriate exposure category type Basis Amount You must specify the basis amount range within which the total exposure will be tracked using the exposure category that you have associated for the customer category type For all slabs except the first one the To Amount of the previous slab must also be equal to the From Amount of the slab The To Amount of a slab must be equal to or greater than the From Amount of the same slab Exposure Category You can specify the exposure category that is to be used to track the total exposure within the basis amount range for the customer category type you have specified Sron When the exposure category for a CIF or customer group is derived according to the logic maintained in the Exposure Category Type Linkage screen the outstanding overdraft in all accounts belonging to the group CIF as well as t
258. lization summary screen 9 8 ORACLE 9 2 9 Viewing MIS Details You can view MIS information about the selected customer through the Customer Position screen Click MIS tab F MIS Web Page Dialog Customer Cocke Cusiomer MS Code Compacte his Code Change Log Transfer Log For more details on the MIS screen refer the MIS User Manual 9 9 ORACLE 9 2 10 Viewing Projections You can view future settlement balances and outstanding FX and FT contracts for the selected customer account through the Customer Position screen Click Projection button BB Projections Web Page Dialog Customer Cusiomer Name Balante Cuetioner Acoourd humber Decheriplicn O Due Date User Reference Number Component Contract Reference Humber Module Trarsechon Dale Currency A y Teal Arrota Debi redi Total Ammouri To view the settlement balance for the selected customer for a particular future date enter a date in the date field and click the Q button The system displays details of all the unsettled transactions which have occurred until the date indicated in the Date field Total indicates the sum total of all unsettled transactions in local currency for the selected customer number Double clicking a record in this screen invokes the contract summery screen for the selected contract The current balance of the selected customer is displayed at the bottom of this screen The current balance d
259. m 16A For a customer group based on TAX CIF ID system generates a single TDS certificate which shows both the TSD Report and the TDS certificate through intraday batch Processing Tax During Liquidation by Cash Basis Method 5 81 ORACLE In Cash basis tax is computed and deducted when the actual interest is paid to the customer Example Interest amount for Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity financial date rate frequency year ACO001 200000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 15000 AC0002 100000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 7300 Liquidation schedule TDS to be Liquidation Total interest deducted amount earned 10 AC0001 5000 31 Jul 08 7500 AC0002 2500 NIL 31 Oct 08 7500 AC0002 2500 250 31 Jan 09 7500 During the first month liquidation tax is not deducted as the interest earned is 7500 The following tax related entries are passed during subsequent liquidation cycles On 31 Jul 08 NIL On 31 Oct 08 CUSTOMER C The total tax amount payable on 31 Oct 08 is 1500 The tax applicable on the current liquidation amount 7500 is 750 The tax applicable for the previous period 31 Jul 08 is 750 This amount will be recovered as part of batch tax recovery process On 31 Jan 09 e ORACLE The following SDE values will be populated for the above example when ICTDS batch processes the tax product associated with the above deposits Account no AC0001 DATE TOT_INT FOR_YEAR INT FOR PERIOD Y
260. m a customer category You create customer groups only to set up group limits and report credit utilization by the customers that belong to the group Limit Amount and Limit Currency The limit amount indicates the maximum amount that customers under a group can utilize You can indicate the currency in which the limit amount is expressed The outstanding of all customers associated with a group is aggregated to arrive at the credit utilization of the group This includes issuer risk arising out of securities issued by your customers and held by the bank 2 39 ORACLE 2 2 24 Associating Customer Account with Group While maintaining details of a customer account you can associate it with a customer group A customer can be associated with several customer groups Click Group button from the Customer Maintenance screen to associate the account with a customer group The screen is shown below S Customer Group Web Page Dialog Group Details Group ID Relation Partnership Details 2 2 24 1 Specifying Group Details To associate a customer account with a group select Group ID from the option list The option list will contain a list of all the customer groups that you maintained in the Customer Group Maintenance screen To add a group to the list click Add icon and select a Group ID from the option list To remove a group from the list highlight the Group ID and click Delete icon For each group that you ass
261. m a term deposit Using this option you can do a premature redemption either in full or in part and also complete redemption on maturity of the deposit This screen also allows you to renew the TD However renewal of the TD is enabled only if you have specified Grace period for Renewal option for the account To invoke the Term Deposits Redemption Input screen choose Term Deposits from the Application Browser Thereafter choose Operations and then Redemption Input under it You can also invoke this screen by typing ICDREDMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 5 46 ORACLE A Term Deposits Redemption Input Web Page Dialog Branch Term Deposit Account Mumber Customer Identification Account Description Account Currency Account Balance Redemption Redemption Mode Partial Redemption Renewal Redemption Amount Redemption Wave Penalty Renewal Detant Days Manths Years Maturity Date Term Deposit Pay Out Details Pay OGut Option Percentage Redemption Amount Offset Branch Offset Account Warrative TD Payout Details FX Linkage Specify the following details for redeeming the TD e The TD Account Number that is to be redeemed or renewed e The customer ID Account Description Account Currency and Account Balance will be displayed by the system e Whether the TD is to be Redeemed or Renewed Renewal of the TD is enabled only if you hav
262. m will display an error message If it is equal to or greater than the limit amount the system will proceed with saving Input to this field will be mandatory if limit amount has been maintained for the linked account class Pay In Option Indicate the method for initial funding during account creation Choose one of the following options e Pay In By Account e Pay In By GL Offset Account If you have chosen Pay In By Account as the pay in option you will have to specify the customer account that should be debited while posting accounting entries The adjoining option list displays all valid customer accounts and customer GLs maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one If you choose Pay In By GL the system will display the offset GL maintained for the branch in the Term Deposit Payin Parameters Maintenance screen Waive Account Opening Charges Check this box to indicate that account opening charges should be waived for individual customer account 3 10 ORACLE 3 1 3 Viewing Details of Amounts and Dates In the Customer Accounts Maintenance Amounts and dates screen you can view all financial details of this customer s account along with the details of the previous debit or credit activities However access to all financial information of an account can be restricted for any user The financial details of an account include the account balance the uncleared debit and credit balances the
263. maintenance for the CIF or customer group to which the account belongs Risk Free Exposure Amount This indicates the risk free amount collateral specified in the details of the account for which provisioning is being made Provisioning Percentage The provisioning percentage is generally picked up from the account details If not specified in the account details it is picked up from the Exposure Category Provisioning Percentage maintenance for the exposure category of the customer of the account and the account status Discount Percentage The discount or loss percentage is used to compute the recoverable value of the account for which provision is being made It is picked up from the account if specified in the account details or from the Exposure Category Provisioning Percentage maintenance for the exposure category and status of the account for which provision is being made Status Seq This indicates the sequence number that represents the status as defined in the Status Definition It can be used with arithmetic operators for ease of status rule definition 8 1 6 Derivation Rules for Status Change For accounts the basis for processing of status changes is governed by an attribute that you set in the Branch Parameters You could opt for status processing at a group or CIF level or at contract level If processing is done at a customer group or CIF level it is done in two stages The worst status among all accoun
264. mber Specify the account number of the beneficiary for the pay out Narrative Specify the description for the pay out Beneficiary Address Specify the address of the beneficiary for the pay out 5 4 6 3 Specifying Recurring Deposit Details The recurring deposit details associated with the Account Class are defaulted to the customer account You have the option of changing them for a specific account Auto Payment Take Down Check this field to allow the recurring deposit account to debit the payment account for the payment amount as per the instalment frequency Move Maturities to Unclaimed Check this field to move all the funds on the maturity date to the unclaimed GL mapped to the accounting role in the IC product Payment Branch Specify the details for the branch to which the payment account belongs Payment Accounts Specify the Payment Account this can be either savings account or the current account from which the installment for the Recurring Deposit is collected as per the installment frequency Installment Amount Specify the installment amount that has to be collected from the payment account as per the installment frequency This installment amount should be greater than the minimum amount mentioned at the account class Recurring Deposit Account Check this field to indicate recurring deposit account Payment Date Specify the date on which the payment needs to be done for recurring deposit account sl O
265. ment of funds or not Exclude Same Day Reversal trns from Stmt If you do not wish transactions booked and reversed on the same day to be reflected in the account statement you can specify the preference here This feature is applicable only for the customer account legs and not for the related GL legs Also reversals made through the DE module will not be considered for exclusion This specification is defaulted from the account class linked to the account You can change it for a specific account Statement Account A customer may have two or more accounts with your bank but may desire to receive a single consolidated account statement Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to link accounts For the particular account whose statement preferences you are defining you can indicate the parent account to which the account should be linked for statement generation purposes The statement account is applicable for all type of account statements Primary Secondary and Tertiary If the statement account has been specified you cannot enter other statement details If the statement account is not specified for a particular account then the account can be a statement account for other accounts If statement accounts have been maintained during EOD the account statement will not be individually generated for the child accounts Instead a consolidated account statement would be generated based on the frequency specified for the parent account While clos
266. mer name will be displayed alongside Tax Category Specify the Tax Category for which you wish to maintain tax allowance limit at the customer account level The description appears displayed alongside 4 ORACLE Sequence No Specify the order in which the tax free allowance limit should be utilized in case there are multiple customers linked to the account Customer Number You need to specify the Customer Number for which the Customer Account Tax allowance Limit is being defined Start Date You need to specify the date from which the customer account tax allowance limit is effective End Date You need to specify the date up to which the customer account tax allowance limit will be applicable The End Date should be greater than or equal to the Start Date You can also leave the End Date blank which would indicate that the maintenance is open ended Allowance You need to specify the allowance amount for the customer account The utilization of the allowance would be tracked against the customers and the minimum allowance available at the account level Currency This indicates the currency of the tax allowance amount for the selected customer account The currency appears by default from the Customer Tax Allowance screen and cannot be changed Remarks You may specify any comments you wish to record pertaining to this screen 4 2 1 1 Specifying Account or Contract You need to specify whether you wish to maintain tax
267. mount applicable Partial 31 May 09 A0001 19 992 5 29 987 5 A0002 9995 31 Aug 09 A0001 19 992 5 29 987 5 A0002 9995 m aaee Additional TDS 2399 10 215 92 52 3 1199 107 95 26 15 In the above case on 31 March 09 year end tax is computed and debited from Tax Paid in Advance GL for the TD amount During partial redemption on 30 April 09 interest of Rs 7 5 is computed for the redemption amount for the period 01 March to 30 April TDS of Rs 1 00 is deducted for this partial redemption However the redemption amount including its interest is less than the yearend tax Hence the entire redemption amount is deducted for the yearend tax on pro rata basis The accounting entries are passed as below On 30 Nov 2008 amp 28 Feb 2009 TDS amount TAX_PAY 3000 Surcharge Additional TDS amount On 31 Mar 2009 Year End TDS amount 5 69 ORACLE Surcharge Additional TDS amount On 30 Apr 2009 Partial redemption Adjustment entry on prorate basis TDS_amount TAX_PIA 444 62 Surcharge Additional TDS amount on CUSTOMER 1467 TAX PAY 14 67 Liquidation entry TDS_amount TAX_PAY 0 45 Surcharge 5 70 ORACLE Additional TDS amount TAX_PAY 0 01 On 30 May 2009 Adjustment entry TDS _ amount TAX PIA 555 38 Surcharge TAX PAY 55 54 Additional TDS amount TAX PIA 18 33 Liquidation entry TDS _ amount TAX PA
268. n Fair alue Interest Charges Linked Entities Restrictions MIS Statement Joint Holders Fields Account Signatory TD Payout Details Change Log Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Checker Date Time WE Open Je You need to capture the following details here Linked Currency Specify the currency for a dual currency deposits This option is defaulted from the linked currency maintained at the Account Class Level and can be modified The following fields are mandatory if Linked Currency is specified e CCY Option product e Exchange Rate e Linked CCY s Settlement Account e Linked CCY s GL Account e Fixing days e Yield Enhancement e Inception Fair value CCY Option product Specify the Option Product under which the Options Contract has to be created in case of Dual Currency Deposit This option is defaulted from the Account Class level 5 14 ORACLE Option Contract Ref No This is a system generated reference number of the Option Contract that is being created while saving the TD account This reference number can be used to query the TD Account Exchange Rate Specify the exchange rate between TD Account Currency and the Linked Currency The standard exchange rate is defaulted here However you are allowed to modify it Linked CCY s Settlement Account Specify the settlement account of the linked CCY Alternatively you can also select the settlement account from the adjoining option list This s
269. n an external system if the personal details of a customer are changed this has a unique name by which it is identified within Oracle FLEXCUBE Similarly if the limits related details of a customer are modified it also has a unique name 2 32 ORACLE lt is through the Amendment Maintenance screen that you maintain a set of amendable fields which can amend in Oracle FLEXCUBE whenever a request for the same will be send from an external system Based on this maintenance the amendment request is addressed by Oracle FLEXCUBE Invoke this screen by typing STSAMDMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Amendment Maintenance Detailed Web Page Dialog External System FLEMCUBE Operation GLOPROCL_AMEND service Mame GLOPRDOCL Operation Code GLOPRDOCL_AMEND Amend Modes C Mode ame Mes Allowed Deleted Allowed All Records _ PRO CLOSE al al E _ PROUCLOSE al al E Amend Fields C Field Mame Fields Input By SYSTEM Date Time Modification Number 1 g Open Authorized By SYSTEM Date Time I Authorized Specify the following External System Select the relevant external system Based on the maintenance here only the fields that are selected as amendable can be modified if a request comes from the chosen external system The maintenance pertaining to external systems is factory shipped for your bank Source Operation The fr
270. n an SDE for advance interest calculation on the amount withdrawn from the customer account The system takes up all accounts belonging to a product for which the option Advance Interest in Notice Preferences screen is enabled for calculating the Advance Interest For more details on maintaining this SDE refer to the section Maintaining SDEs for Computing Advance Interest in the chapter Maintaining System Data Elements of the Interest and Charges User Manual The following examples describe the calculation of advance interest Example1 Calculation of penalty interest partial utilization In this illustration the withdrawal amount is only partially exhausted through free amounts and notices a ORACLE Credit interest rate 2 00 Penalty Interest rate 0 50 Notice period 90 days Free amount per month 2000 EUR Customer withdraws EUR 8 500 00 on 15 07 2005 without any prior notice The following table describes the calculation of penalty interest in this case 15 07 20 Free 05 Amount 01 08 20 Free 05 Amount 01 09 20 Free 05 Amount 01 10 20 05 Example 2 Notice Amount Basis Free Passed Amount for Amount Penalty Available Calculation 2000 00 8500 00 6500 00 2000 00 6500 00 4500 00 2000 00 4500 00 2000 00 2900 00 500 00 2500 00 Penalty Days 17 15 07 05 until 31 07 05 31 01 08 05 until 31 08 05 30 01 09 05 until 30 09 05 12 Remaining days
271. n you maintain CIF details for customers in the Customer Information Maintenance screen you Can specify the customer group to which the customer belongs for provisioning and status processing You must specify a group code defined for a group type that is the same as the customer type for instance if the customer is a retail customer you must specify a group defined for retail customers Group Status All loans and overdraft accounts issued to customers in the group will be assigned the same status which will be the status of the loan overdraft account with the worst status among those issued to customers in the group The Group CIF and the loan contracts and overdraft accounts are all updated with this worst status if they have been marked for automatic status processing The individual status for the accounts and loan contracts apart from assigning the worst status is also captured and displayed In the Group Code Maintenance screen and the CIF Maintenance screen the status for the group is displayed as well as the date since which the current status came into effect For details about loan status processing and provisioning consult the Loans user manual 8 1 3 Setting up Customer Classifications for Status Processing You can set up the different classifications under which the financial standing of the customer would be considered for status processing You can set up these classifications in the Customer Classification Details s
272. n you maintain a new instruction Account Number Conditions 1 Conditions 2 Conditions 3 Conditions 4 You can select the customer account for which you want to maintain an operating instruction from the available option list Date of Last Maintenance The current system date is also displayed Instructions Specify the instructions to be borne in mind when operating a customer account Conditions At the time of maintaining an instruction you can also specify a condition for displaying the instructions when transactions pertaining to this account are being processed The instruction will be displayed to you when the condition is satisfied 3 1 10 Specifying REG Details You can capture REG details for the account using the REG Details screen To invoke this screen click the REG button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 22 ORACLE The screen is shown below 3 REG Details Web Page Dialog l Reg D Period T Reg D Applicable Start Date Periodicity Monthly End Date Statement Cycle None I Reg CC Availability Reg CC Availability Check this box if the check deposits into this account should be considered for Regulation CC aggregation Reg D Applicable Indicate whether the Regulation D limits are applicable for the account Periodicity If you indicate the periodicity of Regulation D applicability as Statement Cycle the restricted trans
273. nce for the exposure category of the account and the account status Discount Percent If you wish to indicate a specific discount percentage to be applicable for the account you can specify it in the Provisioning Percentage screen If you do not specify any discount percentage the provisioning batch picks up the applicable discount percentage from the Exposure Provisioning Percentage Maintenance for the exposure category of the account and the account status 3 18 ORACLE 3 1 6 Capturing Additional Details You can capture additional details for the account by clicking the following buttons in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen This invokes the Authorized SWIFT BICs for Customer Account screen Deposits This invokes the Deposits screen This invokes the Account Operating Instructions Maintenance screen This invokes the REG Details screen ene Cate This invokes the Status Details screen raaye it This invokes the Products and Transaction Codes Restriction screen Currency Limits This invokes the Limits screen Statement This invokes the Statement Details screen This invokes the Account Limits screen Joint Holder This invokes the Linked Entities screen Instructions Consolidated Charge This invokes the Account Level Consolidated Charges Conditions screen Sern This invokes the Instruction Diary Summary screen Linked Entities This invok
274. nce of an account or group of accounts under a particular account class The account balances indicate the condition of the account for an identified time period 6 1 17 1 Specifying Interim Transactions Report Specify the following Generate Message Check this box to indicate that the accounts belonging to the account class are to be considered for periodic interim statement generation i e M1942 6 28 ORACLE Generate Message Only On Movement Check this box to indicate that the interim statement needs to be generated only if additional entries have been posted subsequent to the previous interim statement generation Report Transaction Since This is a list of all the transactions the accounts under a class have undergone on basis of which the transactions would be reported in the interim account statement You can choose the appropriate values applicable e Previous MT942 This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since previous MT942 would be sent in the current interim statement e Previous MT940 MT950 This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since previous MT940 MT950 would be sent in the current interim statement If this option is selected user will have to specify the cycle of account statement to be considered Minimum Debit Amount and Currency Specify the minimum transaction amount for the debit transaction which is eligible for reporting in the interim statement This amount shoul
275. nd Lodgment Book under it You can also invoke this screen by typing CASLOGBK in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Lodgement Book Maintenance Web Page Dialog Lodgement Book Detail Account Number STO001 First Lodgement Number Number Of Leaves Order Date 7 3 2000 Issue Date 7 3 2000 Order Details FIRST ORDER T Include for Lodgement Printing Input By MURALI Date Time 7 3 2000 15 38 19 Modification Number 1 open Authorized By Date Time Authorized 3 74 ORACLE 3 9 For each request you need to capture the following details Account Number You can specify the account number of the customer account in respect of which the request for the lodgment book was received Start Number for the Lodgment Book You can specify the start number for the leaves in the lodgment book This depends upon your specification in the Bank Wide Parameters in respect of uniqueness of lodgment book numbers The following example illustrates how the specification in the Bank Wide Parameters works In the Bank Wide Parameters you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique for the branch This means that lodgment numbers need to be unique across all accounts of that branch For instance if a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1 and containing 25 leaves you cannot start another book in respect of any other account with these numbers If yo
276. ng CFDTIINT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Tiered Interest Rate Maintenance Web Page Dialog Rate Code Effective Date Currency Tiered Tenor Rates F Tenor From Tenor To O Input Er DateTime Mod Mo Open Authorized by DateTime H Authorized Specify the following details Rate Code Specify the rate code This is a free format 10 character field Effective Date Select the date from which the rate is applicable Effective date cannot be less than the application date and earlier than the existing effective date record However if a new rate code is added the effective date can be less than the application date Currency Specify a valid currency This adjoining option list displays all valid currencies maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Tiered Tenor Rates The following details are displayed 2 60 ORACLE Tenor From This is defaulted as zero for first row and can t be modified For the remaining rows it is displayed as Tenor to of previous row 1 Tenor To Specify the end of the tenor Note the following e Tenor to of the last row should be 9999 e Tenor to should be less than or equal to 9999 Rate If rates are maintained for existing rate code and currency combination for a new effective date then on clicking the P button the rates maintained for the previous
277. ng Deposit Contract screen comprising transaction details o The summary screen will not be displayed if the deposit does not belong to the current branch 9 4 ORACLE E Corporate Deposits Contract Input Web Page Dialog Contract Reference CHOA300001850201 User Reference CHOA4300001850201 Number Outstanding Amount 25000 Product 4300 Source FLEXCUBE Product Description BASIC LD PRODUCT faii Contract Schedules Rollover Preferences Holiday Preferences Customer MARKT Amount 25 000 00 Interest Period Basis nclude Frm Dt v Currency USD Local Currency Equivalent Settlement Details Credit CHO Credit Account INDSBLUSDCI External Reference Debit CHO Debit Account INDSBLUSDCI Number Booking Date 7 3 2000 Liquidation Tax Scheme Value Date 7 3 2000 Auto Remarks Original Start Date Manual Payment Method BEARING Cluster Id Rollover Schedule Type NORMAL C Yes No Size A IAA Events ICCF Effective Rate Settlement Tax MIS Change Log Fields Charges Advices Input By Authorized By Date Time Contract Status iv Authorized MURALI 27 56 MURALI 7 3 2000 11 28 28 Active For more details on the LD Contract Online screen please refer the user manual for Deposits 9 2 4 Viewing FX Details You can view details of all FX contracts for the selected customer through the Customer Position screen The entries are the consolidated amounts for contracts grouped by product branch and currency Doub
278. ning happens to be a Utility Provider you must enable the Utility Provider check box and assign a unique ID to identify the utility provider Additionally you must also indicate whether the check digit validation should be performed for the consumer number that is captured while making bill payment for the utility provider If the check digit validation should be performed you must also identify the Algorithm ID which is to be used to perform the check digit validation on the consumer number 2 2 4 3 Indicating Requirement for Consolidated Tax Certificate You need to indicate whether a consolidated tax certificate is required for all transactions done for a given tax cycle This option would work in conjunction with a similar option in the Tax Category screen and the Tax Details screen accessed from the Branch Parameters Detail screen 2 2 4 4 Generating Consolidated Tax Certificate Depending on the frequency maintained at the branch level the system will generate the Consolidated Tax Certificate for a customer provided the consolidated tax certificate generation is required at the customer level and the option is maintained at the Tax Category level The Tax Certificate will be in a pre shipped advice format and printed on a Year to Date basis 2 2 4 5 Specifying Head Office Account Number The Head Office Account Number is the customer s account number with the Head Office of your bank You need to capture this value only if the Customer T
279. nsaction Code Txn Description Debit Credit The restrictions can be based on e Products e Transaction Codes 6 27 ORACLE Validation of Restrictions During maintenance or online operations in the respective contract screens for the restricted transactions when you specify the customer account the system checks whether the account class used by the specified account is restricted for the product that has been selected or the debit credit transaction type If so an override is sought when such contracts are saved 6 1 17 Maintaining Details of Account Statements Generation To receive the details of account balances you need to capture the relevant information in the MT 941 MT942 message The account balance details can be linked to the message by employing the statement screen To invoke this screen click on the Statement button in the account class maintenance screen You need to specify the details for an MT 941 MT942 message 3 Interim and Balance Report Web Page Dialog Interim Transactions Report Generate Message TIMES I Generate Message only on Movement Report Transactions Since Of a Minimum Debit Amounts E Minimum Credit Amounts C Currency Amount E iDO Currency Amount Balance Report Generate Balance TIMES Report Transactions Since Of This screen contains the details necessary for the account generation parameters The message details the bala
280. nstruction as e Open e Closed Customer number Select a Customer number from the list to view the instructions maintained for that customer The following details of the record get displayed e Authorization Status 6 43 ORACLE e Record Status e Instruction Details o This facility is generic for all the screens but you can make modifications for these instructions but for mashreg these instructions once authorized can neither be modified nor be deleted 6 1 26 Maintaining Location Details While maintaining Customer Information details through the CIF Maintenance screen in addition to indicating the name of the country in which your customer resides you can also choose to specify the name of the region or locality where your customer stays For instance Silas Marner a customer of your bank is a Londoner Great Britain is his country of residence He lives in the northern part of London therefore North London becomes the location where he resides Location codes along with a brief description of the locality can be maintained through the Location Details maintenance screen Invoke the Location Maintenance screen by typing STDCULOC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button e Location Maintenance Web Page Dialog Location Code LK2 Description desc12 Fields Input By BISHNU Date Time 7 3 2000 14 47 45 Modification Number 2 iv
281. nt Standing Instructions Linked Entities Text Fields Image CLS Restrictions MT920 Domestic Professional Issuer Maker Date Time Mod No E Authorized Checker Date Time A Open In this screen you can maintain the following details for a corporate or bank type customer Name Specify the full name of the main office of the Corporate Bank customer National ID Specify the corporate National Identification Number of this customer in other words the registration number of your customer organization 2 2 9 1 Specifying Incorporation Details Date Specify the date on which the customer s company was registered as an organization Country Specify the Country of registration of the office of the corporate 2 21 ORACLE Currency of Amounts Specify the Currency in which you specify the particular customer s various financial details like the Net worth of the customer organization the total Paid Up capital etc Description of Business Specify the nature of the business and the business activities carried out by the customer organization Directors Specify the list of the names of the Board of Directors of the organization 2 2 10 Specifying Details in Director Tab Invoking Director Information Screen Click on the Director tab from the Customer Maintenance screen The following screen will be displayed Customer Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer No Full Name Individual
282. nt Branch Only 7 Relationship Address Query Accounts Loans Deposits FX FT Contract Details fs Branch Product Description Currency Balance Debit Credit Indicator Collateral Accounting From Date To Date Transaction Date Value Date Double clicking a record displays the Loan Contracts Summary screen comprising a summary of transactions contributing to the balance displayed in the Customer Position screen The balance displayed is the outstanding principal amount for the Loan product This screen also displays MM contracts that is MM borrowings are displayed under the Deposits tab and MM Placements are displayed under Loans Double clicking a record in the Loans Contract Summary screen displays the corresponding Loan Contract screen comprising transaction details o The summary screen will not be shown for contracts that do not belong to the current branch E Corporate Deposits Contract Input Web Page Dialog Contract Reference CHO4300001850201 User Reference CHOA300001850201 Number Outstanding Amount 25000 Product 4300 Source FLEXCUBE Product Description BASIC LD PRODUCT P Contract Schedules Rollover Preferences Holiday Preferences Customer MARKT Amount 25 000 00 Interest Period Basis Include Frm Dt v Currency USD Local Currency Equivalent Settlement Details Credit CHO Credit Account INDSBLUSDCI External Reference Debit CHO Debit Account INDSBLUSDCI Number Booking Date 7 3 2000
283. nt during each liquidation event You can opt to move the interest to an Unclaimed Interest GL When claimed the interest can be paid out of this GL Similarly on maturity the principal can be moved to specified Principal Liquidation Account if specified or to an Unclaimed Principal GL Note the following If you select the Move to Unclaimed GL option this specification takes precedence That is on maturity the funds will be moved directly to the respective Unclaimed GLs even if customer accounts for the principal and interest have been maintained The Unclaimed Interest and Principal GLs are specified while maintaining an Interest and Charges IC Deposit Type product The Accounting Roles for the GLs are INT UNCLAIMED and PRN_UNCLAIMED respectively When maintaining an IC Deposit type product you have to map these Accounting Roles to the appropriate GLs maintained at your bank 5 43 ORACLE 5 4 9 Maintaining TD Paying Parameters for Account In case you have specified that the TD Payin be done by GL you need to maintain the GL details through the TD Payin Parameters screen You can also invoke this screen by typing STDTDPAY in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Term Deposit Payin Parameters Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch Code 006 Payin Option Payin by GL General Ledger Code 459501126 Input By SCRIPT4 Date Time
284. ntries for the differential amount are passed or written back into the GLs associated with the NORM normal status 8 1 7 4 Maintaining Accounting Entries for Provisioning The computed provision amount is stored and displayed in the Amount Tab in the Customer Account Maintenance The current status and exposure category of the account is also stored along with the balances For account provisioning accounting entries are passed for the following e Changes in provisioning amount without status change e Reversal of provisioning amount as a result of status change 8 15 ORACLE Accounting Entries for Changes in Provision Amount without Change in Status The entries passed for new provisions or increase of provision amount Dr Expense GL Cr Provisioning GL Entries for decrease in provision amount Dr Provisioning GL Cr Reintegration GL Accounting entries for change in status with without changes in provision Amount and with the Rebook Provision option applicable In this case the existing entries are reversed into a reintegration GL and new provisioning entries are booked provided the Rebook Provision on Status Change option has been set for the new status of the account In this case the following entries would be passed For reversal of provision amount Dr Provisioning GL Cr Reintegration GL For booking of new provision amount Dr Expense GL Cr Provisioning GL 8 16 ORACLE 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9
285. nts refer the following section 3 63 ORACLE 3 1 29 Viewing Cards Details Click Cards button to view details about debit cards issued against the account e eae Summary Screen Webpage Dialog Branch Code Customer No Account Mo L Authorisation Status Record Status Branch Code Request Reference Number Card Number Customer No Account No Card p Here you can view the following details Branch Code The branch code is displayed from the main Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Customer No The customer identification code CIF of the account holder is displayed from the main Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Account No The account number is displayed from the main Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Authorisation Status Indicate the authorisation status of the debit card by selecting one of the following values e Authorised e Unauthorised Record Status Indicate the record status of the debit card by selecting one of the following values e Open e Closed 3 64 ORACLE Branch Code The system displays the branch code where the debit card has been issued Request Reference Number The system displays the request reference number of the card issuance record Card Number The system displays the debit card number of the card holder Multiple cards can be issued to a customer 3 1 30 Maintaining Sweep Instructions You can view and modify the sweep instruct
286. nts would be used for processing the selected type of transaction For instance assume that for the account A1 you have allowed Dr for the product ABCD This would mean that if a Dr entry for the product ABCD is passed to the account A1 it would go through but in case a Cr entry is passed for this product then the system will display a message indicating that the transaction is restricted for the account Description The system displays the description for the product code that which you have specified Dr During transaction processing the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the account based on either product and or transaction code If you have indicated to allow Dr Transactions for the product ABCD and attempt to post a credit entry the system will seek an override You can continue the transaction despite the restrictions by providing appropriate reasons for the same During maintenance or online operations in the respective contract screens for the restricted transactions when you specify the customer account the system checks whether the account is restricted for the product that has been selected or the debit credit transaction type If so an override is sought when such contracts are saved Cr During transaction processing the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the account based on either product and or transaction code If you have indicated to allow Dr transactions f
287. nts to withdraw an amount more than the Free Amount from his her account 6 38 ORACLE Validity Period Specify the notice validity period in number of days During this period a customer of the account class can do the withdrawal of the amount for which he she notified the bank 6 1 24 Maintaining Narratives The Narrative Maintenance screen allows you to define the format of a Detailed Account Statement Invoke the Narrative Maintenance screen by typing CSDSTNAR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button If you are defining the details of a new record choose new from the Actions Menu or click new icon from the toolbar The Narrative Maintenance screen is displayed without any details eS Statement Narratives Maintenance Web Page Dialog Module LD Narrative Details l order Narratives O 1 LRTX1 C 2 LRTX6C Narrative Type Narrative Tax Event Charge Interest Commission Transaction Language Details O Language Description _ GER Fields Input By BRIJ1 Date Time 7 3 2000 12 20 49 Modification Number 3 Authorized By BRIJ1 Date Time 7 3 2000 12 20 51 I Open I Authorized After you have entered all the details of a record save the record using one of the following methods e Click Save icon in the toolbar e Select Save from the Actions Menu While m
288. nvolving specific customers for which the requisite messages need to be sent on booking the contract itself whereas posting of accounting entries must be deferred to the debit value date You can indicate whether such a facility of allowing message generation before accounting is available for the customer in the FT Accounting As Of field You have the following options for accounting for FT contracts e Accounting as of message date accounting entries will be posted on the date of message generation e Debit Value Date accounting entries will be posted on the debit value date 2 2 6 Maintaining Personal Details of Individual Customers If your customer for whom you have defined parameters in the CIF basic screen is an individual you also have to maintain the personal details in order to determine the credit line Click the Personal tab from the CIF Maintenance screen to maintain these details B Cikipmer ainienasce Wah Pape Mallig Dasim Mamie e a i chori Hera TUE Emeh ioe CHJ Man dandewy Personal Comrat Dirado Legal Ciaran Teme Co Garis 1160 Ciaran FATHER Lra Birga bih Liia d Subs Age Proal Ay Prespor beads F supgi Parris aiii e Be TE Dahe U Lee mup MES Joint Stencing keira Linded Entes Ted Pests mep CLS Resm ioen TSS Domenie Protector emua Cards Change Log 2 15 ORACLE In this screen you can maintain generic personal details of a customer In addition you can also
289. o all accounts in this class such as the General Ledger lines to which the accounts in this class report to facilities granted to the account holders pass book check book ATM etc In the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen where you open accounts for the customers of your bank each customer account is linked to an account class and the attributes defined for the account class are by default applicable to the customer account For instance if the frequency of account statement generation has been defined as daily for an account class CU COR the system generates statements for all accounts under this class on a daily basis However some of the parameters defined for the account class can be revised at the account level for any of the accounts linked to the class Account level parameters will supersede those defined for the account class While defining the account classes you should also keep in mind that the interest rate structure is also specified for an account class in the Interest and Charges module The account class table is maintained at the Bank Level by the Head Office branch i ORACLE 6 1 2 Invoking Account Class Maintenance Screen You can invoke the Account Class Maintenance screen by typing STDACCLS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Account Class Maintenance Web Page Dialog Account Class Description Account Code
290. o an Unclaimed account if it remains unclaimed at the end of the tenor 5 4 33 Manual Receipt of Installments You have the option of allowing manual receipt of instalments Invoke the Recurring Deposit Payments screen from the application browser You can also invoke this screen by typing ICDPMNTS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button a Recurring Deposit Payment Input Webpage Dialog Sc RD Account Details Branch Code Transaction Date RD Account Number Maturity Date Installment Amount CEY krh E Payment Details Payment Branch Code Payment Account Number Product Code Exchange Rate Payment Currency Payment Amount Minimum Payment Amount Paid Amount RD Account Payments Due Date Installment Amount Payment Date Due Days Events Fields Input By Date Time Modification Number a Authorized Authorized By Date Time H open On invoking the recurring deposit payments screen all the outstanding and future installments You can choose to pay any multiple of the installment amount To do this the system will clear all the overdue amounts first and then allocate the amounts to current and future installments RD Account Details Maturity date The system defaults the maturity date of the recurring deposit account on selecting the recurring deposit account 5 139 ORACLE Installment amount The system defaults the installment amount for
291. o the head office or a designated branch for a group of counterparties belonging to the same group All transactions meant to be settled on a particular day that are made before cut off day are collated netted and a single payment message is sent which called Netting days in Oracle FLEXCUBE Here you specify the FX netting customer to whom the netted FX message shall be sent For customers not belonging to any group the FX netting customer will be the same as the customer of the maintenance Withholding Tax Pct Specify the percentage of tax that should be withheld from the interest that is paid to the bank by the customer This witholding tax percent is dictated by the country of the customer This is applicable for Bearing and Amortized loan contracts also Specifying Exposure Category and Provisioning Details for Customers When you maintain CIF details for customers in the Customer Maintenance screen you can specify the following exposure category details e Customer group to which the customer belongs for provisioning and status processing You must specify a group code defined for a group type that is the same as the customer type for instance if the customer is a retail customer you must specify a group defined for retail customers e Exposure category under which exposure due to loans issued to the CIF and the accounts of the CIF will be tracked The exposure category is derived by the End of Day batch program and di
292. o which the account belongs for which you are defining special conditions is displayed in this field Product You must identify the consolidated charge product using which the applicable charges would be consolidated The charges would be consolidated in the currency defined for the selected consolidated charge product and this currency is displayed on the screen 3 45 ORACLE When you opt for a consolidated charge product all the consolidated charge parameters defined for the selected product are defaulted to the account for which the product has been linked You can change the default in respect of the following parameters e Minimum and maximum charge e Discount percentage and discount amount 3 1 20 Currency The charges would be consolidated in the currency defined for the selected consolidated charge product and this currency is displayed on the screen Minimum You must indicate the minimum charge that can be applied for the account Maximum You must indicate the maximum charge that can be applied for the account Open By default each charge consolidation charge setup that you set up is enabled and active You can also disable the setup by checking the Open box Waive Charges You can choose to waive consolidated charges for an account Discount Amount In this field you can indicate the flat discount amount if any which would be applicable for the consolidated charge calculated for the account After the disco
293. ociate with a customer you can specify the relationship that the customer shares with the group 2 2 24 2 Specifying Shareholding Details You can maintain percentages of shareholding of your individual customers in a corporate entity which is also your customer When maintaining customer details of the corporate entity you can capture names and shareholding percentages of your individual customers who hold shares in the corporate entity When you query in Oracle FLEXCUBE for limits utilizations for any such individual customer your exposure to the corporate entities is also displayed Example Silas Marner and Keith Butler are individual customers and they have contracts and accounts with your bank Parivallal Express Limited Gem Granites Limited and Assorted Chemicals Limited are your corporate customers 2 40 ORACLE Silas Marner has a shareholding in Parivallal Express Limited and Gem Granites Limited Keith Butler has a shareholding in Gem Granites Limited and Assorted Chemicals Limited While querying limits for Silas Marner your exposure to Parivallal Express Limited and Gem Granites Limited is displayed along with your exposure to Silas Marner You can choose to drill down any of the exposures to see the specific line details and contracts However if you query for exposure to Parivallal Express Limited or Gem Granites Limited your exposure to Silas Marner is not displayed Click Ok button to save the details that yo
294. ociated with the particular account number specified You can also select the customer from the option list provided Account Currency Specify the currency for the deposit account You can also select the currency from the option list provided Account Class Specify the account class to which the selected customer belongs You can also select the account class from the option list provided Description Specify a brief description of the account class of the customer for whom the simulated account is maintained Customer Name The name of the selected customer for whom the account Is simulated is displayed here based on the customer selected To default the details of the customer associated to the particular simulated account click the Default button Status The status of the simulated account is displayed here based on the customer selected First Nominees Specify the first person to hold the right to the simulated account balance after the customer s expiration 5 132 ORACLE DCN The Delivery Control Number used for uniquely identifying a message in Oracle FLEXCUBE is displayed here Second Nominees Specify the secondary person to hold the rights to the simulated account balance after the customer s expiration Account Open Date The date on which the account has to be opened is defaulted based on the account class selected here You can however change the value of the opening date of account Media
295. od Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDNTPRD at the top right corner of the application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 69 ORACLE Notice Period Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch Code 501 Account Mo 100031 Initiation Date 107 2008 Default Notice ID S01 ZNTCOB2 750008 Activation Date 12 51 2008 Validity Period 10 End Date iAO0 2009 Notice Amount 2000 00 Fields Input By HAMS Date Time 10 1 2008 19 56 58 Modification Number 1 w Open Authorized By HANS Date Time 104 2008 19 56 59 E authorized The following details are captured in this screen Branch Code The current branch code is defaulted here Account Number Specify the account number for which you wish to maintain the notice period Initiation Date Specify the date on which the notice is initiated After specifying the initiation date click Default to display the Notice Id Activation Date Validity Period End Date and Notice Amount The system defaults the following fields based on the Notice Preferences you maintain at the Customer Account level Activation Date The activation date gets defaulted based on the account number and initiation date entered This is the date from which the notice period becomes active However you can modify this date Validity Period The validity period of the notice as maintained in the Notice Preferences screen at the account level gets defaul
296. ode of redemption from the following options e Full Redemption In this case you can redeem the complete deposit balance of the account On save the redemption amount will be equal to the account balance Full redemption will update the status of the deposit amount as closed On complete redemption interest along with principal is redeemed The redemption amount is equal to the total of principle and interest amounts subtracted by penalty and tax amounts e Partial Redemption In this case you have to specify the redemption amount Ensure that that the redemption amount is less than the account balance On partial redemption only the principal amount is withdrawn where as the interest amount is liquidated only on liquidation cycle Redemption Amount Specify the redemption amount for the partial redemption Ensure that that the redemption amount is less than the account balance On partial redemption only the principal amount is withdrawn where as the interest amount is liquidated only on liquidation cycle Waive Penalty Check this field to waive any penalty related to the deposit redemption Country Specify the country of the bank that issues the cheque This adjoining option list displays all valid country codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Renewal Tenor Days Specify number of days for the renewal of term deposit Months Specify number of months for the renewal of term deposit Years Specify num
297. oining option list The following options are given o Cheque o Others If you want the pay in option for the TD to be Cheque it needs to be specified here before populating the account class as the start date of the account will be the fund available date of the cheque If the pay in option is Cheque you need to specify the following details based on which the fund available date is derived ORACLE Cheque Instrument No Specify the cheque instrument number Cheque Date Specify the date of issue of the cheque Clearing Type Specify the clearing type for the transaction The adjoining option list displays a list of the clearing types maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Pneumonic Code Specify the transaction pneumonic code for the instrument type The adjoining option list displays all the valid pneumonic codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Drawee Account Number Specify the drawee account number Routing No Specify the Routing number 5 3 1 Main tab Click on Main tab to capture term deposit related details TD Accounts Maintenance Web Page Dialog Pay In Option Branch Code Customer No Pay in by Term Deposit Account Customer Name Clearing Type Number Term Deposit Currency Cheque Instrument No Cheque Date Mnemonic Code SD User Reference Account Class Small Account Number Drawee Account Number Routing
298. omer Number from the list of values maintained Customer Name The name of the customer is displayed here Instruction Id Unique ID for the instruction is displayed here Instruction Date Specify the date on which the instruction is added You can select the date from the adjoining calendar Instruction Expiry Date Specify the date on which the instruction will expire You can select the date from the adjoining calendar Instruction Description Specify the description of the Actual Instruction 6 1 25 1 Viewing Customer Instructions All the instructions maintained in the Instructions Maintenance screen can be viewed in the Customer Instructions View screen To invoke this screen specify the Customer number Contract reference number or Account number and press the hotkey F6 If F6 is pressed from customer account number field system fetches all the instructions of customer of the selected customer account If F6 is pressed from a contract reference number field system fetches all the instructions of the counterparty of the contract If F6 is pressed from customer field system fetches all the instructions of customer of the selected customer os ORACLE Customer Instructions View Customer Number E032000115 Customer Name SAIDEEPI Instructions Details Inatruction Id Instruction Description Instruction Date natruction Expiry Date 1 Testing Instructions 2007 11 27
299. omer is DOW Corporation US You can assign him a code which could either be a number representing the customer s serial number or an alphabetic code like DowCorp or an alphanumeric code like Dow1000US or DowUS1000 1000DowUS if he is the 1000th customer to approach your bank ORACLE Short Name Along with the Customer Code you have to capture the customer s abbreviated name The description that you capture is unique for each customer It helps in conducting a quick alpha search or generating queries regarding the customer Enter the abbreviated name of the customer using a maximum of 20 characters alphanumeric Taking the same example assume your customer is DOW Corporation Its short name could be DOWCORP At the time of processing of transactions and in any activity which requires entry of the customer identification in addition to the customer code the short name of the customer that you enter here will be available in the options list from which the customer is selected Liability Number The credit facility granted to any customer is tracked against this Liability Number of the customer The default liability number of a customer is the same as his customer code However you have the option of tracking the credit limit of this customer against an existing liability number for another customer Thus if the liability number of the customer is the same as the customer s code it implies that the liability granted to
300. omers between whom a relationship is to be established All authorized customers of your bank will be available in the option lists provided Relation Specify the type of relationship that exists between the selected customers 1 amp 2 All authorized relation types maintained through the Relation Maintenance screen will be available in the option list provided You can select the appropriate name from this list This linkage of customers will be used for taking exposure report for the customer If you maintain a linkage between Customer and Customer2 the system will automatically establish a linkage of Customer2 with Customer1 After you maintain a linkage between two customers you are not allowed to change the customers involved in the linkage However you can alter the relationship that exists between them Only one type of relationship can exist between any two customers The following example will illustrate the manner in which you can maintain relationship details between customers and the need for the same Example John Doe is customer of you bank He is running a business named John Doe Building Contractors He is married to Jane Doe but is separated He now lives with Mary Bloggs In addition he also has a partnership with Jack Black and another partnership with Joe Green In order to establish a relationship between the above individuals you have to maintain each individual as a customer in Oracle FLEXCUBE In the C
301. on to invoke the Reg Details screen You can specify the Regulation D applicability details in this screen Z REG Details Web Page Dialog I Reg D Applicable Reg D Periodicity Monthly Statement Cycle None If you indicate the periodicity of Regulation D applicability as Statement Cycle the restricted transactions would be counted over the primary statement cycle defined for the account class 6 33 ORACLE The Regulation D applicability details specified for an account class would default to all accounts using the class However you can make changes to these details when you set up a customer account that uses the account class 6 1 19 Assigning Preferred Branches Currencies and Customers In addition to what you have specified in the Account Class Maintenance screen you have the option of specifying the following for an accounts class e List of allowed or disallowed branches and allowed or disallowed currencies e List of allowed and disallowed customer categories and allowed and disallowed customers You can specify the branch and currency preferences through the Account Class Branch and Currency Preferences screen Click Branches Currencies in the Account Class Maintenance screen The Account Class Branch and Currency Preferences screen will be displayed E Account Class Branch and Currency Preferences Web Page Dialog Account Class TIMDP6 Description Term
302. on will continue to remain checked till the last request is also cancelled After cancellation of the last stop payment instruction the option gets updated unchecked immediately Dormant The system updates this status for an account based on the dormancy days specified in the Account Class Maintenance screen Posting Allowed If checked indicates that the account class being created is to be used while creating IRA monetary accounts Monetary accounts used for IRA need to be distinguished from the other accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE so that these accounts do not come up for posting in the other Oracle FLEXCUBE screens Viewing Status Details Status At the time of maintaining a customer account for the first time the account status will be NORM Normal by default The Status Since field will display the current system date i e the date on which the account is maintained in the system The system will update the status whenever a status change occurs Therefore at any point of time this field will display the current status of the account The Since field will reflect the date on which the account moves to the current status Subsequently the system will default the value of CIF Status as available in the Customer Maintenance screen This status is the worst status among all the loans savings accounts and current accounts for the customer in the current branch This is done if you have opted for status pro
303. or a year instructs you not to debits his account till his return You can execute this instruction by checking this box No Credits No credits can be posted to the customer account by enabling the check box positioned next to this field Frozen If you have frozen a customer account in the Customer Information Maintenance Basic screen the accounts gets frozen For instance at the behest of a court order the status of the account is reflected here in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 3 5 ORACLE 3 1 2 1 Status Change Automatic This specification will be defaulted from the account class to which the account belongs However you have the option of changing it at the customer account level If you check this option the status of the account will be changed automatically by the system as per the conditions maintained in the Status Rule Definition screen invoked from the Account Class Maintenance screen If you do not select this option you have to change the status manually through the Manual Status Change screen Stop Payments For Stop Payments if in the CASA module a stop payment instruction is issued for a check or an amount against the account number the system automatically enables the Stop Payment check box When the stop payment instruction is withdrawn the status gets updated accordingly If a customer has requested for stop payment of multiple cheques the Stop Payment opti
304. or the product ABCD and attempt to post a credit entry the system will seek an override You can continue the transaction despite the restrictions by providing appropriate reasons for the same During maintenance or online operations in the respective contract screens for the restricted transactions when you specify the customer account the system checks whether the account is restricted for the product that has been selected or the debit credit transaction type If so an override is sought when such contracts are saved 3 26 ORACLE 3 1 12 2 Specifying Transaction Restriction Special Condition By default the restrictions maintained at the account class level will be displayed here When you define transaction code or product restriction attributes for an account itself rather than for the account class to which it belongs it is referred to as a Special Condition You can apply special conditions by selecting the option Special Condition Applicable at the account level If you opt to define special conditions for an account the restrictions defined for the Account Class to which the account belongs will NOT apply to this account If you wish to continue with the account class restrictions opt for Special Condition Not Applicable Restriction Type Specify the restriction type here The options available are e Allowed If you select this the products entered in the multi entry block will be allowed for that cu
305. ort Web Page Dialog Interim Transactions Report Generate Message Debit Amount I Generate Message Only On Credit Amount Movement ae i Statement Count For the Day Report Transactions Since r Balance Generate Balance Report Report Transactions Since v This screen contains the details necessary for the account generation parameters The message details the balance of the customer account that is under a particular account class The account balances indicate the condition of the customer account for an identified time period 3 1 27 1 Specifying Interim Transactions Report Generate Message Check this box to indicate that the periodic interim statement MT942 generation is required for the account This will be defaulted from Account Class Maintenance screen However you can modify it The Consolidated Statement and Generate Message are mutually restricted Generate Message Only on Movement Check this box to indicate that the interim statement generation is required only if additional entries have been posted subsequent to the previous interim statement generation This will be defaulted from Account Class screen however you can modify it Report Transaction Since This section lists all the transactions of the interim account statement which are supposed to be reported This will be defaulted from Account Class screen however you can modify it You can choose the appropriate val
306. ort screen This report displays the Term deposit accounts which are closed for the given period T TD Account Closed Report Webpage Dialog Branch Code From Date To Date Account Class Customer Specify the following details From Date The TD accounts closed from this date Current application date is defaulted To Date The TD accounts closed till this date Current application date is defaulted Branch Code Specify the branch code from the list of values provided Account Class Specify the account class from the list of values provided Customer Specify the customer number from the list of values provided 12 3 ORACLE The generated report will contain the following elements Field Name Field Description Account No Deposit No TD account Number Name of the TD account holder Closed Date TD account closed date Amount of Deposit Deposit Amount Opening Date Opening date of the TD account 2 3 4 5 Reason for Closure Display the Narrative which is captured during the TD Redemption For auto closed account this will be blank Proceeds credit to This will show the Payment Mode of the Redemption Total Interest Amount paid Interest Amount This will show the actual interest amount which has been paid to the customer Maturity Amount This will show the sum of Deposit amount and Interest Amount Product Code Account Class code of the TD account Product Title Account Clas
307. ose the appropriate one Limit Amount Specify the limit amount of the buyer This amount is expressed in the currency of the limit Remarks Specify remarks about the entry The maximum length of the remarks can be of 2000 characters 2 54 ORACLE Buyer ID Specify a valid customer id of the buyer This adjoining option list displays all valid customer id of the buyer of the bank maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Buyer name Name of the Buyer gets displayed on selection of the buyer id Policy Expiry date Select the expiry date of the policy In this screen you can maintain records for the exporter buyer and currency combination If the bank wants to maintain buyer limits in INR then you have to maintain currency in the record as INR You can view the buyer details for the exporter belonging to the current branch Operations on ECGC Limits Screen You can perform any one of the following operations in the ECGC Buyer wise Limits Maintenance screen e Creating a new record e Unlocking an existing record e Deleting a record e Closing a record e Opening a record e Querying a record 2 3 8 1 Querying ECGC Buyer wise Limits Details You can query and view an existing record of the buyer wise ECGC limits in the ECGC Buyer wise Limits Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing STSECGC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the ad
308. ou can then capture the values for these UDFs The UDFs that are displayed in the Customer Maintenance screen depend on your selections in the UDF in Base Table screen A maximum of five UDFs can be made to appear in Customer Maintenance screen Refer the manual on User Defined Fields for details on defining a user defined field and associating the UDF with the function id STDCIF The values that you enter for the UDFs will be validated against the rules maintained for them If the entries fail the validations the system will display a suitable message to inform you that the entries made do not adhere to the rules maintained The UDFs will be displayed in the Customer Maintenance Summary screen as well You will also be allowed to perform queries based on these fields Special Customer Grouping While maintaining the customer information you can place a customer under a special customer group for different rating purposes Through the Special_ Status user defined field UDF you can link the customer to a group and specify the rating for the group nid ORACLE Whenever a contract is booked for such a customer the system will display an alert message specifying the status of the customer thereby you can apply the new rates specified for such customers The steps involved for including the SPECIAL_STATUS UDF in customer maintenance are as follows 1 Create a new user defined field SPECIAL STATUS 2 Link it to the
309. ou will not be allowed to enter the following keywords in an Algorithm Rule e ROLLBACK e COMMIT e DECLARE e DELETE e UPDATE e INSERT Once defined you will not be allowed to unlock and amend the following fields e Algorithm Rule e Algorithm Description e Function Type You can refer the Clearing user manual for more information 6 47 ORACLE 6 1 28 Maintaining Turnover Limits You can maintain turnover limits for a given period of time using the Turnover Limit Maintenance screen You can attach these limits to an account class and thereby track the turnover on all accounts under the account class You can invoke the Turnover Limit Maintenance screen by typing STDTOLMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Z Turnover Limit Maintenance Webpage Dialog Limit Code Description Period Details C Period Code Start Date End Date Limit Amount Details CI curren cy Amount Maker Date Time Mod No a Authorized Checker Date Time a Open Here you need to specify the following details Limit Code Specify a unique code used to identify turnover limit Description Specify a brief description associated with the turnover limit Period Details You can specify the following details pertaining to the period for limit application Period Code Specify a unique code to identify the financial period for which you
310. ould select allowed or disallowed depending upon the length of the list Maintaining Currency Preferences For all accounts under this account class you have the option of specifying currencies in which transactions are allowed disallowed Example You want to restrict all account level transactions under the account class Corporations for corporate type accounts to four important currencies only say USD GBP JPY and DEM You can specify the same But currency preference needs to be accompanied by specifications regarding the minimum balance limit in each currency To do this click the Currency Preference button The Account Class Currency Preferences screen will be displayed FY Account Class Currency Preferences Webpage Dialog Account Class Currency Preferences F b L O Alowed Minimum Balance ATM Cash Limit ATM Transaction Limit Minimum Opening Balance Account Opening Charges al 6 35 ORACLE All the allowed currencies you have defined for this account class will be displayed in the Allowed column You can enter the minimum balance that should be maintained against each currency You can also specify the minimum amount that should be deposited at account opening This value should not be less than the minimum balance for the currency Additionally you can specify charges that should be levied against each currency for opening a customer account 6 1 22 Maintaining Customer Preferences Instead of
311. ount in the current branch will be displayed in this screen in the Charge Booking Account field However you have the option of booking charge to a different account belonging to another branch also The accounts maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the adjoining option list You can select the appropriate account Charges will then be liquidated into the selected account Rate Chart Allowed Check this box if you do not want to allow floating rate code during Term Deposit account creation Checking this box ensures the maintenance of the LD MM rate for the Term Deposit Interest Statement You can also indicate if you would like to generate an interest statement for the account The Interest Statement will furnish the values of the SDEs and UDEs and the interest rule that applies on the account Dr Cr Advices You can indicate whether you want to generate an interest liquidation advice for a customer account Check the Debit Credit Advices box to indicate that the system must generate payment advices when interest liquidation happens on an account The advices are generated in the existing SWIFT or and MAIL format No advices will be generated if you leave this box unchecked The preference you have made in the Customer Account Class screen will be defaulted here However you can choose to change your preference to generate or suppress these Advices Interest Start Date For the account for which you
312. ount number of the counter party for the pay out Counter Party Branch Specify the branch of the counter party for the pay out Counter Party Bank Code Specify the bank code of the counter party for the pay out Counter Party Account Name Specify the account name of the counter party for the pay out Clearing Branch Specify the clearing branch of the counter party for the pay out Percentage Specify the percentage of the counter party for the pay out Currency Specify the currency of the counter party for the pay out TD Amount Specify the TD amount for the pay out Customer Bank Code Specify the bank code of the customer for the pay out Customer Account Number Specify the account number of the customer for the pay out Transaction Currency Specify the transaction currency of the customer for the pay out Transaction Amount Specify the transaction amount of the customer for the pay out Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the pay out 5 130 ORACLE Passport IC Number Specify the account number of the beneficiary for the pay out Narrative Specify the description for the pay out Address Specify the address of the beneficiary for the pay out Simulating Customer Term Deposit Account Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to stimulate Term Deposits in order to enhance sales and services to new and existing customers You can also provide the customer a certificate with all the details of Time De
313. ount with the worst status among the accounts and loans belonging to the group You can set up such customer groups for tracking exposure due to loans as well as overdraft customer accounts in the Group Code Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDGRMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Group Code Maintenance Web Page Dialog DER Group Type Corporate Group Code Retail Description Charge Exposure Category Clearing Group Status Tax Since User ACCESS Fields Input By Date Time Modification Number WF suthorized Authorized By Date Time H open Each group code that you define is associated with an appropriate exposure category that must be used to track exposure due to loans issued to customers in the group as well as customer accounts with outstanding overdrafts The exposure category for a group is either derived from the logic maintained in the Exposure Type Category Linkage maintenance for the group type or explicitly specified If it is derived it is displayed in this screen by the End of Day batch program The type of the group indicates the type of customers that belong to the group retail corporate Charge Clearing Tax or User Access If no logic has been maintained in the Exposure Type Category Linkage for the group type you can indicate the applicable exposure category for the group 8 2 ORACLE Group Code Whe
314. pes mentioned above Account Code As per your bank s requirement you can choose to classify account classes into different account codes The bank can decide the manner in which the account classes are to be assigned to different account codes An account code can consist of a maximum of four characters Depending on the customer account mask maintained the value in the account code field would be used during the generation of customer account numbers through the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen If you have decided to include account code as part of the customer account number in the account number mask then at the time of creating a new customer account number you will need to select the account class for the account number being generated In the option list provided the account class is displayed along with the associated account code When the account number gets populated it is the account code that forms a part of the customer account number Start Date Specify the date from which the account class should become active using the adjoining calendar You will be able to create accounts under this account class from this date End Date You can also specify the life span of the account class by indicating the end date The end date for an account class refers to the termination date after which creation of new account under the account class Is disallowed Consequently the option list for Account Class in all fu
315. posit account This TD certificate is generated with a pre printed number You can simulate a term deposit account for a customer using the Customer Accounts Simulation screen The details of a term deposit can be entered in this screen and a printed certificate of the TD account is obtained by using this screen To invoke this screen type STDSCSAC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button 3 Customer Accounts Simulation Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Currency Account Number Account Class Customer Description Customer Name Default Status First Nominees DCN Second Nominees Account Open Date Media Type Single Clearing Bank Code Joint Clearing Account Number Alternate Account Number Generate Certificate View Certificate Deposit Interest 5 131 ORACLE In this screen you can input all the details of the Deposit account A term deposit account is simulated based on all the information you provide in the screen above You can also view and generate the details of the term deposit account certificate of the account Addtionally you can view the details of interest charges and amounts for the simulated TD account Branch Specify the branch where the deposit account is simulated Account Number The account number of the customer for whom you need to simulate a deposit account is displayed here Customer Specify the customer ass
316. r Inward Clearing Interest Charges Track Accrued Interest Debt Credit Advices Posting Allowed Lodgment Book Interest Statement Available Balance Check Required Referral Required Status Change automatic Integrated Liquidity Management ATM Facility Daylight Limit SB TDS Certificate Required For further details refer the Current and Savings Account chapter titled in the Messaging System User Manual 5 4 20 2 Setting up IC Rule The below mentioned UDE are defined in IC rule for tax formula e TDS RATE e CESS RATE Formula for IC rule is defined as follows Formula 1 Credit Interest formula 5 74 ORACLE DLY_ NET VD _BAL gt 0 DLY_NET_VD_BAL INT_RATE DAYS YEAR 100 Formula 2 TDS formula FORMULA1 gt 0 FORMULA1 TDS_RATE 100 Formula 3 Cess formula FORMULA2 gt 0 FORMULA2 CESS_RATE 100 The below mentioned check points are operationally controlled during IC rule maintenance for TAX Formula2 Formula3 e Book flag should be selected as TAX e Periodicity should be selected as Periodic e Accrual required should not be ticked e Tax payable currency should be selected as local currency 5 4 20 3 Accounting entries set up The following accounting entry is defined in IC product for ILIQ event Event DR CR_ Accounting Role Amount Tag Indicator ILIQ oR RULE ACCR 1 ILIQ ILIQ RULE BOOK 1 ILIQ ILIQ RULE TPBL 2 TAX ILIQ oR RUL
317. r account for which you are marking a manual status change from the option list provided On selection of the account the system will display the current status of the account as well as the date on which the account moved to the current status New Status Specify the new status of the account You can select the appropriate status from this list lf Status Processing Basis specified in the Branch Parameters for all the branches is Contract Account only status codes maintained with status type Account in the Status Codes Maintenance screen will be available in the option list If Status Processing Basis for even one of the branches is specified as Group CIF level then the only statuses available will be of type Both 6 23 ORACLE Account Statuses In addition to the new status you can also mark the account with any one of the following statuses if required e No Credit if checked no credit movement will be allowed on the account e No Debit the system will not allow debit movements on the account if you select this option e Frozen if selected no activity will be allowed on the account e Posting Allowed if checked posting of accounting entries will be allowed in the account Status Change Automatic You can select this option if you want the subsequent status change for the account to be performed automatically by the system After the account moves to the new status specified h
318. r account from which the money is to be debited for booking the TD If you click on option list in the Offset Account field a list of all valid account numbers that is maintained in the branch specified in the previous field will be displayed Double click on the account that you want to specify as the offset account The offset account and branch detail fields are enabled only if the option to payin is selected as the savings account Cheque Instrument Number Specify the cheque instrument number Clearing Type Specify the clearing type for the transaction The adjoining option list displays a list of the clearing types maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Cheque Date Specify the date on the cheque Mnemonic Code Specify the transaction pneumonic code for the instrument type The adjoining option list displays all the valid pneumonic codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Drawee Account Specify the drawee s account number Term Deposit Payout Details Pay Out Option Select the pay out mode from the drop down list The options available are e Bankers Cheque BC e Transfer to Other bank PC e Transfer to GL GL e Transfer to Savings Account AC e Creation of new Term Deposit TD e Demand Draft DD o If the pay out option is TD a new TD is created on the parent TD maturity date The account numbers for the new TD account is generated automatically
319. r bank for customers Chapter 4 Maintaining Tax Allowance Limit for Customer Accounts explains how you can maintain tax free allowance limit at the customer account level 1 ORACLE Chapter 5 Maintaining TD Accounts gives details of the Term Deposit accounts maintained in the system Chapter 6 Maintaining Mandatory Information explains how you can classify customer accounts into different groups known as account classes and how to maintain specifications for account classes Chapter 7 Processing Referrals in Oracle FLEXCUBE details the maintenance required and the processing done in Oracle FLEXCUBE when customer transactions force the accounts involved the transaction to exceed the overdraft limit Chapter 8 Provisioning for Customer Accounts explains the process of provisioning for customer accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE Chapter 9 Customer Information Query explains how queries to retrieve information on customer accounts can be made Chapter 10 Glossary contains a list of important terms used in the manual Chapter 11 Reports provides a list of reports that can be generated in this module and also explains their contents Chapter 12 Term Deposit Reports explains all the reports that can be generated for Term Deposits 1 1 3 Related Documents The Procedures User Manual The Settlements User Manual 1 1 4 Glossary of Icons tone Fen s ORACLE Reverse Template Liquidate Sign off 4 Add Delete
320. r end TDS then the entire interest will be deducted and the rest will be deducted in the next liquidation During pre closure partial redemption if the revised TDS computed is less than the TDS deducted till the last liquidation then the tax refund will be done manually using the Tax Refund screen considering any remittances The below examples indicate the revised TDS during pre closure partial redemption for projection basis by re picking the interest rate Example case 1 Tax computation during breakage Pre closure Example case maintenance TDS limit amp rate TDS limit 90 000 45 000 Surcharge limit 50 000 45 000 Tax rate 12 sae ORACLE Surcharge 10 9 rate Tenor based TD interest rate 180 364 9 days Account details Booking Liquidation Maturity date Projected Interest date frequency amount for financial year AC0001 8 00 000 1 Sep 08 Quarterly 31 Aug 09 46 667 AC0002 4 00 000 1 Sep 08 Quarterly 31 Aug 09 Example 1 Liquidation schedule Interest Liquidation Total TDS rate amount interest applicable earned 30 Nov 08 A0001 20 000 30 000 2 000 A0002 10 000 1 000 28 Feb 09 A0001 20 000 30 000 2 000 A0002 10 000 1 000 31 Mar 09 A0001 6 666 67 10 000 666 67 23 333 Additional TDS 2 OD O 00 100 o ee OD O 200 100 Ce ee 66 67 22 33 33 11 Year end A0002 3 333 33 333 33 30 Apr 09 A0001 12 000 18 000 Pre closure 9 00
321. r generation of the MT 941 MT942 message You can specify the time interval in hours only The details for issuing the balance reports are discussed in the chapter Maintaining Mandatory information for different accounts under a particular class The details involved in generation of a balance report for a specific customer account correspond with those discussed for account classes 3 1 27 2 Balance Statement Handoff The balance statement can be handed off as part of scheduled task under Oracle You need to assign its frequency in hours This process is initiated for all accounts requiring a balance account statement As discussed previously the time for generation of the statement is determined and specified In case of no subsequent transactions reports the statement is not generated 3 1 27 3 Assigning Balance Statement as Job The balance statement can be facilitated to run as part of a scheduled job as part of the Oracle jobs initiated during processing The Jobs Browser screen of the application provides you the facility to run the balance statement as a synchronized task subject to specified time intervals in hours Invoke the Jobs Browser screen from the application typing CSSJOBBR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button 3 59 ORACLE 23 Jobs Browser Web Page Dialog Job Module Process BALANCE REPORT Status ha Search Advanced Search
322. ral the transaction details are stored in a separate table The details in the referral screen are displayed from this table Note that transactions from Savings module will appear in the Posted tab You can get accounting entries reversed or confirm for the overdrawn account using the Intra Day Batch Start screen You can invoke this screen by typing BABIDBAT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button e Intra Day Batch Start Webpape Dialog Function CSAEFOPR J Specify the following information Function Specify CSREFQPR or choose this value from the adjoining option list Click OK button to run the batch 7 6 ORACLE 8 Provisioning for Customer Accounts 8 1 Introduction Your bank may wish to set up certain guidelines according to which provision must be made for outstanding overdrafts on customer accounts For instance it may be necessary to set the provisioning amount for an account in respect of which there is an outstanding overdraft based on the status of the account as well as the financial standing of the customers You might also wish to include exposure due to loans issued to a customer as well as total outstanding overdraft in all accounts of a customer or a group of customers as a whole and assign the status of all loans issued to the group as well as all accounts under a group as the worst status among all
323. rameters The process executes as described below 1 The exposure categories for the customer group or CIF are first derived either from the specification for the same in the contract and account details or depending upon the total exposure of the group or CIF according to the logic maintained for deriving the exposure category in the Exposure Type Category Linkage maintenance When the exposure category for a CIF or customer group is derived according to the logic maintained in the Exposure Category Type Linkage screen the outstanding overdraft in all accounts belonging to the group CIF as well as the exposure due to loans issued to the group CIF is summed to compute the total exposure 2 The provisioning percentage applicable is then derived either from the contract and account details or using the exposure category of the CIF and the status of all accounts and contracts involving the CIF according to the linkage maintained in the Exposure Category Provisioning Percentage maintenance 3 Having obtained the provisioning percentage applicable the system then computes the provision amount based on the rule defined in the Loans Provisioning Rule maintenance for loans and the Account Provisioning Rule Maintenance for accounts 4 The computed provision amount would then be stored for the accounts and contracts and appropriate accounting entries passed The computed provision amount is stored and displayed in the Amount Tab in the C
324. ransaction linked Total Amount Total FX transaction amount linked to the FONR account is displayed Click Calculate button to compute the total amount You can select FX transactions in the following conditions e Only Forward contracts with Sell option is displayed e Active Forward FX transactions authorized not marked for auto liquidation e Counterparty of the FX contract is the CIF ID of the FONR account e Contract currency is the SOLD currency for a FONR account Other leg of the FX transaction is in local currency e BOT and sold value dates are same FX transaction e FCNR account maturity date is greater than or equal to option date if null the contract will be available for selection of FX transaction and is less than or equal to the value date BOT SOLD FCNR Maturity date is between Option Date and FX Maturity Date 5 22 ORACLE e O S amount of the FX contract Derived as explained in the Outstanding Amount field is greater than Zero 5 4 4 1 Deriving Exchange Rate during TD Booking Exchange rate is derived based on the weighted average method Example FX Contract 1 USD INR 47 FX Contract 2 USD INR 48 Incase of TD account creation for USD 500 by liquidating FX1 for USD 200 47 INR USD and FX2 for USD 300 48 INR USD i e The redemption of USD 500 is done at 200 47 300 48 500 47 6 INR USD 5 4 4 2 Auto Liquidation of FX Contracts from TD Following validations are done during the
325. rate code will be picked up while calculating interest However if you choose to enter a spread for the Rate Code the appropriate value will be computed A Spread is a positive or negative value that you add or deduct to the value specified for the Rate Code If you do not specify a spread the rate maintained for the Rate Code will be picked up The value for TD Rate Code will default from the rate code maintained in the Floating Rate Maintenance screen Rule for TD Rate Code UDE consists of only one type of rate as rate code If the TD Rate Code is used through Floating Rate Maintenance screen then Rate Code column is disabled in the IC Special Condition screen If the type of UDE is an amount the value that you enter will be in the currency that you specified in the UDE Amounts Currency field in the Interest Product Preferences screen If you specified the UDE amounts currency as the local currency and the account is in a foreign currency the currency conversions will be on the basis of the mid rate for the day 3 42 ORACLE The UDE values that you specify here will only be applied to this account Waive Product Check this box if you want to waive of a particular interest or charge product that has been specified Open More than one product may be applicable on an account class at the same time You can temporarily stop applying a product on an account class by closing it You can achieve this by un checking th
326. rcharge limit both tax and surcharge is deducted 5 91 ORACLE The projected interest for all deposits during the financial year 2009 2010 i e between 1 Apr 09 to 31 Jul 09 is 30000 Since the projected interest is greater than the taxable limit tax is deducted As the projected interest is less than the surcharge limit so surcharge is not deducted from the customer The following tax related entries is passed during liquidation and year end On 31 Oct 2008 TDS amount Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount m fmo fa On 31 Jan 09 TDS _ amount Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount 9 92 ORACLE On 31 Mar 09 Year End TDS_amount TAX_PAY 1500 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount On 31 Apr 09 First liquidation in next financial year Adjustment entry TDS_amount TAX_PAY 1500 Surcharge amount Additional TDS amount 9 93 ORACLE Liquidation entry TDS_amount Additional TDS amount On 31 Jul 2009 TDS amount Additional TDS amount The following SDE values will be populated for the above example Account no AC0001 DATE INT F YEA TAX TDS_ SURC SURC OR_PE RE _A _RA LIMIT HG_LI HG_R OR_Y RIOD ND TE MIT ATE 31 ll l ia ieai l ll 09 a Mar 60000 10000 10 10000 50000 10 30 Apr 30000 5000 1000 10000 50000 09 31 Jul 09 30000 15000 A a 10000 50000 5 94 ORACLE Account
327. references you can indicate the following for each of the statements whether primary secondary or tertiary Type The first preference that you specify for each account class is to indicate whether the periodic generation an account statement is required If the generation of an account statement is necessary you have to specify the format in which it is to be generated The options available are e Detailed indicating that the statement should be a detailed account of all the customer transactions within the account class e Summary indicating that only a summary of the transaction details is enough e None indicating that neither a summary nor a detailed account of transactions is required 6 7 ORACLE Cycle The system generates the account statement details at a frequency that you specify The frequency can be e Annual e Semi annual e Quarterly e Monthly e Fortnightly e Weekly e Daily If you indicate that the statement generation frequency is weekly you should also indicate the day of the week on which the account statement is due Similarly for a monthly statement you should indicate the day of the month To specify the frequency for a monthly statement you can specify a number between 1 and 31 corresponding to the system date If you set the statement date to 30 then account statements will be generated on e The last working day for months with lt 30 days e For months with 30 days on the 30th i
328. ributions Monetary Information Account Interest Transaction Reference Number Amount and Currency Transaction Year Monetary Account Breakup Account Branch Account Currency Amount and Currency Withholding Tax information where applicable Tax Withheld Amount and Currency Transaction Remark if any Plan Balance after the transaction current and previous year balances Transactions are sequenced in the manner in which they were processed in the system 11 3Minimum Withdrawal Advice Reports This advice is sent to all customers approaching the minimum distribution age The advice contains information about all the plans held by the customer under the plan type Since it is not generated automatically you have to invoke the advice generation screen and identify the Plan Type and the Reference Number of the plan involving the plan type for which the minimum distribution age advice is to be generated 11 2 ORACLE 11 3 1 Contents of the Report Apart from the header the following details are printed for the report Body of the Report Customer The CIF Number full Name and mailing address of the Information customer as recorded in the CIF Maintenance screen Plan Type The plan type involving the plan Plans Held This information includes Plan Number Plan Balances current year only Plan Balance Total Contributions Excess Contributions Total Distributions Total Employer Contributions where appli
329. riteria e Branch Code e Account Number e Year 3 71 ORACLE 3 5 Month Viewing Dummy Numbers Associated with CIF Number To recall in the Branch Parameters screen you can specify a number range based on which the customers of your bank will be assigned CIF numbers for identification You can also maintain a dummy CIF number range for a branch The dummy CIF range will be used for account number generation Refer the Core Services User Manual for details on maintaining dummy CIF number range and its usage for customer account number generation You can view all the dummy CIF numbers linked to a customer in the Dummy Customer Summary screen To invoke this screen click Customer Maintenance in the Application Browser and Dummy Customer and Summary under it You can also invoke this screen by typing STSMAINT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button J Dummy Customer Summary Web Page Dialog Customer Number az Dummy Number Search Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 Kiki Of 1 wal Customer Number Dummy Number In this screen you can view the CIF number that is associated with each dummy number 3 72 ORACLE 3 6 3 7 Withdrawal of Funds without Penalty No early withdrawal penalty is charged for the first six days from a time deposit account For this you must maintain an Interest and Charges IC period system data elem
330. rline Days e TOD Temporary Overdraft Days e Customer Classification Logical Operators Logical Operators are indicators of certain conditions that you specify while building a rule These operators are used in combination with the elements discussed earlier The following is a list of logical operators that you would require to build a status rule Greater than Greater than or equal to please note that there is no space between the two symbols ess than Less than or equal to please note that there is no space between the two symbols Not equal to please note that there is no space between the two symbols 6 1 14 1 Modifying Account Status Manually For status movements that have to be performed manually on a customer account you can use the Manual Status Change screen Invoke this screen by typing STDSTMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Manual Status Change Input Web Page Dialog i Branch CHO BANK OF INDIA Account No BRR112 Status NORM Since 7 3 2000 New Status NORM T No Debit T No Credit D Frozen T Posting Allowed I Status Change Automatic T Dormant Input By SHARAN Date Time 7 3 2000 10 12 36 Modification Number 1 iv Open Authorized By CL2 Date Time 7 3 2000 10 12 54 E Authorized Provide the following details in this screen to facilitate a manual status change Account No Select the custome
331. rmation refer Linking FX Transactions section in this User Manual In case unutilized portion of the linked FX contracts are available those contracts are liquidated on redemption of the TD based on the order of redemption The linked FX contracts are liquidated in part full based on the amount being redeemed FX Liquidation happens for the TD redeemed part This takes the effective purchase rate You can save FX linkage if TD account currency and Offset account currency LCY are different FX linkage amount can be linked to the extent of sum of LCY offset account redemption amount 5 4 12 Processing TDS on Term Deposits The total interest earned on all the term deposit of a customer in a branch is greater than taxable interest limit in a financial year then they are liable for TDS and the banks will deduct the income tax at source TDS is deducted every time the Bank pays interest during the financial year and the interest earned for the year is more than taxable interest limit in a single branch In addition TDS is also deducted on interest accrued but not yet paid at the end of the financial year viz 31 March However this tax will not be collected from the customer It will be collected from the customer during the subsequent scheduled interest liquidation or premature withdrawals The tax liability for the purpose of TDS is determined at branch level Whenever bank pays an interest on term deposits it checks for TDS eligibility If
332. rojected TDS details can be queried based on TAX CF ID financial year and branch code Specify the following details Branch Code This current branch of the customer is displayed here TAX CIF ID Specify the TAX CF ID Primary customer for which TDS is projected ICDINQRYFinancial Year The current financial year for which TDS is projected is defaulted when clicked on P button os for all the term deposits of customers linked to TAX CIF ID Primary customer in the current branch for the current financial year is projected and displayed in the screen on clicking button P Customer Number The primary and secondary customers are displayed here TD Account The Term deposit of the customer for which TDS is projected is displayed here 5 60 ORACLE Interest Amount The projected interest amount based on which TDS is projected is displayed here TDS Amount Excluding Surcharge The projected TDS amount excluding surcharge and additional tax is displayed here Surcharge The Surcharge amount computed based on the TDS amount is displayed here Additional Tax Amount The additional tax amount computed based on the TDS amount is displayed here Total TDS Amount The sum of TDS amount Excluding Surcharge Surcharge and additional tax amount is displayed here Total TDS Amount LCY The LCY equivalent of total TDS amount is displayed here Br rojected interest for all the term deposits is computed at the time of deposi
333. roup CIF and the loan contracts and overdraft accounts are all updated with this worst status if they have been marked for automatic status processing The individual status for the accounts and loan contracts apart from assigning the worst status is also captured and displayed In the Group Code Maintenance screen and the CIF Maintenance screen the status for the group is displayed as well as the date since which the status came into effect For details about loan status processing and provisioning consult the Loans user manual Customer Group When you maintain CIF details for customers in the Customer Information Maintenance screen you can specify the customer group to which the customer belongs for Provisioning and status processing Group Code You must specify a group code defined for a group type that is the same as the customer type for instance if the customer is a retail customer you must specify a group defined for retail customers Classifying the customer as a Clearing customer Categorizing the customer for levying charges at a customer group level Classifying the customer as a taxpayer If you select this option the Exposure Category field will be disabled 2 49 ORACLE 2 3 4 Capturing Customer Prefixes While maintaining the CIF details of an Individual customer you can capture the academic titles like Prof Dr etc of the customer along with the salutations like Consulate Senator Chanc
334. roup and a specific customer within the group The System resolves the float days in the following order Branch Product Sector Currency Customer Customer Code Code Code Number 2 52 ORACLE 2 3 7 Branch Product Sector Currency Customer Customer Code Code Code Number The float days will be considered as Working Days or Calendar Days depending on your specification in the ARC Maintenance screen Location Maintenance In Oracle FLEXCUBE you have a provision wherein you can maintain location codes You do this through the Account Address Location Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STSACLOC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Account Address Location Maintenance Web Page Dialog Location BANGALORE Description Location in Account LOY 7 Default Input By AND1 Date Time 7 3 2000 11 37 19 Modification Number 1 E Open Authorized By Date Time f Authorized Location The relevant location code This pertains to a particular area in a country It cannot be more than 15 characters Description A short description to the location code Default If the location code is to be maintained as a default location code the same could be specified here by checking against this option Only one location can be marked as a default location The following points are noteworthy e Once you save the above ma
335. rrency option product from the option list under which the Options Contract has to be created in case of Dual Currency Deposit The option list displays all the Option Products with Product Type CO You need to mandatorily choose CCY Option Product if the Linked Currency is entered You will be allowed to capture this value here only if the option Dual CCY Deposit is checked at the Account Class Maintenance screen You will be allowed to modify this value even after authorization Fixing Days Specify the number of days from TD maturity date before which the exchange rate has to be fixed 6 52 ORACLE 6 2 You will be allowed to capture this value here only if the option Dual CCY Deposit is checked at the Account Class Maintenance screen You will be allowed to modify this value even after authorization On saving the account class system validates the following to ensure that the CO option product selected here has the below features e Contract type is Trade e Option Type is Call e Deal Type is Buy e Option Style is Plain Vanilla e Barrier is not allowed e Delivery type is Physical e Expiration Style is American Maintaining Deposits Instructions You can maintain deposits instructions for auto created deposits The values you specify here will override the parameters you have maintained in the Account Class maintenance Invoke the Deposits Instruction screen from the Appl
336. rther transactions screen in Oracle FLEXCUBE will not display the expired account class as of the system date However the existing accounts for the account class will be active even after the end date If you do not specify an End Date for the account class the account is taken to be an open ended account class Dormancy Days You have to indicate the period after which an account in an account class becomes inactive or dormant if customer transactions are not posted into the account 6 5 ORACLE However while maintaining transaction codes if you have checked the Consider for Account Activity field all transactions posted to any account under this account class linked to the particular transaction code will become active from dormant irrespective of the dormancy period If a customer initiated transaction is posted into the account with the dormant status the account status will be updated to Active from Dormant since the Transaction Code associated with the account has the Consider for Account Activity option enabled Dormancy Parameters As stated above if Transaction Code associated with the account has the Consider for Account Activity option enabled the dormant status of the account will be updated to Active Apart from this you can specify the parameter that is required for re activating the account To indicate the re activation parameters for the dormant account choose any from the following options e Debit e Credit
337. ry supplier then you can record the list of stocks that can be serviced by the vendor For more details on the Stock Details section refer the Instruments Inventory Tracking manual 6 56 ORACLE 7 1 7 Processing Referrals in Oracle FLEXCUBE Introduction Referral refers to the process of handling customer transactions which force the accounts involved in such a transaction to exceed the overdraft limit Examples of typical transactions which force an account to move into overdraft are Payment and Collections Funds Transfers Standing Instructions or Clearing transactions In Oracle FLEXCUBE if an account involved ina transaction moves into overdraft it is sent to the Referral Queue You can invoke this screen by typing STSREFQU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Referral Queue Summary Web Page Dialog f Account Number az Customer Name Current Balance Avaliable Balance Overdraft Limit a Search Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 Kika of 1 bal Go to Page Branch Code Account Number Customer Name Current Balance Avaliable Balance Overdraft Limit Credit Rating In this screen the following details of the account are displayed e The account Branch and Branch code e The Account Number e The Name of the customer who holds the account e The Current Balance in the account This includes the aggregate of debit credit uncoll
338. s 6 37 ORACLE 6 1 23 Maintaining Notice Preferences You can specify the notice preferences for the withdrawal of amount through the Notice Preferences screen Click Notice in the Account Class Maintenance screen The Notice Preferences screen is displayed as follows Notice Preference Web Page Dialog Account Class PNLSA1 Description Savings Account Advance Interest Monthly Free Amount 2000 Notice Days Validity Period The following fields are displayed in this screen e Account Class The unique code assigned to the account class is displayed e Description A short description of the account class is displayed The following are the notice preferences that you can specify for an account class Advance Interest Check this field to levy the advance interest on the account class o Note the following e The customer of the account class is liable to pay this interest in case he she fails to provide the required notice to the bank e The system deducts the advance interest from the credit Interest earned by the customer of the account class on his her credit balance in the account Monthly Free Amount Specify the amount that a customer of the account class can withdraw per calendar month from his her savings account without being liable to pay advance interest Notice Days Specify the number of days before which a customer of the account class should notify the bank if he she wa
339. s button to invoke the FX Linkages screen In this screen you can link FX transactions A FX Linkage Details Web Page Dialog Term Deposit Account Number Module CO d Seqho To blod ID Fx Reference Mumber Currency Outstanding Amount Linked Amount E Calculate You can maintain the following details Account Number TD Account number for which the linkage is maintained gets displayed here Module The module code is defaulted to CO Seq No Specify the sequence number that indicates the order of the FX In case of liquidation of TD the FX transactions are auto liquidated in this sequence 5 24 ORACLE To Mod Id The module code is defaulted to FX FX Reference Number Specify the reference number of the FX contract Currency This is the Sell currency of the FX transaction In case of FONR Sell option the bought currency will be LCY amp sold currency is FCY This will be defaulted on selection of the FX contract Outstanding Amount FX Outstanding Amount is displayed by the system This amount is derived as the difference between FX transaction outstanding amount and the amount already linked to any other LC BC CL contract Linked Amount Specify the amount of the FX transaction amount linked to the FONR account redemption Liquidated Amount Amount of the FX Contract that is liquidated gets displayed Rate Exchange Rate is defaulted from FX t
340. s REG Account Status Restriction Currency Limits Statement Limits Joint Holders Interest Charge Consolidated Charge Standing Instructions Linked Entities MIS Fields Deposits Instruction Billing Parameters Account Signatory Interim amp Balance Parameters Input By DOCS Date Time Modification number Iv Open Authorized By Date Time a Authorized 3 1 4 1 Capturing Positive Pay Details Positive Pay For the account you are maintaining you can specify whether you want positive pay facility for the account or not When a check comes in for payment the system validates for any unpaid record only for those accounts that are under positive pay For all the other accounts that are not specified for positive pay the system does not do any validation before making payments for the checks 3 13 ORACLE Funding If you enable Funding accounting entries will be posted by the Positive Pay maintenance upload table for the positive pay transaction You have to enable Positive Pay to make use of Funding functionality If Positive Pay is not enabled Funding option will not be applicable If Funding is not selected accounting entries will not be passed for positive pay transactions o You cannot enable both Deferred Reconciliation and Funding functionalities You have to choose between either of them for a particular account Mod 9 Validation Required
341. s for the purpose of ascertaining the amount of provisioning required You can maintain such exposure categories in the Exposure Category Maintenance screen by specifying the name of the exposure category and a short description Invoke this screen by typing LDDECMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Corporate Deposits Exposure Category Maintenance Web Page Dialog Exposure Category Description Input By Date Time Modification Number W open Authorized By Date Time a Authorized You can view the summary of the exposure categories in the Exposure Category Maintenance Summary screen 8 1 4 1 Specifying Status wise Provisioning Percentages for Each Exposure Category After you have maintained exposure categories you must maintain the appropriate provisioning percentages to apply to each exposure category for contracts as well as accounts in each of the statuses You must also maintain the applicable discount percentages You can do this in the Exposure Category Provisioning Percent Maintenance screen where you can specify the applicable provisioning percentage and discount percentage for each status 8 4 ORACLE Invoke this screen by typing LDDPRVMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button lt 4 Corporate Deposits Provisioning Percentage Maintenance
342. s Maintenance screen Click the Amt Block button to access this screen The screen is as shown below Product Maintenance Web Page Dialog Account Class TIMDP6 Description Term Deposits A c Product Maintenance T Number Product Description In this screen you will specify the sequence of products based on which funds will be made available when a credit is posted to an account with a track receivable option The sequence number is automatically generated by the system All authorized products of your bank will be available in the option list On selection of the product the product description will appear alongside Whenever a credit happens to an account with a track receivable option the system will check if the account has any receivable being tracked against it If yes the amount is blocked as a receivable and this process continues until the amount needed for liquidation becomes fully available The batch process run as part of EOD BOD will liquidate the loan contract or retail teller contracts If the amount received is not sufficient for full liquidation then depending on the minimum amount required for liquidation the system would initiate a partial liquidation for loans but for retail teller contracts liquidation will be initiated only when full amount is available 6 25 ORACLE The following example illustrates the manner in which the system will use the sequence for allocation of
343. s defaulted from the Credit Line associated with the customer account If you change the default option the system displays an override message Temp OD Limit The temporary OD limit is the limit upto which any overdraft is allowed for a specified time period over and above the limit set for this account 3 35 ORACLE This limit is independent of any credit line linked to this account This is mostly used for short term overdrawing Sublimit The sub limit represents that portion of the total credit amount that can be used by this customer account The sub limit need be input only when the account is to be limited to a portion of the available line amount While passing transactions to an account with a sub limit the first credit check made is against this sub limit amount If the sub limit is crossed you will be asked for an override Uncoll Funds Limit The uncollected funds limit represents the credit transaction amounts that have not been collected as of the current day You can set the limit upto which withdrawal is allowed against uncollected funds The uncollected opening balance is reset with the current uncollected balance amount during the EOD process This amount is to be considered when calculating Central Limit availability Offline Limit This is the limiting amount till which transactions will be carried out between account s for the account class you are defining here between branches when the database connecti
344. s description of the TD account Deposit Currency Currency of the TD account 12 4 ORACLE 12 3 Term Deposits Renewed for the period You can generate reports for the Term Deposit accounts renewed for a period for a customer To generate the report invoke Term Deposit Account Renewed Report screen This report displays the Term deposit accounts which are renewed for the given period TD Account Renewed Report Webpage Dialog BHA Branch Code From Date To Date Account Class Customer Specify the following details From Date The field defaults the TD accounts renewed from this date Current application date is defaulted To Date The field defaults the TD accounts renewed till this date Current application date is defaulted Branch Code Specify the branch code from the list of values provided Account Class Specify the account class from the list of values provided Customer Specify the customer number from the list of values provided 12 5 ORACLE The generated report will contain the following elements Account No Deposit No Name of the Deposit Value Date of Deposit Total Interest Payable Interest Amount This will show simple interest amount which will be calculated using the Deposit Amount Deposit Term and Interest Rate This will be the projected value and this may not be equal to the actual interest amount Maturity Value This will show the sum of Deposit amount
345. s for the same You can use the navigation icons to move from one status to the other Only status codes with status type Account will be available in the option list if the Status Processing Basis is defined as Contract Account for all branches in the Branch Parameters If the Status Processing Basis is defined as Group CIF level for any branch then the statuses of type Both are available In this case it is mandatory to link all the statuses defined On selection of the status the associated description will be displayed alongside 6 1 12 Specifying Reporting line Details Specify the following Dr and Cr GL Lines Select the debit GL account to which all debit balances within a specific account class will report to when it moves to the status being defined You can identify the debit GL from the list of existing GLs Likewise all credits within a particular account class will report to the GL account that you have identified to track credits 6 17 ORACLE Dr and Cr Central Bank Lines Select the Central Bank Debit line to which all debit accounts belonging to an account class should report to when it moves to the selected status You have maintained Central Bank Debit lines in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen You can select the appropriate CB Debit Line from the available option list Similarly all accounts belonging to an account class if in credit should report to a Central Bank Credit Line
346. s given to joint holders of any customer account Legal Guardian If the account holder is a minor this is the legal guardian of the customer Liability Number A code used to keep track of the credit limit facility granted to a customer Limit Check A validation maintained for all accounts in an account class to see if there are adequate funds in the account Loan Repayment The amount paid towards loan repayment MTD Month to Date Indicates the turnover on an account for the current month and up to the current date It is specified for both Credit and Debit turnovers Narratives Specifications that help achieve a desired format for account statements Natural GL The code of the GL to which the turnovers of all accounts in the account class will be reported Regulation D This is a regulation of the U S Securities and Exchange Commission Regulation D also known as Reg D exempts certain offerings of equity from many of the regulatory requirements that impose costs upon standard public offerings A Reg D offering is intended to make access to the capital markets possible for small companies that could not otherwise bear those costs Reporting Lines The general ledger codes to which balances debit or credit of all accounts in an account class will be reported Sub limit The maximum credit amount that can be used by a customer account without requiring an override The sub limit is specified for accounts for whi
347. s is displayed you cannot change or modify this value Account Select the account which has been identified for generation of a balance statement from the option list The account balance of this account is generated as an outgoing statement Swift Message Type Select the type of message required to be sent As the message is a balance statement select MT941 MT942 Click on the Generate Statement button to initiate the generation of balance statement for the account you have selected This process would pick up the entire debit and credit component accounts created since the issue of a previous M1941 M1942 MT950 or MT940 are included in the generated statement 6 32 ORACLE You can examine the details of the generated message to ensure that all details entered are correct Click on the View button to observe the outgoing message n a cl lia Sender Reference Number Swift Message Type DCN Version Number Remarks Reject Reason Message Trailers You can examine the message for ensuring the information entered is complete You can only view the details of the message no input of additional information is supported at this stage 6 1 18 Specifying Regulation D Applicability for Account Class For an account class you can define whether the Regulation D limits are applicable and the period over which the limits would be applicable In the Account Class Maintenance screen click the REG butt
348. s that are opened under an account class e Sweep Multiple of The sweep can only be in multiples of the sweep specified e Retry Till Date The instructions specified will be invalid after this date Any failed sweeps after this date will not be picked up for processing the next day 6 3 Maintaining Vendors You would enter into contracts with a standard set of vendors Examples include vendors in Expense Processing contracts and also vendors who are inventory suppliers Therefore you need not specify the details of the vendor every time you enter into a contract perform a maintenance You can maintain the details of all the vendors with whom you deal in the Vendor Maintenance screen When processing a contract performing a maintenance you only need to indicate the Vendor ID All the details maintained for the Vendor will automatically be picked up If the Vendor you are maintaining is a customer of your bank with a valid CIF ID you can specify the Customer ID as the Vendor Code In this case the settlement and other details maintained for the customer will automatically default when you enter into a contract with the vendor 6 54 ORACLE To invoke the Vendor Maintenance screen enter XPDVNMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application Toolbar and then click the adjoining arrow button Yendor Maintenance Web Page Dialog Vendor Code Short Description lls Vendor a Customer Long Description Vendor Ad
349. s the overdue amount 500 0000 Penalty overdue interest calculation is as given below 20 APR 01 500 000 20 APR 01 25 APR 01 25 APR 01 500 000 25 APR 01 05 MAY 01 2 64 ORACLE 3 Maintaining Customer Accounts 3 1 Introduction You can define customer accounts for all the customers of your bank through the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Each account that you define is identified with an account number The structure of the account number is based on the Account Mask you have maintained through the Account Parameters sub screen of the Bank wide Parameters screen The Account Number can be combination of the CIF Number the Account Class Currency and any other alphabet s or number s of the account or currency as defined For an account number you also need to define in this screen other parameters like the account class the type of account joint or single the reporting lines for the account the currency in which transactions can be passed to this account the customer s account limit the check book passbook ATM facility the various statuses applicable to the account and so on Every account created or modified in Oracle FLEXCUBE needs to be authorized to become effective Whenever a new customer account is created or an existing record is modified the system generates a notification message on the record authorization This notification message can be sent to any external system if required 3 1 1 Invoking
350. scounted type of Interest Also the Tiered Tenor can be linked to bearing type of loan accounts with Bullet Schedule Let an account be linked to this tiered rate with the following details Value date 05 Jan 2000 Maturity Date 05 Mar 2000 Bill Amount USD 1 000 000 00 No of shipment days 2 days The following details are the details of Interest calculation for MAIN_INT 02 Feb 00 02 Feb 00 05 Mar 00 Assume that the amount Calculated based on the above details is AMOUNT 1 Case 1 If there is an effective date change say on the 15th Jan 2000 the following is the rate change Tenor From Tenor To fae The following will be the Interest Calculation details for the same 02 Feb 00 02 Feb 00 05 Mar 00 Assume that the interest calculated through these details is AMOUNT2 2 62 ORACLE The difference AMOUNT1 AMOUNT2 is passed in BADJ event when the Batch is run that day or when BOD is marked If there were an increase in the Interest amount the same will be collected from the customer and if there is a decrease it will be given back 2 3 8 7 Interest Calculation of a Penalty Component inked with Tiered Interest Rate For a penalty component linked with tiered interest rate interest is calculated as follows e For overdue loan accounts the penal interest is calculated for the overdue period i e from maturity date to the liquidation date payment date e Penalty components overdue interest are used to
351. scription will be displayed alongside Dr and Cr GL Line Select the debit GL account to which all debit balances within a specific account class will report to when it moves to the status being defined You can identify the debit GL from the list of existing GLs Likewise all credits within a particular account class will report to the GL account that you have identified to track credits Dr Central Bank Line Specify the Central Bank line to which this account will report to if it is in debit This line is maintained in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen 3 24 ORACLE Cr Central Bank Line Specify the Central Bank line to which this account will report to if it is in credit This central bank line is maintained in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen Dr Head Office Line Specify the Debit Head Office GL to which the account will report if they are in a debit Cr Head Office Line Specify the Credit Head Office GL to which this account will report if it is running in credit 3 1 12 Specifying Restriction Details You can specify restrictions for the account using the Products and Transaction Codes Restriction screen To invoke this screen click the Restriction button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Products and Transaction Codes Restriction Web Page Dialog Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Special Condition Applicable Not Applicable Branch CHO
352. simulated deposit account details The following details are displayed e The Document Certificate Number e The deposit account s branch e The reference number e The report Module e The contents of the message To procure a hard copy of the certificate click Print The generated certificates are also available through the Messaging browser Messaging archival or purge action determines the storage or removal of these certificates from the application browser 5 134 ORACLE 5 4 31 Specifying Deposit details for Simulated Account You can specify the deposits details related to a term deposit account by clicking the Deposit button S Deposits Web Page Dialog Min Reqd Balance Auto Deposit Balance Master Account No Sweep Type No Sweep For more information about maintaining Deposit details for a customer account please refer to the section Specifying Deposit Details under the chapter Maintaining Customer Accounts 5 4 32 Specifying Interest Details for Simulated Account To specify the interest and charge related details of the term deposit account click the tab Interest The screen is as shown below 5 135 ORACLE IC Special Conditions Maintenance Account Details Branch Code 005 Account FOOOOONNSE2 Calculation Account 7OOQQ0000383 Interest Start Date 2008 06 27 Interest Booking Account FOOO0000382 Charge Start Date 2008 06 27 Charge Booking Account POOOUOOOIS2 Interes
353. splayed if the applicable logic has been maintained for the specified customer provisioning group in the Exposure Type Category Linkage maintenance If no logic has been maintained for the group you can specify the applicable exposure category e Financial standing classification 2 9 ORACLE Status for the CIF If status processing for your branch is being done at Group CIF level as specified in the Branch Parameters the current status assigned to all loans issued to the CIF as well as all overdraft accounts belonging to the CIF is displayed in the CIF Status field in the Customer Maintenance screen This status is the worst status of all loans contracts and overdraft accounts for a Group CIF and is displayed both at the account as well as the loan level for all the accounts and loans a customer has in the current branch The update applies only to the accounts and loans in the current branch not across branches The date since which the loans issued to the CIF as well as the customer accounts belonging to the CIF with outstanding overdrafts moved into the current status is also displayed o Note the following The status change maintenance and movement change should be similarly set up for all loan products and accounts If it is not the same across all loan products then the worst status update will not happen for the dissimilar products Status change update is done only for accounts where the movement type selected is either A
354. splayed you cannot change or modify this value Account Select the account which has been identified for generation of a balance statement from the option list The account balance of this account is generated as an outgoing statement Swift Message Type Select the type of message required to be sent As the message is a balance statement select MT941 MT942 Click on the Generate Statement to initiate the generation of balance statement for the account you have selected This process would pick up the entire debit and credit component accounts created since the issue of a previous M1941 MT942 MT950 or MT940 are included in the generated statement You can examine the details of the generated message to ensure that all details entered are correct Click on the View button to observe the outgoing message 3 61 ORACLE 3 Message Details Web Page Dialog a fi ca ina Reference Number Swift Message Type DCN Version Number Sender Remarks Reject Reason Message Trailers You can examine the message for ensuring the information entered is complete You can only view the details of the message no input of additional information is supported at this stage 3 1 28 Maintaining Notice Preferences for Withdrawal You can view and modify the notice preferences maintained at the account class level for the withdrawal of amount from savings account through the Notice Preferences screen Click Notice b
355. st for the financial year will be calculated upfront and stored in data source This projected interest amount will be the basis for tax processing Projected interest will be computed on the date of booking a term deposit Re computation of projected interest will occur during following cases e Partial redemption pre closure of term deposit e Change in deposit details like rate change UDE change Etc e Change in the financial year cycle Projected interest will be stored for individual term deposit for a financial year For tax computation purpose the sum of projected interest of all the term deposits of a customer will be considered 5 4 25 1 Processing of tax during liquidation by projection basis method In projection basis tax will be computed and deducted from first liquidation cycle if the projected interest for the financial cycle exceeds the taxable interest limit Example Projected Interest amount for Liquidation Maturity financial Booking date Interest rate a year CHO AC0001 200000 1 May 08 10 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 15000 AC0002 100000 1 May 08 Quarterly 31 Jan 09 7500 Liquidation schedule Total TDS to be Liquidation interest deducted amount earned 10 A0001 5000 500 31 Jul 08 A0002 2500 7500 250 A0001 5000 500 31 Jan 09 A0001 5000 7500 aige ORACLE In the above case the projected interest for the deposit during the financial year is 22 500 and is taxable On 31 Jul 08 On 31 Oc
356. stitutions are allowed access to a particular product you have the option of restricting the access of one or a few individual financial institutions to his product Input the customer category you want to create using not more than 10 characters alohanumeric The category code should be unique For Example for Financial Institutions category you can input the code as FinIn Description This is the description of the customer category input above Enter the description of the customer category input above in not more than 35 character alohanumeric Taking the above example you can enter financial institutions Maintain Customer Log Check this box to indicate that customer information has to be tracked After you have made the inputs click the Save icon to save your record A record is not used until a user other than you authorizes it To authorize click Authorize button in the toolbar If any modifications were made the old and the new values will be displayed After which an alert box will indicate that the change will be authorized You will be prompted to conform To confirm click OK button The change will be authorized Your User ID the date and time at which the authorization was made will be displayed in the Auth ID and date and time fields at the bottom of the screen The status of the record will be updated to Authorized If you do not want to authorize the change then click Exit icon you will be returne
357. stomer account e Disallowed If you select this option the products entered in the multi entry block will be disallowed Transaction Code Likewise you can maintain restrictions for transaction codes as well Description The system displays the description for the transaction code that you have specified Dr During transaction processing the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the account based on either product and or transaction code If you have indicated to allow debit transactions for the product ABCD and attempt to post a credit entry the system will seek an override You can continue the transaction despite the restrictions by providing appropriate reasons for the same During maintenance or online operations in the respective contract screens for the restricted transactions when you specify the customer account the system checks whether the account is restricted for the product that has been selected or the debit credit transaction type If so an override is sought when such contracts are saved Cr During transaction processing the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the account based on either product and or transaction code If you have indicated to allow debit transactions for the product ABCD and attempt to post a credit entry the system will seek an override You can continue the transaction despite the restrictions by providing appropriate reasons for the same
358. sued to a customer amp Cards Summary Screen Branch Code Customer Mo Account Mo Fi Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code Request reference Humber Card Humber cua El Here you can view the following details Branch Code The branch code is displayed from the main Customer Information Maintenance screen Customer No The customer identification code CIF is displayed from the main Customer Information Maintenance screen Account No The system displays the account number against which you have maintained debit card details Authorisation Status Indicate the authorisation status of the debit card by selecting one of the following values e Authorised e Unauthorised Record Status Indicate the record status of the debit card by selecting one of the following values e Open e Closed 2 27 ORACLE Branch Code The system displays the branch code where the debit card has been issued Request Reference Number The system displays the request reference number of the card issuance record Card Number The system displays the debit card number of the card holder Multiple cards can be issued to a customer 2 2 15 Maintaining Waiver for Customer Tax Group You can maintain waiver related information for Customer Tax Group Tax Category combination Invoke this screen by typing STSTAXWYV in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the ad
359. system In case no value is passed Oracle FLEXCUBE updates the field to a null value If any value is passed the same is taken as the new value for that field 2 2 17 2 Processing for Node lf the field selected is of type Node a check box called Full Amend gets enabled This pertains to only the Node type elements and not for the Element type Checking against Full Amend indicates that the external system always has to send the complete set of records for the subsystem whether amendment of that node is done or not By default the Full Amend field is unchecked In case Full Amend is checked system overwrites the details during amendment even if all field values pertaining to a particular subsystem are not sent In such a scenario Oracle FLEXCUBE updates the fields with the available data sent by the external system during an amendment If no records are passed for a subsystem during amendment the complete subsystem is set to a NULL value In case the flag Full Amend is not checked system copies the details from the previous version and then makes changes to the existing records based on values sent by the external system If any new record comes as part of an amendment record the system inserts the same If the upload table is empty during amendment the system retains the data of the previous version 2 34 ORACLE The following points are noteworthy within the context of any amendment main
360. t 08 The following SDE values are populated for the above example when ICTDS batch processes tax product associated with the above deposits Account No A0001 DATE TOT_INT FOR_YEAR INT FOR PERIOD YEAR END YEAR END TAX TAX RAT Account No A0002 DATE TOT_INT_FOR_YEAR INT FOR PERIOD YEAR _END YEAR END TAX TAX RATE TL ot 31 Jan 09 22500 2500 5 103 ORACLE 5 4 25 2 Year end TDS computation by projection basis method A customer has opened the following deposits in the financial year 08 Booking Interest Liquidation Maturity Projected Projected date rate frequency Interest Interest amount amount till 31 from 1 Mar Apr 09 to 09 240 maturity days date 120 days CHO ACO0001 200000 1 Aug 10 Quarterly 31 Jul 13333 33 6666 67 08 09 AC0002 100000 Quarterly 31 Jul 6666 67 3333 33 08 09 Total TDS to be Liquidation interest deducted Date Account no amount earned 10 7500 none 31 Jan 7300 3 31 2009 aooo Basa 33 333330 33 Year end 5000 accrual aooo aooi sooo 7500 2500 will be considered for tax 30 Apr 09 A0002 2500 processing NIL 7500 The interest amount earned accrued during the financial year i e between 1 Nov 08 to 31 Mar 09 is 300000 10 100 360 240 20000 The following tax related entries are passed during liquidation and year end on cash basis 5 104 ORACLE On 31st Oct 2008 On 31th Jan 2009 ee eusonen me On 31st Mar 200
361. t Booking Branch O05 Interest Statement Dr Cr Advices Consolidated Charge Account Charge Booking Branch 005 Currency Rate Chart Allowed Product Details iof 1 UDE Currency Generate UDE Change Advice Open 1of1 UDE Values User Defined Element D UDE Value Rate Code TD Rate Code Se SS A So You can define the interest and charge related details associated with the customer s deposit account For more information on specifying Interest details of a customer account and for details specific for deposit accounts please refer to the section Specifying Interest Details under the chapter Maintaining Customer Accounts Processing Recurring Deposits A Recurring deposit requires the depositor to make periodic payments of a fixed deposit installment These payments are usually monthly although other frequencies such as quarterly or semi annual are possible Interest is compounded into the deposit account periodically The entire proceeds are paid out on maturity To specify the details of recurring deposit click on the Deposit button in the Account Class Maintenance screen This option is enabled only if you have selected Deposit as the Account Type You can also invoke this screen by typing STDACCLS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 5 136 ORACLE Z Details for Deposit types of Account Web Page Dialog
362. t accounts and savings accounts 3 1 2 2 Indicting Other Options Track Receivable During liquidation of loan contracts as well as processing of retail teller contracts if the system detects insufficient funds in the settlement account then you can choose to block the subsequent credit that happens to the settlement account In other words the system will track the account for receivables credits AS and when a credit happens the funds will be allocated to the loan or retail teller contract for liquidation If the track receivable option is checked for the account the system will track the receivables for the account if sufficient funds are not available in the account The allocation of funds will happen in a sequence that you specify at the account class level This is explained in the section titled Maintaining Account Classes 3 7 ORACLE Referral Required Referral refers to the process of handling customer transactions which force the accounts involved in such a transaction to exceed the overdraft limit Examples of typical transactions which force an account to move into overdraft are Payment and Collections Funds Transfers Standing Instructions or Clearing transactions The Referral Required option is defaulted from the account class linked to the account However you can change it for a specific account If an account is marked for referral the details of transactions resulting in the account moving into Overdra
363. t creation and stored in the database Based on this projected interest the screen displays the TDS projected for all the term deposits of the customers linked to TAX CIF ID Primary customer Example Current financial year FY2010 01 Apr 2010 to 01 Mar 2011 Computation basis l 30 360 TDS Limit 10000 Surcharge limit 50000 TDS rate 10 Surcharge rate 10 Additional tax rate 3 Primary customer CUST1 TDS computation method Projected Account details 5 61 ORACLE Customer Account Booking Interest Maturity Projected Number date rate date Interest amount for financial year CUST1 ACO001 800000 1 May 10 31 Jan 11 60000 Projected TDS Inquiry Details for primary customer CUST1 TD Account TDS Ami excluding surcharge Additional Tax Total TDS Amount Amount 6798 ACO0003 5 4 18 TDS Computation On pre closure or partial redemption of TD TDS needs to be deducted for the interest earned subject to the TDS limits TDS is deducted for the interest amount that is computed for the period since last liquidation and till the current date when pre closure partial redemption happens For the interest amount computed for the period since last liquidation till the pre closure partial redemption day TDS deduction will be triggered If the partial redemption happens after year end the TDS computed till year end needs to be debited from the customer If the liquidation amount is less than the yea
364. t the CIF Number should not be a part of the account mask you will have to specify the customer code manually A list of all the valid customer codes is displayed in the available option list You can select the appropriate Currency You have to identify the currency of the customer account A list of all the currencies maintained in the system will be displayed in the available list You can select the currency of transaction for the respective account If the currency of the account is not defined for the current period in the Turnover Limit Maintenance screen you will not be able to save the account Refer the section Maintaining Turnover Limits in the chapter titled Maintaining Mandatory Information in this User Manual for details about the Turnover Limit Maintenance screen Account Class In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can classify the customer accounts of your bank into different groups Each group is referred to as an account class and is maintained in the Account Class Maintenance screen For each class you have to define certain common attributes applicable to all accounts in the particular class While maintaining a specific account you have to identify the class to which the particular account belongs You can select the appropriate account class from the list of all the valid account classes maintained in the system Account classes that have surpassed their end date expired will not be displayed in the option list
365. taining Rules for Automatic Status Change If you have opted for automatic status change for all accounts belonging to an account class you have to maintain the criteria based on which the system will bring about the status change automatically You can define the different criteria in the Status Rule Definition screen Click the button Status Rule in the Account Class Maintenance screen to invoke it A Status Rule Definition Web Page Dialog Account Class TIMDT4 Description Term Deposits A c Sequence Number Derivation Rule Elements v Logical Operators Status In this screen you can define five conditions for each status applicable to an account class An account will be said to be in a specific status if any one of the five conditions associated with the status holds true for an account Conversely if all the conditions are false the account will automatically move to the next available status for which the condition is true 6 21 ORACLE The following elements are available based on which you can build a condition for automatic status change You can associate each of these elements with an account in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen The set of elements are as follows e Frozen e Dormant e Nodebits e Nocredits e Stoppayment e Current Status In addition the following elements will also be available for processing e OD overdraft Days e Inactive Days e Ove
366. te Time a Open Ha a a Specify the following details Branch Code Branch Code is displayed Customer No Specify the customer number 5 116 ORACLE Tax Recovery Account Specify the alternate saving account from which tax has to be recovered If no recovery account is maintained for a customer the TD account is deducted for any recovery Processing Recovery Batch recovery process ICTXRBT automatically deducts tax for all the TD accounts for the interest payments for which tax has not been deducted for the current financial year This batch is configured in EOTI and BOD stages In EOTI it is configured after ICEOD and ICTXYEB Frequency is set as yearly operationally controlled Holiday rule is set as Previous Working Day In BOD it is configured after ICEOD Frequency is set as daily operationally controlled You can specify tax payable GL for recovery process and its related transaction code in the Interest amp Charges Branch Parameters Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type ICTXRBT in the field at the top right corner Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button e RCCG Charges Branch Parameters Maintenance Webpage Dialog Branch Code Branch Name Liquidation Netting Process Till system Date Mext Working Day 1 Deposit Transaction Code Number of Process Redemption Transaction Code Redemption PrePayment Tax Payable GL Transaction Code Tax Recovery Tr
367. te the currency in which the cheque is issued Exchange Rate The exchange rate for the cheque currency is displayed Cheque Amount The cheque amount is displayed and cannot be changed Additionally you can maintain details pertaining to the party involved in the TD in the Beneficiary Details section Specify beneficiary s name address passport number and a brief description for the transaction In case redemption is to be done through GL you need to capture the following details for the GL account 5 4 11 1 GL Account Number choose the account number from the option list GL Account Currency the currency of the account is displayed Exchange Rate the exchange rate for the account currency is displayed GL Amount the savings amount is displayed and cannot be changed Narrative Enter a brief description for the transaction Linking FX Transactions In the Term Deposits Redemption Input screen click FX Linkages button to invoke the FX Linkages screen In this screen you can link FX transactions 5 49 ORACLE FX Linkage Details Web Page Dialog Term Deposit Account Number Module CO Bie F Seqho To hlod ID FX Reference Number Currency Outstanding Amount Linked Amount Liquictat 1 E Calculate You can partially fully redeem FCNR TD by local currency During TD redemption by LCY FX forward contract rate is used for currency conversion For more info
368. ted 31 Jul 08 10000 NIL 31 Oct 08 10000 1000 31 Jan 09 10000 1000 On 31 Jul 08 Nil On 31 Oct 08 Liquidation entries TDS_amount on evsronen som Additional TDS amount on ason o Recovery entries TDS amount m esoe o Additional TDS amount m ason o On 31 Jan 09 Liquidation entries TDS _ amount 9 119 ORACLE Surcharge Additional TDS amount Recovery entries Surcharge Additional TDS amount Term Deposit Account Number Specify the TD Account Number You can also choose the appropriate one from the option list The option list displays the deposit type of account class term deposit and recurring deposit maintained in the system The option list does not display auto deposit type of account class On specifying the TD Account number the system displays the following fields related to deposit account e Account Description e Account Balance e Customer Identification e Account Currency Renewal Choose this option to renew those accounts that are within the grace period days When a term deposit is moved to unclaimed on maturity date you have to manually renew or roll over the same term deposit Once you choose the option Renewal the Term Deposit Account Number field displays those accounts whose balances are moved to unclaimed GL ones ORACLE Redemption Choose this option to redeem the term deposit Redemption Mode Select the m
369. ted from the Linked Option Contract 5 15 ORACLE 5 4 Specifying TD Payout Details You can capture the parameters for automatic pay out by clicking on the TD Payout Details button A Term Deposit Web Page Dialog Term Deposit Bankers Cheque DO PC Branch Code Account Class Account Mo bal Customer Number Account Currency Account Class Interest You need to capture the following details here Branch Code The system defaults the branch code Account Number Specify the account number Currency The system defaults the currency If the pay out option is TD a new TD is created on the parent TD maturity date The account numbers for the new TD account is generated automatically 5 16 ORACLE 5 4 1 Term Deposit tab Click on Term Deposit tab to capture term deposit related details Term Deposit Web Page Dialog Term Gepost Bankers ChequeDD PC Branch Code Account Class Account Mo hal Customer Mumber Account Currency Account Class Interest The following details are captured here Branch Code The system defaults the branch code Currency The system defaults the currency Customer Number The system defaults the customer number Default From Indicate the Default From option to default the details from either the parent account TD account or account class The options available are e Parent Account e Account Class 5 17 ORACLE Account Class Specif
370. ted here However you can modify this period Notice Amount Specify the amount to be withdrawn within the Notice Period The amount you specify here should be in account currency The following fields are displayed in this screen 3 70 ORACLE e Branch Code The branch code of the current branch e Notice Id The identification of the notice e End Date The end date of the notice period o Note the following e Youcan unlock the record and modify details but you cannot make retrospective changes e You can modify only the inactive notices i e only when application date is less than activation date of the notice e You can close and reopen the Maintenance 3 4 Viewing Utilization of Free Amounts You can view the utilization of free amounts with respect to advance interest for the accounts using Notice Utilization Query screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDADINT at the top right corner of the application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Notice utilization query Web Page Dialog O Currency 0 usb F USD usb usb 0 usb C USD Fj USD O USD 0 usb 0 usb C USD F USD Branch Code S01 Account No 100041 11 12 Free Amount 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 Year 2009 Month Query Free Amt Utilized Free Amt Available Notice an U You can query the records based on the following c
371. tenance e Only subsystems of a contract or maintenance qualify for being a Node type The master record is never included as part of a Node type and its fields alone are labeled as Elements e This maintenance is required for Supporting amendment requests from any external system If no maintenance is done for a particular external system and source operation the amendment fails e The list of fields available in the LOV that can be amended for a particular Service and Operation combination is factory shipped for your bank You can add or remove fields based on your requirement To delete an element from the list of amendable fields you can use Delete icon To add an element to the same you can use the Add Icon 2 2 18 Specifying Details for Generation of MT920 The SWIFT message MT920 is a transaction message requesting latest information available for the particular account The request will be to transmit account customer statement message MT940 or Balance report MT941 or Interim statement M1942 or a customer summary statement MT950 Check the MT920 checkbox only if the customer is eligible for requesting MT920 swift messages for transaction details In the Customer Maintenance screen you can indicate if a customer is eligible for requesting MT920 messages To do this you need to click MT920 button in the Customer Information Maintenance screen and invoke the M1920 screen M7920 Web Page
372. tes the tags with the respective prefixes maintained in the customer personal details of the receiver This feature is applicable only for individual customers where the media type is Mail 2 50 ORACLE 2 3 5 Storing Authorized Variations of Customer s Name In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can indicate whether incoming Funds Transfers Payments and Collections should be processed only after the customer s Account Number and Name correspond to the authorized variations of the customer s name If you have enabled this as a preference in the FT Product Preference and PC Product Category screens you will need to maintain the authorized customer name variations through the Customer Names screen Invoke this screen by typing STDCIFNM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Customer Name Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer Humber 5222221 Customer Mame ADITYA Customer Mame Detail C Customer Name Ci AMDAMARTA Fields Input By VWAYALAK Date Time 7 3 2000 16 14 28 Modification Number 1 E open Authorized By SRINIE Date Time 72000 19 19 53 Ed Authorized In this screen you have to capture valid customer names which have to be associated with Customer Numbers maintained in Oracle FLEXCUBE Because of this maintenance each time an incoming FT or PC contact is processed the System validates the account number and name involved in t
373. that you have chosen across all the selected plan types e Taxable amount this is the same as the total gross distribution amount 11 5 ORACLE e Total distribution this is a confirmation that the gross distribution amount mentioned in the form is the total distribution for the selected distribution code e Federal Income Tax withheld this is the total amount withheld as tax for all the distributions from all the selected plan product types for the selected distribution code 11 6 4 Filing IRS Forms Electronically IRS regulations stipulate that any entity filing 250 or more forms of each type must do so in electronic or magnetic form You can access IRS s Filing Information Returns Electronically FIRE system over a dial up network and through a browser or through communication software like ProComm You can log on to the system using the logon name password and PIN provided to you by the IRS 11 7 Customer Account Opening Confirmation Report You can generate a report for the customer confirming that his her account with the bank has been successfully opened This report contains the following details e Customer number e Client account number e Matter e Account details You can generate the Customer Account Opening Confirmation report for one customer or all the customers at once as of a specific date To generate the report invoke Customer Account Opening Confirmation screen You can invoke this scr
374. the appropriate Exposure This is the country of exposure of this customer It is maintained for Central Liability tracking For instance for Toyota in the USA the country of exposure is Japan Location Each customer code should be associated with a location code The location is indicative of the place of residence of your customer The option list positioned next to this field contains a list of all the location codes maintained in the Location Details maintenance screen You can select the appropriate code to identify the place of residence of your customer Given below is an illustration of how a location code is associated with the CIF record of a customer 2 5 ORACLE Example You would like to maintain the CIF details of your customer Silas Marner Although Silas Marner is Irish he is a resident of London and lives in the northern part of London Your entries in the respective fields of the CIF Maintenance screen should be as follows Customer Code SILASO1 Nationality IRS Ireland Location Code NL1 North London 2 2 2 2 Indicating Address for Correspondence Specify the following Name In the lines that are provided you can enter the name of the customer The customer will be addressed by this name in all correspondence sent from the bank These characters should conform to SWIFT standards The number of characters that you can enter in this field is determined by the preference that you specified in the Ban
375. the account like current savings overdraft etc If a customer has two or more accounts under one account class you can specify the purpose of that account Location An address for a customer account is based on the Location and Media combination Location codes maintained through the Account Address Location Type Maintenance screen are made available against this field The address maintained here is always the primary or the default address Each customer can have several addresses for a particular media To distinguish between one address of a customer from another for a given media it is essential for you to specify a unique location for each address Also if you are amending an address here the same gets updated in the Customer Account Address Detailed table after the validations are through Media Indicate the media for which the charge should be levied Select one of the following options from the option list Mail Telex SWIFT Fax Status Details The account status reflects the status of the account The account may have a No Credit or No Debit order issued against it or a Stop Payment order or it may have been frozen for some reason and therefore dormant While posting transactions to the customer account the system checks the status of the account before the entry is processed No Debits No debits can be posted to the account For example Silas Marner a customer of your bank going abroad f
376. the period for which tax remittance is made Details of Remittance Specify a brief description about remittance The tax amount collected from customer or paid from internal GL during the period mentioned in the above maintenance is considered for generating TDS certificate 5 4 20 TDS certificate Form 16A is the TDS Certificate which bank has to provide for a financial year to the account holder for the purpose of filing IT returns TDS certificate contains the breakup of tax details You can generate ad hoc statement for a customer in a financial year You can also generate bulk tax certificates during year end The certificate will be per customer listing all the SB NRO account the customer has as ORACLE 5 4 20 1 SB TDS Certificate Specify the details in the Preference screen of Account Class Maintenance to generate the TDS certificate Form 16a for savings bank accounts Check SB TDS Certificate Required box to generate the certificate r Preferences Webpage Dialog Cheque Book Preferences Preferences Chegue Book Auto Reorder of Cheque Book Reorder Level Reorder Number Of Leaves Turnover Limit Preferences Turnower Limit Code NRI FCNR Deposit Amount Minimum Currency FEY Cash Deposit Limit Currency Limit Check Overdrett Facility Pass Book Facility Track Receivable Account Statistics Exclude Same Day Reversal transactions from Statement Back Period Entry Allowed Consolidation fo
377. the taxable amount Basis Amount for the customer for each tax cycle if the End Date overlaps tax cycles or for a particular tax cycle if the period falls within a specific tax cycle Remarks You can specify any remarks you think necessary for the tax limit you have defined This will be in free format text 2 2 16 1 Deriving Tax Free Allowance Limit The following table will be used to derive the tax free allowance limit Customer Tax Group Tax Category 2 2 1 Amendment Maintenance To recall you need to identify the fields that can be amended by an external system say a Siebel CRM application Every amendment request coming from such a system has the following data e Service Name This is a broad level grouping of similar operations within a module in Oracle FLEXCUBE The service names are published by Oracle FLEXCUBE As an example you can consider FCUBSCustomerAccountService This service is exposed by the FCUBS Interface Gateway to do a permissible operation on a customer account e Operation Name This is the name of the operation that the external system wishes to perform within the service These operations names are published by Oracle FLEXCUBE As an example you can consider ModifyCustomer which is for modification of a customer e External Operation Name This is the specific area of operation that an external system is performing on its side within the broad context of the Oracle FLEXCUBE s amendment I
378. ther Howse ale Number of Credit Cards You can capture the following professional details of the individual type of customer through this screen Employment Details e The employment status of the customer full time permanent full time temporary part time self employed retired pensioned retired non pensioned unemployed e The number of years the customer has been in his her current job e The age at which the customer is due to retire from his her current job or business e The designation this customer held in his her previous job or employment e The name of the previous employer of this customer e The designation held by this customer in his present job e The name address country telephone telex fax and E mail address of the customer s current employer The name address and country of the employer should conform to SWIFT standards 2 19 ORACLE Income Details The annual returns that your customer earns through salary and other sources of employment if any If your customer earns revenue through other source apart from a monthly salary you have to capture the customer s combined income from all other sources The annual expenses that your customer incurs from sources other than the annual salary The currency in which the customer s financial details like annual salary annual rent expenses annual loan repayment etc is expressed Expenditure Pattern The customer s annual expenditure on rent premium on insur
379. ther customer of your bank Also a customer of your bank could be a joint account holder with another customer of your bank You can capture these details when you set up the CIF or customer account For linking a customer account you need to specify details of the relationship for the account Click the Linked Entities button in the Customer Maintenance CIF screen The Linked Entities screen is displayed S Linked Entities Web Page Dialog Customer Mo CHO001018 Relationship Linkage Customer Description Relations Include Relationship M You must specify a customer code provide a description and ID for the relationship Customer Select the customer code from the option list You can link any number of customers to the primary holder the customer for whom you are capturing the CIF details through this screen by establishing a relationship between the two customers Description In this field the system displays the name of customer that you have selected in the previous field You cannot change this description Relationship You have to choose a relationship code to establish a relationship between the customer being selected and the customer primary holder you are maintaining By default the system will select the customer of the account as the Primary Holder This is a pre shipped relationship and you will not be allowed to change the relationship 9 42 ORACLE Include Relationsh
380. ting back valued transactions the System verifies whether the Back Period Entry Allowed option has been enabled for the account class If the option has not been enabled an error message is displayed This check is also performed while uploading journal entry transactions Enabling Printing of Account Statistics You can enable printing statistics in respect of accounts using an account class either period code wise or financial year wise for the following customer information e Low and High Balance for a period The lowest and highest current balances for the period e Average credit and debit balance for a period This is computed as the sum of credit debit current balances in a period divided by the number of days of credit debit balance during the period e Credit and debit days The number of days the account was in credit debit balance in the period e Credit and Debit Turnover The credit debit turnover for the period e Excess days in debit balance The number of days in a month when the account exceeded the overdraft limits e Overdraft Limit This is computed by summing the temporary overdraft limit and the sub limit of the account For each month this would represent the limit on the last date of the month e Credit grade of the Customer This would be the prevalent rating on the last day of the period For the current period this information is provided up to the previous working day To enable print
381. ting up IC products for time deposits refer the Interest and Charges module user manual Opening a time deposit account in Oracle FLEXCUBE is similar to opening a current or savings account CASA In the Customer Account Maintenance screen indicate the Time Deposit Account Class under which you are opening the time deposit account To define interest and other parameters for a time deposit account click on the Interest button In the IC Special Conditions screen that is displayed you can maintain the basic interest details for the deposit 5 38 ORACLE IC Special Conditions Maintenance Account Details Branch Code 005 Account 70000000383 _ Calculation Account fOOo0000383 Interest Booking Account TO00CO0IS63 Charge Booking Account fOOOOOOOSE2 Interest Statement Consolidated Charge Account Currency Product Details Product Code Ro H UDE Currency GBF Effective Date Effective Date 2008 06 27 User Defined Element ID TAX_RATE Interest Start Date Charge Start Date Interest Booking Branch Charge Booking Branch courted 2008 06 27 os Dr Cr Advices O05 l Rate Chart Allowed toft Waive Interest Generate UDE Change Advice Open 1071 os In this screen you can also specify the Interest Liquidation Account for the customer if required In the Booking Account field specify the account to which interest should be moved on the
382. tion is allowed for the deposits with amount blocks If the TD is linked partially then partial liquidation of the TD will be allowed only if you check this box e The grace period for renewing a TD Only if you opt for this option the TD can be renewed using the TD redemption screen explained later in this manual This option is applicable only for deposits whose interest and principal is moved to unclaimed GLs upon maturity If you have specified account liquidation for the deposit then this option will be disabled You will be allowed to change these details for a specific customer deposit 9 137 ORACLE Specifying Recurring Deposit Details for an Account The recurring deposit details associated with the Account Class are defaulted to the customer account You have the option of changing them for a specific account Click on the Deposit button in the IC Special Conditions Maintenance sub screen of the Customer Account Maintenance screen The Details for Deposit Types of Account are displayed 23 Details for Deposit types of Account Web Page Dialog Principal Liquidation Branch Interest Start Date Maturity Date Term Deposit Pay In Option Offset Branch Recurring Deposit Payment Branch Payment Account Installment Amount Payment Date Payment Currency Auto Rollover T Close on Maturity Move Interest to Unclaimed T Move Principal to Unclaimed zl T Auto Payment TakeDown I Move Maturities to Un
383. tomer Account Maintenance screen by selecting the Lodgment Book option Euro Cheques Euro chequebook can be issued to a customer whose account has checked for Euro cheques option in the customer account maintenance screen the account should be a account with EUR Currency only Specifying Provisioning Details In addition to the provisioning preferences listed above you must also indicate the applicable provisioning percentage and the discount percentage details in the Provision Percentages screen that you can invoke by clicking on the Provisioning Percentage button in the Provisioning Details section of the Customer Account Maintenance screen a ORACLE J Provisioning Percentages Web Page Dialog Account Number 100014 Provisioning Percentage Details E Status Provision Percent Discount Percent Account Number The system displays the customer account number Status Specify the status of the account for which you are maintaining provisioning percentages The adjoining option list displays all valid status codes maintained in the system Select the appropriate one Provision Percent If you wish to indicate a specific provisioning percentage to be applicable for the account you can specify it in the Provisioning Percentage screen If you do not specify any provisioning percentage the provisioning batch picks up the applicable provisioning percentage from the Exposure Provisioning Percentage Maintena
384. tomer Category Maintenance screen Select from the list and indicate the Category under which the particular customer is to be categorized You need to capture the basic details for each customer regardless of the type of customer you are maintaining a ORACLE 2 2 2 5 Specifying Group to which Customer Belongs When you maintain CIF details for customers in the Customer Maintenance screen you can specify the customer group to which the customer belongs for Group Code You must specify a group code defined for a group type that is the same as the customer type for instance if the customer is a retail customer you must specify a group defined for retail customers Charge Group Specify the charge group of the customer from the option list provided Only the Group codes maintained with type Charge will appear for selection Clearing Group Categorize the customer for levying charges at a customer group level Tax Group Specify the tax group of the customer Tax rate will be determined based on the tax group value selected here EEFC Percentage Specify the EEFC percentage of the bill amount For more information on EEFC details refer chapter Processing Bills in the Bills and Collection User Manual User Access Group Specify the user access group You can specify only the groups which are linked with the user at the user maintenance level SSN While maintaining the details of an individual type of cus
385. tomer number from the list of values provided 12 1 ORACLE The generated report will contain the following elements Deposit Term Maturity Date Total Interest Payable 2 3 4 5 7 Maturity Amount Product Code Product Title Deposit Currency Currency Total Close on Maturity Auto Rollover 10 11 12 13 14 15 6 Field Description TD account Number Name of the TD account holder TD account opened date Value Date of the TD account Deposit Amount TD Tenor Maturity Date Interest Start Date Maturity date of the TD account Interest Amount This will show simple interest amount which will be calculated using the Deposit Amount Deposit Term and Interest Rate This will be the projected value and this may not be equal to the actual interest amount This will show the sum of Deposit amount and Total Interest Payable as computed in the above column Branch name Account Class code of the TD account Account Class description of the TD account Currency of the TD account Currency wise total for deposit amount Interest Payable and Maturity Amount This will show whether TD will be closed on maturity This will show whether TD will be automatically rolled over ORACLE 12 2 Term Deposits Closed for the period You can generate reports for the Term Deposit accounts closed for a period for a customer To generate the report invoke Term Deposit Account Closed Rep
386. tomer on advices sent to the customer you can enable the Display IBAN in Advices option by checking it This specification will be defaulted from the account class linked to the customer account You will be allowed to change it for a specific account You can choose to print the IBAN Number in advices that are sent to the customer by enabling the check box positioned next to the Display IBAN on Advices field If the Display IBAN on Advices check box is disabled you can enable this option by checking the box Consequently the IBAN Account Number will be printed on all customer correspondence Debit Credit advices involving the particular account Because of choosing to print IBAN numbers in the correspondence sent to the customer the Oracle FLEXCUBE account number will be replaced by the IBAN number The lists of SWIFT messages that will include IBAN account numbers are as follows MT940 Customer Statement Message MT950 Statement Message MT900 Confirmation of debit MT910 Confirmation of Credit o While processing incoming payments the system checks to see whether the account involved is an IBAN account If the account is an IBAN account it will be processed with the corresponding Oracle FLEXCUBE account number Secondary A c Statement This refers to the type of statement to be generated periodically by the system for this account You can specify whether you want a detailed or summary statement or if you do not want a
387. tomer whose details you are capturing If a particular field is disabled it means that the field is not relevant to the type of customer that you are creating 7J Customer Maintenance Webpage Dialog Customer No Short Name Branch Code Main Auxiliary Personal Corporate Director Address For Correspondence Name Address Swift Code Fax IFSC Code Group Code Group Mis Joint Standing Instructions Linked Entities Text Fields Image CLS Restrictions MT920 Domestic Professional lssuer Cards Change Log Maker Checker Full Name Unique Identifier Status Name Value Geographic Country Nationality Language Exposure Location KYC STatus External Reference Number Media Date Time Mod No Date Time 2 2 1 1 Specifying Details of Customer Specify the following Branch Code The system defaults the branch code from the current branch Customer No Individual Corporate Bank Frozen Deceased Whereabouts Unknown CRM Customer Mailers Required CLS Participant lssuer Customer Treasury Customer Joint Customer MT920 Relationship Pricing BB Authorized E Open The customer code is the code you assign to identify a customer It is referred to as the customer CIF Number This code should be unique across branches It can be 9 characters long Example Assign a code using a maximum of 9 characters alphanumeric For example assume your cust
388. tomer you can capture the social security number SSN of the customer While processing funds transfer on behalf of your customer the SS Number of the customer involved in the transaction will be defaulted from this screen to FT Contract Online screen If the value of debits outgoing customer transfers for a specific customer account exceeds USD 2500 with in a seven day working period the system displays an override message informing you of the same Example Let us assume that on the 24 of September 2001 Mrs Wendy Klien a customer of your bank initiates an outgoing FT for USD 2000 Since all weekends are considered as holidays at your bank while processing the transfer all debits against her account for six working days preceding the 24 ie up to the 16 September will be tracked against her SS number 2 8 ORACLE 2 2 3 Again on the 1 of October 2001 she initiates another outgoing transfer which necessitates a deduction of USD 700 on her account While processing the transfer the system checks for all debits upto the 21 of September An amount of USD 2000 has already been tracked against her SS number on the 24 of September However since the current debit exceeds the maximum limit of USD 2500 for a running seven day working period the transfer will be processed only if you confirm the override FX Nett Customer Oracle FLEXCUBE provides the facility of netting currency wise or currency pair wise and sending messages t
389. top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow buiton E Jobs Browser Web Page Dialog Job Module E Process BALANCE REPORT Status Search Advanced Search Reset l Records per page fis z TT Of 1 Pr JobModule Process Process Sequence Number Status Status N Stopped T Running H Halted Select the option Generate Balance Report from the Process option list All associated accounts of the particular branch that have been marked for generation of balance statements are procured by Oracle FLEXCUBE The debit and credit accounts considered since the previous issue of an MT 941 are picked for the current processing The previous messages are based on the parameters maintained for each account This processing produces details of the statement generation 6 1 17 4 Generation of Ad hoc Reports Balance reports for each account under an account class can be generated on an ad hoc basis The Ad Hoc report generation screen is used for capturing details of a balance report sent ad hoc 6 31 ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing ACDADCRP in the upper right corner of the application toolbar and clicking the arrow adjacent it E Adhoc Report Generation Web Page Dialog Balance Branch Code CHO Swift Message Type 341 Account a Generate Statement Branch Code The branch to which the account marked for balance report generation belong
390. ts and accounts or at a customer group or CIF level 8 1 1 1 Status Processing at Group CIF Level If you opt for group or CIF level processing it is done in two stages e The worst status among all loan contracts and accounts under a specific customer group or CIF is arrived at 8 1 ORACLE e All accounts and contracts involving the customer group or CIF are then moved to the worst status that was arrived at The individual status of the account and contract apart from the worst status being assigned is also captured and displayed in the respective account and contract screens 8 1 1 2 Processing at Individual Contract Account Level If you opt for status processing at individual contract account level the status of each contract or account would be assigned according to the status processing parameters that are operative for the contract or account For details about the Branch Parameters screen refer the Core Services user manual 8 1 2 Setting up Customer Groups for Provisioning You may wish to track exposure due to loans issued to a group of customers as a whole and assign the status of all loans issued to the group as the status of the loan with the worst status among those issued to the group You may similarly wish to include the exposure due to outstanding overdraft in respect of a group of customer accounts as a whole and assign the status of all customer accounts belonging to the group as the status of the customer acc
391. ts and loan contracts belonging to the customer group or CIF is arrived at All accounts and contracts belonging to the customer group or CIF are then moved to the worst status that was arrived at In the Status Rule Derivation screen in the Derivation Rule field you can define the conditions according to which the status of all accounts using an account class the aging analysis could be tracked For each account class you can maintain a derivation rule which would be used during status processing to arrive at the status of each account if status processing is at a contract level or the worst status among all accounts and loans belonging to groups or CIF level if status processing is at a Group CIF level To define the derivation rule you could use a combination of multiple elements and arithmetic and logical operators The following elements may be used Frozen Dormant Nodebits Nocredits Stoppayment Current Status Customer Classification 8 9 ORACLE 8 1 7 8 1 7 1 In addition the following elements will also be available for processing e OD overdraft Days e Inactive Days e Overline Days e TOD Temporary Overdraft Days For details regarding the maintenance of other status control parameters in the Status Rule Definition screen refer the chapter Maintaining Mandatory Information in this user manual Provision Processing for Accounts Provision processing for customer accounts is only done if indicated in the
392. tton to define the parameters for a deposit type account class The Details Specific to Deposit Type of Accounts will be displayed e DACIE Specific to Deposit Type of Accounts Webpage Dialog Minimum Tenor Days Months ears Recurring Deposits C Auto Rollover E Close On Maturity C Allow Partial Liquidation C Allow partial Liquidation with amount block C Move Interest to Unclaimed C Move Principal to Unclaimed C Rate Chart Allowed _ Recurring Deposit C Move Maturity to Unclaimed C Move Funds on override Minimum Amount Maximum Amount Grace Period For Renewal PC Bridge GL PC Category PC Transaction Code Cluster id Default Tenor Days Months ears Installment Frequency Days Months ears Tax Details Limit Tax Details Limit Currency Mandatory Tax Details Field Maximum Tenor Days Months ears DCD Linked Currency Currency Option Product Fixing Days Minimum Schedule Days Maximum Schedule Days Minimum Installment Amount Allow Rollover You can opt to automatically rollover a deposit if it is not liquidated on its maturity date Choose the Auto Rollover option to automatically rollover deposits opened under the account class Time Deposits that are open and marked for Auto Rollover will automatically be rolled over during the Beginning of Day operations on the Maturity date You can define the terms and conditions for the new
393. turns for that particular year 11 6 1 Generating Form 1099 R as Part of Initial Filing During normal generation of Form 1099 R as part of your initial filing with the IRS the system will include all transactions entered in the previous year for the previous year For example during normal generation of Form 1099 R on say January 20 2003 all transactions entered during 2002 and pertaining to the financial year 2002 will be reported 11 6 2 Generating Form 1099 R after Tax Filing During corrected generation post the date of tax filing the system will include apart from all the transactions included in normal generation such transactions which are entered in the current year for the previous year The report shows the total contributions for the year 11 6 3 Details printed on Form 1099 R Oracle FLEXCUBE generates Form 1099 R for each customer for a distribution code You have the option of combining distributions with the same code from any number of different plan product types IRA codes that you have marked for not reporting to the IRS will not be available for generation of 1099 R forms Form 1099 R contains the following details e Your bank s name address and identification number e The customer s name social security number and address e Plan product types that are being reported e The distribution code and description e Gross distribution this is the total distribution amount for the distribution code
394. tween 1 and 31 corresponding to the system date If you set the statement date to 30 then account statements will be generated on The last working day for months with lt 30 days For months with 30 days on the 30th if 30th is a holiday on the next working day If you set the statement date to 31 then account statements will be generated on The 31 for month with 31 days if 31st is a holiday on the next working day The last working day for months lt 31 days For a fortnightly statement you could specify 1 and 15 For all other cycles account statement will be generated on the last day of that cycle Generate Stat Only On Movement You can indicate that an account statement should be generated for the customer s account only when there has been a movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred out of the account For instance let us assume that on the August 21 2001 you have set the account statement generation frequency as Daily for the account LI020804 On the September 5 2001 there has been no movement of funds in the particular account If you have opted for the Generate Only on Movement option the system will not generate a statement message for September 5 2001 If you choose not to enable this option account statements will be generated regardless of whether there has been a movement of funds or not 3 30 ORACLE Display IBAN in Advices If you would like to print the IBAN number of the cus
395. u have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique to accounts in the branch and a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1 and containing 25 leaves you cannot start another book in respect of the same account with these numbers However you can start a book with the same numbers in respect of another account in the branch Number of Leaves You can specify the number of leaves that the lodgment book is to have Order Date and Issue Date By default the order date and the issue date of the lodgment book is considered to be the application date you can change the dates and specify them as required Order Details You can specify order details as required for the lodgment book Order Details for Lodgment Printing If you wish the order details to be sent to the lodgment book printing agent you can indicate so If you indicate this by checking the Include for Lodgment Printing box the issue date for the lodgment book will be updated by the printing interface Querying for Account Statistics You can view period wise statistics for an account in the Customer Account Statistics Query screen To invoke this screen select Queries from the Application Browser then Customer Accounts and Statistics under it You can also invoke this screen by typing ACDSTQRY in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ie ORACLE 3 Customer Account Statistics Query Web
396. u specified Click the windows Close icon to exit the screen without saving the entries that you made 2 2 25 Maintaining Type of Relationships You can maintain the different types of relationships that can exist between customers of your bank in the Relation Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing CSDRELMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button e Relations hip Maintenance Webpage Dialog Fields input By Dale Time iodifinstion Humer authorized Authorized By Cate Time BB can Specify the following details in this screen e Relation Define the type of relationship in this field You can use a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters to define a relationship e Category Select the category from the drop down list to define the nature of the relationship with the customer The available options are gt Customer to Customer gt Customer to Account gt Customer to Contract e Description Provide a brief description of the relationship being maintained This will further help you in identifying the relationship You can enter a maximum of 35 alphanumeric characters in this field 2 41 ORACLE The types of relationships defined in this screen will become available for linking two customers only upon authorization of the details maintained 2 2 26 Relationships for Customers A customer of your bank can have relationships with any o
397. ual validations and is Rejected if THERE IS ANY DISCREPANCY IN THE INSTRUMENT gt There is a Stop payment instruction issued against the instrument e f Positive Pay Yes and Deferred Reconciliation No Cheque is subject to the usual validations and processing e f Positive Pay Yes and Deferred Reconciliation Yes and if any one or more of the three fields viz Branch Account No Cheque No does not match with the Positive Pay instruction the cheque will be put under Deferred Reconciliation as Unreconciled IF THIS UNRECONCILED CHEQUE COMES IN FOR CLEARING ONCE AGAIN WITH THE SAME SET OF PARAMETERS IT IS REJECTED gt If Positive Pay instruction is received for an Unreconciled cheque it is marked Reconciled and the cheque status is marked Liquidated e If Positive Pay Yes and Deferred Reconciliation Yes and the Amount field does not match with the Positive Pay instruction the check is Rejected outright All data pertaining to reconciled and unreconciled cheques are maintained and information regarding account no cheque no amount and status of the instrument reconciled or unreconciled can be retrieved if needed An EOD batch function will purge all reconciled cheques as part of the clearing batch process During the upload process validation is done against all the positive pay the deferred reconciliation flags combinations and all Unreconciled Positive Pay Instructions are marked as Reconciled and liquidated
398. ues applicable e Previous M1942 This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since previous M1942 would be sent in the current interim statement e Previous M1940 This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since previous MT940 will be sent in the current interim statement If this option is selected you will have to specify the cycle of account statement to be considered 3 57 ORACLE Minimum Debit Amount Specify the minimum transaction amount for the debit transaction to be eligible for reporting in the interim statement The corresponding amount for the account currency will be defaulted However you can modify the amount defaulted If the amounts are not defined at the account class for the currency in which the account is being created no defaulting of amounts shall be done Minimum Credit Amount Specify the minimum transaction amount for the credit transaction to be eligible for reporting in the interim statement However you can modify the amount defaulted If the amounts are not defined at the account class for the currency in which the account is being created no defaulting of amounts shall be done Daily Statement Count Specify the count of interim statement generated during the day In case a statement is scheduled to generate but is not generated because there is no movement the counter will not be incremented The counter will be reset at End of Day Year to Date Statement Count
399. uld be triggered automatically or not If yes the parameters for the same Specifying liquidation preferences for debit interest and charges to notify your customers through a Debit Interest Notification message in the case of charges a Charge Notification message before debiting the customer s personal current account for debit interest or charges Maintaining initial funding details for new accounts Each of the parameters has been discussed in detail in the subsequent sections Account Class and Description The account class code is a unique 6 character code which identifies the class Along with the class code you need to assign an appropriate description to the account class For instance let us assume you are defining a class for savings account of individuals You could associate the code SB IND with it Similarly the description that you associate with it could be something like this Savings accounts of individuals Account Type The six different types of accounts that you can maintain are e Nostro account your bank s accounts with another bank e Miscellaneous Debit Each transaction is entered with a reference number In the miscellaneous debit account a single debit transaction is matched subsequently with credits against the same reference number 6 3 ORACLE While posting transactions into this account if the first entry is a debit the subsequent reconciling entries should be all credits The s
400. um of Deposit amount and Interest Amount Product Code Account Class code of the TD account Product Title Account Class description of the TD account Deposit Currency Currency of the TD account 14 Currency Total Currency wise total for deposit amount Interest Payable and Maturity Amount 12 8 ORACLE ORACLE Core Entities November 2010 Version 1 0 Oracle Corporation World Headquarters 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood Shores CA 94065 U S A Worldwide Inquiries Phone 1 650 506 7000 Fax 1 650 506 7200 www oracle com financial_ services Copyright 2010 Oracle Financial Services Software Limited All rights reserved No part of this work may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system adopted or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photographic graphic optic recording or otherwise translated in any language or computer language without the prior written permission of Oracle Financial Services Software Limited Due care has been taken to make this document and accompanying software package as accurate as possible However Oracle Financial Services Software Limited makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and shall not be responsible for any loss or damage caused to the user by the direct or indirect use of this document and the accompanying Software System Furthermore Oracle Financial Services Software Limited reserves the right to alter modify
401. unt the transaction type of MIS class will be picked up from the account class Composite MIS Group The composite type of MIS class will be defaulted from those defined for the customer Cost Code For an account the cost codes will be picked up from the account class 3 50 ORACLE 3 1 22 1 Specifying Change log Details A Change Log Web Page Dialog Branch CHO ACCOUNT 100002 Change Log Details T Mis Class Transaction Date Old Mis Code New Mis Code Branch The current logged in branch code is displayed here 3 1 22 2 Specifying Transfer log details 23 Balance Transfer Log Web Page Dialog Account Number 100002 Balance TransterLog Details IC Branch Period Fin Year Transaction Date GICode Mis Class Old Mis Code New Mis Code Trflnd Ccy1 Ex Rate E Here you can capture the following details Account Number This is the account number of the deposit If you specify an account that is disallowed for your user id and move to the next field the system will throw up an error override The restricted accounts for users ids are maintained in the User Account Class Restrictions screen The system will perform this validation for default settlement pick up also 3 51 ORACLE 3 1 23 Specifying UDF Details You can capture User Defined Fields for the account using the UDF screen To invoke this screen click the Fields button in the Customer Accounts Maintenan
402. unt statistics has been enabled an accounting End of Day EOD process updates the statistics table both period wise and according to financial years The book dated balances are used for computation of statistics and the balances are maintained according to accounting periods Maintaining Sweep in Accounts Oracle FLEXCUBE supports maintaining online sweep of amounts for any type of accounts other than TD and RD whenever they have insufficient balances during a debit transaction You need to capture the debit and credit accounts along with branch details The debit account displays all same currency customer accounts except TD accounts When you pass a debit entry and if the transaction account has insufficient balances the system performs the following procedures The system checks whether there are any sweep maintenance for the transacting account It validates the account type and balances of all the linked accounts It collects the credit balances from the linked accounts maintained for the transacting account It passes the accounting entries to move the credit balance to the transacting account Finally the system utilizes the OD limits of the Transacting Account and Sweep in Accounts for each account if the credit balances are not sufficient If the total balances are not sufficient for the transaction then the system does not utilize the Sweep in Account and it displays the below overrides and saves the transaction Available
403. unting has been applied the Maximum and Minimum validations are performed Alternatively the discount if any which is applicable can be specified as a percentage of the calculated consolidated charge amount Discount Percentage You can indicate the discount percentage if any which would need to be applied to the calculated charge After the discounting has been applied the Maximum and Minimum validations are performed The discount if any which is applicable can also be specified as a flat discount amount Specifying Standing Instruction Details You can capture details of standing instructions for the account using the Instruction Diary Summary screen To invoke this screen click the Standing Instructions button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen me ORACLE E Instruction Diary Summary Web Page Dialog Diary Details O Auth Status Rec Stat Instruction No Unit Type Unit Yalue Branch Code Instruction Instruction Type Execution Days Here you can view the following details e Authorization status e Record status e Instruction number e Unit type e Unit value e Branch code e Instruction e Instruction type 3 1 21 Specifying Linked Entities You can capture details of linked entities for the account using the Linked Entities screen To invoke this screen click the Linked Entities button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen A Linked Ent
404. ustomer Account Maintenance The current status and exposure category of the account is also stored along with the balances In case of contracts the provision amount is not re computed when a contract amendment value dated amendment or automatic or manual payment is done but only as part of the provisioning batch On maturity of the contract the provision amount is reversed Similarly in the case of accounts the provision amount is written back when the account is closed 8 1 7 2 Computation of Provision Amount When status processing is done at a group or CIF level The worst status among all contracts and accounts under a specific customer group or CIF is arrived at All accounts and contracts with automatic status processing involving the customer group or CIF are then moved to the worst status that was arrived at The total exposure of customers in a group or CIF is considered as the sum of all outstanding overdrafts in respect of accounts belonging to the group CIF as well as the loans issued to the group or CIF This total exposure is considered for deriving the provision percentage and computation of the provision amount The computed provision amount is stored and displayed in the Amount Tab in the Customer Account Maintenance The current status and exposure category of the account is also stored along with the balances The provision amount is computed for each account using the provision rule defined for the account class
405. ustomer Information Maintenance screen set up the details for 2 45 ORACLE o John Doe o John Doe Building Contractor o Jane Doe o Mary Bloggs o Jack Black Builders Joe Green Builders Since you can link loans to a single customer only the following pairs should also be maintained as customers John and Jane Doe e John Doe and Mary Bloggs John Doe and Jack Black Builders John Doe and Joe Green Builders The linkage between the above individuals will be as follows John Doe John Doe Building Contractor John Doe John and Jane Doe Jane Doe John and Jane Doe Mary Bloggs John Doe and Mary Bloggs Depending on the type of loan availed and the Customer involved in it the exposure report will display the accounts of the individuals as depicted in the table below Customer John Jane Jack Mary Joe Doe OR Doe Black Bloggs Green John Doe Builder John Doe Personal Y Car Loan i ORACLE Customer John Jane Jack Mary Joe Doe OR Doe Black Bloggs Green John Doe Builder John Doe Commercial Y Building Loan Y Contractor Current Y Account Equipment Lease John and Home Loan Y Y Jane Doe John Doe Home Loan and Mary Bloggs John Doe Commercial and Jack Black Builders John Doe Current and Joe Account Green Commercial Builders Loan Bridging Loan jvane Doe carton v To Mary Current Y Bloggs Account Y Term Loan Jack Black Current Y Builder Account
406. ute the Net Booking No Daily applicable tax dated operation rate fora 5 108 ORACLE iS WI Others Net determine the limit allowed for he tax waiver not be considered if the total interest amount is greater han tax waiver Booking No Daily dated operation Booking O Daily dated operation N INT_FOR_PE Interest amount Others Booking N Daily RIOD accrued for the dated operation current period TDS LIMIT To determine the Others N limit up to which i EAR_END_T This will AX determine the amount deducted during year end YEAR_END i current liquidation is on year end 0 Not a year end 1 Is a year end O Booking O Daily dated operation Booking No Daily dated operation Booking No Daily dated operation 5 109 ORACLE Others Net 7 l 7 l SURCHG_LIMIT SURCHG_RATE ADL TAX RATE 2 YEAR_END_SU RCHG YEAR END AD DTAX2 9 4 25 4 This will be the limit up to which surcharge will be exempted This will determine the applicable surcharge rate fora customer This will determine the applicable additional tax rate fora customer This will determine the surcharge amount deducted during year end This will determine the additional tax amount deducted during year end Setting up IC rule pi r r Bi Bi Type Booking dated Booking dated Booking dated Booking dated Booking dated TAX Formula for IC rule are defined as follows
407. utions this is the total of all contributions into plans of the selected type with Rollover as the contribution code e Roth IRA conversion amount while usually applicable for Roth IRAs this in the general case is the total contribution into plans of the selected type with Conversion as the contribution code e Total re characterized contributions this is the total of all contributions into plans of the selected type with Re characterization as the contribution code 11 4 ORACLE e New contributions this is the total of all contributions into plans of the selected type with New as the contribution code e Other contributions this is the total of all contributions into plans of the selected type with contribution codes different from any of those mentioned above e Fair Market Value this is the total year end balance of all the plans of the selected type o IRA codes that you have marked for not reporting to the IRS will be left out of all of the above summations 11 6IRS Form 1099 R Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to generate Form 1099 R for reporting distributions from a selected type of IRA plan for any year to the Internal Revenue Service IRS You can generate this report for e Filing with IRS authorities e Providing a copy to your customer e Keeping an internal copy for you You can generate Form 1099 R either as part of initial filing with the IRS or after you have filed tax re
408. uto or Both and is done by the status change batch which will be run after the CL batch The status change batch uses the worst status derived by the CL batch for the update For details about loan status processing and provisioning consult the Loans user manual For details about account provisioning refer to the chapter Provisioning for Customer Accounts in this user manual External Ref No To recall if a customer record is created from an external Siebel CRM application after a successful upload into Oracle FLEXCUBE the external reference number is defaulted in the External Ref No field You can amend the same when you unlock a record and make changes Bill Margin Specify the bill margin for the Customer It can be any value between zero to less than 100 For existing customer If you try to unlock to define the margin and if there is any active Bill Contracts already booked against the customer then the system displays an override message Bills Contracts already active for the customer For more information on margin maintenance refer topic Specifying Our Customer Details under Bills and Collection User Manual PAN No Specify the Permanent Account Number PAN of the customer This is mandatory for primary customers in case of customer grouping 2 10 ORACLE Note the following e On saving a Term Deposit if PAN number is not specified for the customer system displays an overr
409. utomatic reordering of cheque books should be allowed for the account In addition you will have to maintain the check book details through the respective screen Similarly you can choose to indicate that the account holder needs to be provided with a Passbook and ATM facility Although these specifications are defaulted from the account class screen where you had maintained these specifications for all accounts belonging to a class the options specified at the account level will supersede that specified for the account class Cheque If checked indicates that this account holder can avail of a check book facility This shall be defaulted from the Account Class screen where you had defined this facility for all accounts belonging to a class The option specified at the account level will supersede that specified for the account class Passbook If checked indicates that this account number can avail of a passbook facility This shall be defaulted from the account class screen where you had defined this facility for all accounts belonging to a class The option specified at the account level will supersede that specified for the account class ATM lf checked indicates that this account number can avail of an ATM facility This shall be defaulted from the Account Class screen where you had defined this facility for all accounts belonging to a class The option specified at the account level will supersede that specified for the
410. utomatically credit the balances utilized from Sweep In Accounts If the earlier transaction is reversed then the Sweep is Not Required will still be there If any transaction debits the main account balance then the second transaction uses the Sweep in Account Balance If the first transaction is reversed then the second transaction is uses the Sweep in Account Balance which might not have been necessary 3 83 ORACLE 4 1 4 2 4 Maintaining Tax Allowance Limit Introduction You can maintain tax free allowance limit at the customer account level The allowance limit at account level will be used only for Interest computed on the account Maintaining Customer Tax Allowance Screen You can access this screen by clicking Customer Maintenance and then Customer Account Tax Allowance in the Application Browser The screen appears as shown below Customer Account Tax Allowance Maintenance Web Page Dialog Branch CHO Account Contract Account Account Contract KXXKAAA Contract Description Tax Category sudha Description Start Date 7 3 2000 End Date 7 7 2000 Customer Tax Association a SeqNo CustomerNo Allowance Currency Remarks Input By SUDHA8 Date Time 7 3 2000 Modification Number 1 open Authorized By SUDHA8 Date Time 7 3 2000 Ed Authorized Specify the following Customer Account Number You need to specify the customer account for which you wish to maintain Tax Allowance Limit The custo
411. utton in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen The Notice Preferences screen is displayed as follows A Notice Preference Web Page Dialog Description SAYING ACT Advance Interest Monthly Free Amount 2000 00 Notice Days g Validity Period 10 This screen is applicable only for saving type of account The following field is displayed in this screen 3 62 ORACLE Description The following details are defaulted from the account class maintenance level However at the account level you are allowed to modify this Advance Interest Check this field to levy the advance interest on the account Note the following The customer is liable to pay this advance interest in case he she fails to provide the required notice to the bank The system deducts the advance interest from the credit Interest earned by the customer on his her credit balance in the account Monthly Free Amount Specify the amount that the customer can withdraw per calendar month from his her savings account without being liable to pay advance interest Notice Days Specify the number of days before which the customer should notify the bank if he she wants to withdraw an amount more than the Free Amount from his her account Validity Period Specify the validity period in number of days During this period the customer can do the withdrawal of the amount for which he she notified the bank For more details on Notice Accou
412. vity is not functional Daylight Limit The daylight limit is the limit up to which an overdraft is allowed for the business day The daylight limit will be added to temporary overdraft to calculate the available balance if EOD is not in progress Daylight limit is not considered during EOD Sro You can specify the daylight limit only if Daylight Limit option is checked in linked Account Class Preferences screen By default the system will display the value as zero You can however change it Cr Transaction Limit The limit for credit transactions in the account currency When a transaction exceeds this limit an override is displayed The override requires a dual authorization to save the transaction Credit Start Date This is the date from which this monitoring comes into effect The check will be performed for all entries to customer accounts with transaction booking date greater than or equal to the start date Credit Rev Date This is the date on which you would wish to revise this limit The limit check will continue irrespective of the date maintained here The revision date must be greater than the start date and can be left blank 3 36 ORACLE 3 1 16 Specifying Joint Holder Details You can capture details of joint holders of the account using the Linked Entities screen Click the Joint Holders button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen to invoke this screen 3 Linked Entities
413. x Details Field Select tax detail fields you need as mandatory fields from the adjoining drop down list This list displays the following values e Only Tax ID Select if you need only Tax ID as mandatory field e Only Tax Details 1 Select if you need only Tax Details 1 as mandatory field e Both Select if you need both as mandatory fields 6 1 29 1 Defining Specifications for Unclaimed Deposits On the maturity date of a deposit you can opt to e Liquidate the deposit e Rollover the deposit e Move it to an unclaimed GL Interest for the term deposits liquidated during the specified schedules is handled in two ways e fa customer account has been specified interest is moved to the account during each liquidation event e You can opt to move the interest to an Unclaimed Interest GL When claimed the interest can be paid out of this GL Similarly on maturity the principal can be moved to specified Principal Liquidation Account if specified or to an Unclaimed Principal GL o Note the following e f you select the Move to Unclaimed GL option this specification takes precedence That is on maturity the funds will be moved directly to the respective Unclaimed GLs even if customer accounts for the principal and interest have been maintained 6 51 ORACLE e The Unclaimed Interest and Principal GLs are specified while maintaining an Interest and Charges IC Deposit Type product The Accounting Roles for
414. y Date of the original deposit Choose the Special Amount option and enter USD 1 000 in the Rollover Amount field This is what is termed a Special amount This amount will be rolled over and the remaining principal would be liquidated into the Principal Liquidation account that you specify or moved to the Unclaimed GL as per your specifications 5 4 8 3 Specifying TD Pay in Details for Deposit Specify the following TD Pay in Option You must specify the mode in which the payment will be made for the time deposit account The payment can be made by cash account transfer cheque or GL transfer TD Amount Specify the amount which is paid for the time deposit account in the account currency Offset Branch Choose the branch ID for the offset account specified in the next field from the option list Offset Account You have to specify the customer account from which the money is to be debited for booking the TD If you click on option list in the Offset Account field a list of all valid account numbers that is maintained in the branch specified in the previous field will be displayed Double click on the account that you want to specify as the offset account o The offset account and branch detail fields are enabled only if the option to payin is selected as the savings account Clearing Type Specify the clearing type for the transaction The adjoining option list displays a list of the clearing types maintained in the system
415. y the account class If you have selected the Default From as Account Class then you have to specify the Account Class mandatorily Else you can leave it blank If you select the Default From as Parent Account then on clicking of P button the system defaults the interest and deposit details from the parent TD account Or if you select the Default From as Account Class then on clicking of P button the system defaults the interest and deposit details from the account class selected 5 4 2 Banker s Cheque DD tab Click on Banker s Cheque DD tab to capture banker s cheque related details e Term Deposit Payout Details Webpage Dialog Branch Code Currency Account Term deposi Bankers Cheque DD PC Cheque DD Details Bank Code Payable Branch Instrument Type Currency Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Name Beneficiary Address Passportic Number Narrative Interest The following details are captured here Bank Code Specify the bank code of the Bankers cheque Payable Branch Specify the branch where the DD or cheque is payable 5 18 ORACLE Instrument Type The instrument type is displayed based on the payout type selected in the Term Deposit Account Maintenance screen Currency System defaults the TD Account currency as the currency of the cheque for the pay out Beneficiary Name Specify the name of the beneficiary for the pay out Beneficiary Address
416. yaadonsnseetmacctaeguny saaesoactaaiae ieda aE aa 11 5 11 6 1 Generating Form 1099 R as Part Of Initial PUling cccccccccccccccccccccccsssseseccceeecnaseeeeeceeesaaaseeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 11 5 11 6 2 Generating Form 1099 R after Tax Filing ccccccccccccccsseseccccccceccaeeesseeecceeeeaaaeseeeeceeesaaaseseeceseesaaaaeeees 11 5 11 6 3 Details printed on Form LOQQ R icccccccccsccccccccccce ce eeeeseccceeee a eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeseeeeesesaaaaeseeeeeeeaaaaes 11 5 11 6 4 Filing IRS Forms Electronically wc ccccccccccccccccssseeeccseccceeeneeeeseeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeesaaaaesseeeeeseuaaaaes 11 6 11 7 CUSTOMER ACCOUNT OPENING CONFIRMATION REPORT ccccsscccssccssscescccssccsscesccescceusscesscesseeeeseusceuacs 11 6 S PIPE ING IR BRO I oe A A 11 7 11 8 1 Contents of the Repoftt ecccccccccssseccccccccccccessseeecceeeeessseeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaesseeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeeeeeauaaeess 11 8 12 TERM DEPOSLI REPORTS sasiysssriiniiii oni issida iania tea i iE ENAA EAEE EAE AA 12 1 12 1 TERM DEPOSITS OPENED FOR THE PERIOD ccccscccssccsccesccncccsccscesccesscusceuccessesceuccessescenscesseussusccesseusss 12 1 12 2 TERM DEPOSITS CLOSED FOR THE PERIOD ssccsssccssccossccesseccecceccrscseccacceccsecseccaccaccrcsecseccacesccseccaccasesecs 12 3 12 3 TERM DEPOSITS RENEWED FOR THE PERIOD ccccsccceccssccecccsccscesccesceuscesccescescenscesseussenscusceuscesceusseuess 12 5 12 4 TERM DEPOSITS MATURITY REPORT
417. year end will be considered for computing tax Example Total Interest earned accrued Taxable Taxable Fin Booking Maturity No of Interest on financial interest interest Yr date date days rate year end period amt 11 Jun 2008 to 31 Mar 2008 30 Jun 2009 304 09 100000 1 Jun 08 09 395 8 8657 53 days 6663 01 a ORACLE 5 4 13 Maintaining Tax Code for Deposits You can maintain the tax rate details along with education cess and surcharge details in the Tax code for deposits maintenance screen To invoke this screen type STDTXRTE in the top right of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Y Tax code for deposits maintenance Webpage Dialog Saks Tax Group TDS Limit Financial Year Surcharge Limit Tax Rate Additional Tax rate Surcharge Description Description Additional Tax ratez Description Maker Date Time Mod No W Authorized oe CXI Checker Date Time a pes Specify the following details Tax Group Tax Group maintained in the Group Codes screen is displayed here Financial Year Specify the Financial to compute tax amount from the adjoining option list Tax Rate Specify the actual tax rate that is used to compute tax amount Description Specify a brief description of the tax rate Additional Tax Rate 1 Specify the percentage of additional tax rate like surcharge education cess that are used to compute tax amount Description Specify a brief
418. year is populated when the P button is clicked e TSD details period for which the TAX remittance is already done does not populate for the tax refunding e On authorization the sum of Refund TDS amount entered by the user needed to be refunded to the customer is credited to the TD recovery account of the customer The tax payable GL maintained for the purpose of refund is debited The refund amount is credited to the TD account itself if the recovery account is not maintained e Only Save and Auth UNLOCK Before Auth DELETE and QUERY operation are allowed in this screen e Application date on which refund transaction is input is considered as the value date for the transaction A e Amount tag used for this transaction is TAX _REFUND Example Total Refund TDS Excl Surcharge input by user 5000 Total Refund Surcharge input by user 500 Total Refund Addtni Tax input by user 150 Total refund amount will be computed as 5650 Total refund TDS Excl Surcharge Total Refund Surcharge Total Refund Addinl Tax The following tax related entries will be passed during authorization of Refund Transaction 5 125 ORACLE 5 4 29 Capturing Pay Out Parameters Details You can capture the parameters for automatic pay out by clicking on the TD Payout Details button To capture the details for opening a new TD as a part of pay out click on the Term Deposit tab If the payout of TD is TD BC DD or PC details for the sam
419. yed here Interest Amount The Interest amount on which tax is deducted is displayed here TDS Excluding Surcharge The TDS amount excluding surcharge and additional tax deducted on the interest amount paid to the customer is displayed here Surcharge The Surcharge amount computed based on the TDS amount is displayed here Additional Tax Amount The additional tax amount computed based on the TDS amount is displayed here TDS Amount The sum of TDS amount Excluding Surcharge Surcharge and additional tax amount is displayed here Refund TDS Excluding Surcharge This is the TDS amount Excluding Surcharge refunded to the customer Enter the refund amount not less than zero and greater than TDS Excluding Surcharge Refund Surcharge This is the Surcharge amount refunded to the customer Enter the refund amount not less than zero and greater than Surcharge Refund Addtnl Tax This is the additional tax amount refunded to the customer Enter the refund amount which should not be less than zero and greater than additional tax oie ORACLE Refund TDS Amt The sum of Refund TDS amount Refund Surcharge Refund Addtnl Tax is displayed here This is populated when the transaction is saved Refund TDS Amt LCY The LCY equivalent of Refund TDS Amt is computed and displayed in this field This is populated when the transaction is saved Note the following e TDS details for a given branch TD account and financial
420. ype is a Bank It is used only for reference purposes ane ORACLE 2 2 4 6 Maintaining Elements for Advice Generation The following elements will be available for advice generation for consolidated tax certificates CUSTOMERNO The customer number for Alphanumeric which the tax summary certificate is printed CUSTOMERNAME The customer name Alphanumeric FROMDATE The from date for which the Date certificate is generated TODATE The to date for which the Date certificate is generated TXNNUMBER The contract reference Alphanumeric 16 number characters CALCDATE The tax calculation date TAXCCY The tax currency Alphanumeric 3 characters TAXAMTINTAXCCY The tax amount in tax Number currency INTERESTAMT The interest amount basis Number amount on which the tax has been calculated 2 2 4 7 Indicating Requirement for Individual Tax Certificate You need to indicate whether an individual tax certificate is required for each transaction An individual tax certificate is a certificate advice which is generated for each individual event in a transaction resulting in computation deduction of tax from the customer s account The advice is linked to the product and is generated at the time of authorization of the contract event a ORACLE 2 2 4 8 Generating Individual Tax Certificate For contracts that have tax defined on interest liquidation an individual tax certificate will be generated by the system provided the tax certificat
421. ystem gives you a break up of the balance by the reference number Example Let us assume that for the month of November 2000 your bank has to spend USD 10 000 on miscellaneous expenses which include canteen charges telephone bills and other maintenance charges When the details of these expenses are entered the following entries are passed entry Dr Misc debit a c for 10 000 Cr Cash a c for 10 000 reconciling entry Dr expense a c for 3000 canteen charges Cr Misc Debit a c for 3000 Il reconciling entry Dr expense a c for 2000 telephone charges Cr Misc Debit a c for 2000 Ill reconciling entry Dr expense a c for 5000 maintenance Cr Misc debit a c for 5000 Thus the entire amount that was debited from miscellaneous debit account has been reconciled The total amount of the reconciliation entries should add up to match the amount of the first transaction e Miscellaneous Credit as in miscellaneous debit account in the miscellaneous credit accounts you post each transaction with a reference number In a miscellaneous credit account a single credit entry is matched subsequently with debit entries with the same reference number The system gives you a break up of the balance by reference numbers e Savings Account e Current Account Line Account This is used for creating accounts for charging limit fees Upon save of the account class with type as line account there will be an override specifying that the reporting G

Core Entities Version-1.0 9NT1425

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents